Home

QE3 Manual rev K PDF - SX

1. 33 Bus XR Bus Connections 27 XR Bus Potts ed 27 Cable Eenegths eee etae des 73 Cables Replacement Cables 23 Card Types Input and Output Cards 15 Power Supplies eec cort 18 Change Connection Screen 47 Change Password Screen 148 Change User Name Screen 148 Changing a Crosspoint 159 Changing Connections 46 Checking Control Mode 80 Circuit Blements inae etes 8 Command Packet s 32 Communication Settings BRS aa eE is 25 RS 232 Advantages Disadvantages 26 RSA ni ninanais 26 RS 422 Advantages Disadvantages 26 BS 95 haea A 26 Computer Control 12 Configuration Access Control Setup Menu 146 Configuration Menu 89 Configuration Menu Pass Code SOCOM edis eel ee 88 i 2 Configuration Settings 86 Features Men uie scence coe 106 I O Names Menu 120 127 133 Load Firmware Screen 100 Model Number Type Screen 92 Module Sizes Menu 93 Port Access Control Enable Disable Scree io fons Deseo da Ste iu 140 Set Control Mode Screen 107 Set Input Names Screen 134 Set Output Names Screen 135 SNMP Men
2. 02 XX XX 58 47 4D XX c cu 40 2D 2B XX STX ADR ADR X G M IN ee ta nx NH 10s XX 2E XX 03 XX ls s tenths ETX CHK IN Input port Must be between 001 and the number of system inputs 1 to 3 characters TENS ONES Value in dB from 13 to 18 Any value larger than 18 or smaller than 13dB will be rejected as invalid data range 1 to 3 characters TENTHS Rounded down to 0 or down to 5 1 to 2 characters Rev CL Page 113 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 46 4D 31 38 40 2D STX ADR ADR X G M 1 8 gt 35 2E 35 03 XX 5 5 ETX CHK Set manual gain control on for input 18 Set the dB level at 5 5dBm Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 46 4D 38 40 2B STX ADR ADR X G M 8 31 36 2E 30 03 XX 1 6 0 ETX CHK Set manual gain control on for input 18 Set the dB level at 16 0dBm Response Format 06 XX XX 58 46 4D 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X G M ETX CHK Page 114 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XGMO Set Gain Control to Manual Mode Output QRM and LTE only Gain control can be set to manual or automatic This command turns on manual gain control for the specified output By default when an output is set to manual mode the auto gain control settings are turned off Manual gain control can be set to amplify or attenuate an output Manual gain control has no feedback or i
3. usse 94 SRM Module Size Screen 94 SRO Module Size 95 96 SRO Module Size Screen 95 96 Standard Control Ports 139 Static IP Configuration Ethernet Address Screen 43 IP Configuration with DHCP Off 43 IP Configuration with DHCP On 43 Switching System Modules 10 System A DOES s aoro ii 139 System Commands System Commands from the Main Controller anien 8l System Commands from the Remote Controller s sss 81 System Commands from the Main Commoner sox ooi ad 8l System Commands from the Remote Controller s eese 81 System Controller Appearance cesso altas ud ded 13 Controller Module 12 FUNCOM oce tis ermal ua aih 12 Integrated Controller Front Panel 13 POLS sate oeste 12 Setting the Control Mode 80 System Commands from the Main Controller 1 o tedeiseitenadeton 8l System Commands from the Remote Controller s ess 81 System Features Alarm Condition Notification 6 Alarm Message Queue 6 Circuit BIementss uds ones daten 8 Fan Condition Monitoring 4 Input and Output RF Level Read 7 Internal Air Temperature Monitoring EE TEE 4 5 LCD Status Monitoring 5 Port Level Access Control 8 Rev K QE3
4. ccce cece es Off Matrix Size sc Ek RED MERE 64x64 Module Size esses 64x64 SROSIZG uns soltero ease o CER uS 4 The crosspoint connections will also revert back to 1 to 1 connections Input 1 connected to output 1 input 2 connected to output 2 etc Page 102 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Ethernet or Serial Port Download If the firmware is downloaded from the Ethernet port the controller will reboot itself after completing the download If the download is done via serial port the power must be cycled manually after the download is complete Both methods will upgrade the fimware they just use different ports and methods If for some reason your firmware is corrupted or your Ethernet connection is not working you can still upgrade the firmware through the serial port The ethernet download is the faster and easier method Why Download Firmware New firmware is continually being developed to enhance the system features make the system easier to use or simply add a new feature that a customer requested These firmware upgrades when available are not ususally nesseccary but may enable you to have more features previously not implemented on your firmware version If you feel you might need to upgrade your firmware contact Quintech for the latest available firmware version for your system Why Is Downloading Failing Some Quintech customers have encountered problems while downloading new firmware
5. e eeee esee ee esee eren seen netta setas eto nae 133 Figure 105 Write Name for Selected Input eere eee eee eee eene en ntn ntn 133 Figure 106 Select Output to Assign Name crees eee ee ee eren eee eene ernst nane tn nae 134 Figure 107 Write Name for Selected Output eere eee eter eene en entente 135 Figure 108 Port Access Control Enable Disable eere eee enne 139 Figure 109 Access Control Menu ceres eren e eene eene een ette sten seta setas etna tensa seio 140 Figure 110 Lock Keypad ose iret eta aa eoe be ea neo e poa eee pR Ya Ven bo bend a PV e Ye PEINE EVE Rp CRUS 141 Figure 111 Keypad Locked sseosseessecssoossoosssossssesssosssoossooossoosssossssesssoessoossoossssssssee 141 Figure 112 Unlock Keypad sscsssssssssosssscsssossssossosossossssostosesorsessoseasosooosossstees ssveo vissi 142 Figure 113 Login Logout e ssessesseessesoosseesoesoossoesoeseoesoesoeseoesoesoeseoesoessessossoessessossossse 143 Figure 114 Password Entry e sessosseesoescossoesoesoossoesoesooesossoessoesossoeseoesoossessossoosseesoseoosse 143 Figur TIS Lopott ceo erede reete nri veta cries ve SER VR d corde uen ie so sneno soes o SSos raose 144 Figure 116 Access COD IFOL cccscsccssscssdecscsstecctsatsousoesesteesackidgesstestheseshuntenatvavestacendsnsasins 145 Figure 117 Select UIT x ccssscesteucecessetssnves sedaceccundesssscv
6. 02 XX XX 58 47 54 44 38 40 32 6D 73 3 XX STX ADR ADR X G T D 8 a 2 m S ETX CHK Set auto gain control decay time on input 8 to 2 1000 of a second Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 54 44 38 40 32 13 3 XX STX ADR ADR X G T D 8 a 2 S ETX CHK Set auto gain control decay time on input 8 to 2 seconds Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 54 44 54 34 38 40 STX ADR ADR X G T D T 4 3 3 6 35 304 30 6D 73 3 XX 6 5 0 0 m S ETX CHK Set auto gain control decay time on input 43 to 6500 milliseconds or the equivalent of 6 5 seconds Response Format 06 XX XX 58 46 54 44 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X G T D ETX CHK Note Some firmware versions do not implement this command Rev CL Page 123 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XGTPA Set Gain Control Time Pre Attack Time Number of seconds or milliseconds the system waits before acting on an input signal if the gain control is set to start increasing signal strength If an input signal decreases below the user defined dB level the gain control will want to increase that signal power This is a set time interval the system will wait before starting that power increase process Can be set from 0 to 60 seconds in 1 1000 intervals This only applies to the gain control feature when a weak signal needs to be increased For delay time for weak signals refer to the XGPDT command 6699 Command will accept milliseconds or seconds User must
7. 76 RS 485 Serial Control In Port Terminati essensu nanas 76 RS 485 Termination Screen 75 Screen Refresh seseee 34 Screens Change Connection Screen 47 Change Password Screen 148 Change User Name Screen 148 Configuration Menu Pass Code Screenshot ei 88 Connection Status Screen 45 DHCP On Off Screen 42 Display Control Mode Screen 80 Enter Attenuation Value Screen 89 Ethernet Address Screen 43 1 9 QE3 Matrix Switching System Firmware Version Screen 50 Get Temperature Screen 55 Load Firmware Screen 100 Lock Keypad Screen 142 Model Number Type Screen 92 Password Entry Screen 144 Port Access Control Enable Disable SCEOGDL oui icin toos ha aai 140 Remote Initialization Screen 85 Report Power Supplies Status Screen 54 Reset Password Screen 40 RS 485 Termination Screen 75 Serial Mode Screen 39 Set Access Screen 149 150 153 Set Control Mode Screen 107 Set Input Names Screen 134 Set Output Names Screen 135 Set QEC Port Screen 41 Set SNMP Trap P iras oes 113 SNMP On Off Screen 112 SRM Module Size Sc
8. 40 Resetting the QEC Port Access PassWord ceci as iger 40 Set QEC Port 4 4 Set QEC Port Screen 41 QEC Port Number QEC Port Number Default Setting 42 What Is a QEC Port Number 4 Why Change the QEC Port Number Te 42 QEC Port Number Default Setting 42 QED iuis eese oido aasi 11 OBO eee Sled E 11 Quintech UCM Daisy Chaining s 29 Quintech UCM Port 20 Quintech UCM Port Crossover Adapter Delhi etait Ma GEES uc ds 30 Read Input RF dBm Signal Level 56 Read Output RF dBm Signal Level 59 63 Receiver Transmitter Termination 74 Re dundancy siete teet 21 AC Redunddnoys ean reetenss 21 DC Redundancy iste etr mee 21 Redundant Power Supplies 21 Refresh Mechanism 34 iSnncm tipses 139 Remote Addressing Adding Additional Remotes 83 Remote Initialization Screen 85 Setting the Serial Address 39 Remote Control Adding Additional Remotes 83 Display Control Mode Screen 80 Display Control Mode Init Remotes IMGTIU sai eub es ons emet EIS Ud sees 82 System Commands from the Remote Controller s uses 81 Remote Initialization Screen 85 Remote Not Working 175 Remote POLIS 52 sch qul eae 44 Remote Initialization Screen 85 RS 485 Port Termina
9. eere eee eren nenne 19 QED Function and Appearance oed niodo etc peascecesstgletien tates 19 QED SIZES hie dean a Riv daa ett Baie iis BL ale Ws Que eR Miia ne DE 19 Output Switch Module QEO cccscsssssssssscscsceccscvescsssnsscsonsescoonenses 20 QEO Function and Appearance vicina cae age er ad er dedii ta deae ee 20 ISO m 20 Connections and Port Descriptions 21 AC OWN oae uii Niro AN eii editi NI E iden 21 sunu 2 E 21 ENB POWer SUDDUCS e o oe kas cut tese eo ceo inne Cs Maes celts 21 AC COBDeoU DIS sooo A bu tear eat tee oes ss ed Mu sa eas 21 DAOI E EE E EL Cet t i Me ad 22 ii Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System RE SISTA ME Qe 22 RF Connections Inter Module sees eene nnne 22 RE CoDh Cctofsz ae tte ea trei iit fecveesetives haee test Pris te etse tivi Pen 23 Replacement Cables iste E QUADR EE RUE dan ch Ra Ee REN Ue eda RUE de TS 23 Control UN NETTES 24 Seri l T and Serial2 POtts 225 dde Iu 25 Serial Port Connectors ieaie ie i a 25 Serral Cable iiie Nope Hed nnus 25 Serial Communication Settings essere eere 25 RS 232 n sata el dtr sce A pipe UR Lee M de ae 25 RS 232 Advantages Disadvantages eese 26 TENA rr a riae deiis 26 RS 422 Advantages Disadvantages eese 26 IS ASI arpan dedun Mesutis etas usa ah a a f Loose es
10. Rev CL 03 XX ETX CHK Page 153 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol ZX Show Access Control On Off This command shows the current port number and whether access control is on or off for the port Command ZX lt PID gt where PID Port ID Response structure ZX lt PID gt lt access on off gt Port IDs 0 Current port whatever port is receiving the command 1 Local Keypad 2 Quintech UCM Remote Panel 3 PC Control In Serial 4 QEC Ethernet Port Socket A 5 QEC Ethernet Port Socket B 6 Telnet Ethernet Console Window y SNMP Port IDs 4 and 5 track each other and the setting will be the same for both Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 5A 58 3A 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR Z X 0 ETX CHK Example Response 06 XX XX 5A 58 3A 34 3A 31 03 XX ACK ADR ADR Z X 4 1 ETX CHK The current port is 4 QEC port and access control is on Page 154 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Negative Responses Occasionally the matrix will be unable to carry out a command due to various reasons The NAK reply set is provided to help determine where the error occurred A NAK reply will be sent after the matrix has received the CHK byte x Checksum Incorrect This reply is sent when the checksum sent by the computer controller is different from the one calculated by the matrix controller This message would indicate data has been corrupted during transmission
11. 32 Ethernet Address Screen 43 IP Configuration with DHCP Off 43 IP Configuration with DHCP On 43 Set SNMP Trap IP 113 SNMP cos dcs steel 33 TCP IP Serial Address 32 TCP IP Serial Address 32 B10 0 2 cet eee a 33 139 Telnet Console 33 Telnet Console ccs een vacat 33 Temperature Get Internal Temperature 55 Internal Air Temperature Monitoring EE ENS 4 5 Internal Temperature 55 Termination Front Panel RS 485 Termination 75 1 12 RS 485 Port Termination 76 RS 485 Serial Control In Port Termination xo sean S taster esens 76 RS 485 Termination Screen 75 Serial Termination 44 Serial Termination Screen 44 Testing the Communications 158 Traps Set SNMP Trap IP 113 SNMP TFaDSoio das intet 7 TrOubleshoOlng 4 oco rero e 168 Ethernet Problems 174 Front Panel LEDs 171 General Problems 170 ENB PONWBE odas e MEAN 171 Passwords and Permissions 176 Problems and Solutions 169 Problems with Crosspoint ConnecelloHsaioossoqustun as NAR 172 Remote Not Working 175 Serial Port Problems 173 Turning Off
12. 13 XRD Module Rear Panel 13 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System XRM Architecture Input and Output Cards 15 Power SUpplies decret enit 18 XRM Matrix System AC Connections eeeeeeee 21 Configuration Settings 86 Differences Between Main and Remotes niiin neite 79 Bbeatut S s seno r eects 3 Model Number Type Screen 92 Module Sizes Menu 93 MOGUlesz 5 E eter 9 SRM Module Size Screen 94 SRO Module Size Screen 95 96 System DI ZES ere dita Assn quA 9 bir mr aae e 22 1 13 QE3 Series Matrix Switching System Date Received Date Installed Serial Number NOTES
13. eee 76 Control Mode 79 106 107 Checking Control Mode 80 Display Control Mode Screen 80 Display Control Mode Init Remotes Meftr tnie periode 82 Set Control Mode Screen 107 Setting the Control Mode 80 Control Ports 24 44 139 Control Inzaauieeue iecit atero 139 Ethernet Connections 32 Ethernet Port eeessss 32 Local aan iic pecee unde EH 139 Qee Porto ciet ined 139 Quintech UCM Port 29 Remote chau aes 139 RS 485 Serial Control In Port Termination ciconia 76 Serial Quintech UCM Pin Definition HOT E 24 Tenet 1t ioo o cea ead 139 XR Bus Connections 27 XR Bus Ports cccccccccccceeeeserseeeees 27 Controller Appearance sessesseeseeesseserssreesrseresee 13 Controller Module 12 FUNGON S Sadoc eoe eee duo 12 Integrated Controller Front Panel 13 POTIS eisi onnar oa RC sd ern qud 12 Setting the Control Mode 80 System Commands from the Main Cont Oller s net eec edis 81 System Commands from the Remote Controller s ess 81 Controller Module 12 Controlling Monitoring 160 Controlling the Matrix 159 Creating and Managing Configurations PRU MT MCN MED URN 158 Crossover Quintech UCM Port C
14. 151 T O Cards Input and Output Cards 15 I O Names 120 127 131 132 133 VO Names Menu 120 127 133 Impedance Match 8 Initialization Initializing Remotes 8l Remote Initialization Screen 85 Remotes Initialization Procedure 82 When to Execute zie odios teh 81 Initializing Remotes 81 Input and Output Cards 15 Input and Output RF Level Read 7 Input Cards oue eth ec mee 15 Input Distribution XRD Module Rear Panel 13 Input RF Level Monitoring 5 6 Integrated Controller Front Panel 13 Integrated Redundant Power Supplies 21 Interface Options 44 DHCP On Off 5 ees 42 DHCP On Off Screen 42 Ethernet Address ette pisse 43 Ethernet Address Screen 43 Interface Options Menu 38 Reset Password Screen 40 RS 485 Termination Screen 75 Serial AAGdEess iuste tesis tecti 39 Serial Mode ies tite 39 Serial Mode Screen 39 Serial Termination Screen 44 Set QEC Port 4 41 Set QEC Port Screen 41 Interface Options Menu 38 Inter Module Connections 22 Internal Air Temperature Monitoring 4 5 Internal Tem
15. 3A 42 XX 2C XX B nn 7 nn 3 XX ETX CHK Rev CL Dials read left to right 2F Hex converts 047 in the ADR field to write to that unit 3 QE3 unit address 054 3 XRM unit address 026 3A 3A 3A XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol or for QE3 from top to bottom You are only concerned with the 2F on the to 47 decimal So you would use 5 34 5 4 2 36 2 6 49 XX I nn 49 XX O nn 49 XX I nn 3A 4F O 03 XX ETX CHK dial reads 36 03 XX ETX CHK 2C 2C 2C XX nn dial reads 1A XX nn XX nn XX nn 2C XX Page 105 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XRM Response Example 06 XX XX 58 43 3A 49 35 3A 42 33 ACK ADR ADR X c I o B 1 3A 30 33 2C 36 ETX CHK O 3 ji 6 03 XX Input card 5 not responding 1 half of bridge card 1 not responding Output cards 3 and 6 not responding XRM Response Example 06 XX XX 58 43 3A 49 ACK ADR ADR X C I All cards installed and responding QED Response Format 06 XX XX 58 43 3A 49 ACK ADR ADR X C I 3 XX ETX CHK QEO Response Format 06 XX XX 58 43 3A 49 ACK ADR ADR X C O 3 XX ETX CHK QE3 Response Format 06 XX XX 58 43 3A 49 ACK ADR ADR X c I 3A AF XX AC XX 3 O nn nn ETX Page 106 of 157 3A 42 3A AF 3 XX B O ETX CHK XX 2C XX nn nn XX 2C XX nn j nn XX 2 XX nn nn XX CHK
16. QUINTECH The Source for RF Reliability OPERATING MANUAL QE3 MATRIX SWITCHING SYSTEM Quintech Electronics and Communications Inc 250 Airport Road Indiana PA 15701 USA Toll Free 800 839 3658 Local amp International 724 349 1412 Fax 724 349 1421 E mail info quintechelectronics com Website www quintechelectronics com QNQUINTECH The Source for RF Reliability s m 7 QE3250032X32CAFFF000 ISO 9001 2008 Modular Hot Swap Matrix Switching System General Description The QE3250032X32CAFFFO000 is a matrix switch and switching subsystem that provides a complete 32x32 matrix including hot swappable cards redundant power supplies and redundant system controllers in a 6 RU chassis The modularity of the QE3250032X32CAFFF000 provides easy access to cards for seamless upgrades and maintenance via the front panel without requiring cables to be disconnected or disrupting the signal paths of other cards in the system Specifications Operating Frequency Gain Range manual mode Impedance P1dB OIP RF Input Power RF Output Power Output AGC Level Frequency Response Isolation input to input Isolation output to output Isolation input to output Input Return Loss Output Return Loss Noise Figure Configuration RF Connectors Power Requirements Power Consumption Local Control Remote Control Software Mechanical Weight Certifications 10 dBm to
17. STX ADR ADR P 4 4 D 30 03 M 0 ETX D 31 03 M 1 ETX Example Write Command 02 XX XX 50 STX ADR ADR P Turn priority Off 02 XX XX 50 STX ADR ADR P Turn priority on 4 4 D 30 03 M 0 ETX D 3h 03 M 1 ETX Positive Write Response 06 XX XX 50 ACK ADR A Page 88 of 157 DR P 4 D 03 XX M ETX CHK XX CHK XX CHK XX CHK XX CHK Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Read Command Format 02 XX XX 50 4D 03 XX STX ADR ADR P M ETX CHK 02 XX XX 50 4D XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR P M X X X ETX CHK Example Read Command 02 XX XX 50 4D O03 XX STX ADR ADR P M ETX CHK Read current system wide priority mode setting 02 XX XX 50 4D 30 30 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR P M 0 0 1 ETX CHK Read user that locked output 01 while priority is on Positive Read Response 06 XX XX 50 4D 30 03 XX ACK ADR ADR P M O0 ETX CHK Priority mode is off 06 XX XX 50 4D 31 03 XX ACK ADR ADR P M 1 ETX CHK Priority mode is on 06 XX XX 50 4D 31 03 XX ACK ADR ADR P M 7 ETX CHK user7 locked the output Rev CL Page 89 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Q Check Queue This command will read the change queue Each control port for the system maintains a change queue that allows changes throughout the system to be tracked The change queue contains up to 8 crosspoint
18. 02 XX XX 4F 53 30 30 31 STX ADR ADR O S 0 0 Query the state of output 1 03 XX ETX CHK Page 86 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Examples of Positive Responses 06 XX XX 4F 53 30 30 32 4C 30 31 03 XX ACK ADR ADR O S 0 0 2 L 0 1 ETX CHK Output 1 is connected to input 2 is locked and only users in group 1 are allowed access to the output 06 XX XX 4F 53 30 30 37 55 36 46 03 XX ACK ADR ADR O S 0 0 7 U 6 F ETX CHK Output 1 is connected to input 7 is unlocked and users in group 1 2 3 4 6 and 7 are allowed access to the output Note This command will be accepted regardless of whether a user is logged in Rev CL Page 87 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol PM Priority Mode Read Write This command turns Priority Mode on or off or reads back priority status of the system Priority mode assigns user priority to the lock unlock function Any user can lock an output If the priority mode is on the user that locked the output is recorded The output can then only be unlocked by a user with equal or higher priority than the user that locked the output Priority hierarchy is set and not adjustable Users are listed below from highest priority to lowest priority user highest priority user2 user3 user4 user5 user6 user7 users user9 no user lowest priority Write Command Format 02 XX XX 50 STX ADR ADR P 02 XX XX 50
19. Example Response 06 XX XX 58 52 43 3A 2D 31 31 2E 32 3A 2D 31 32 2E 36 ACK ADR ADR X R C 1 1 3 2 1 2 R 6 3A 2D 31 33 2E 30 3A 2D 31 32 2E 35 3A 03 XX 1 3 O 1 2 5 E ETX CHK XRD input RF level read 11 2 dBm XRM input RF level read 12 6 dBm XRM output RF level read 13 0 dBm XRO output RF level read 12 5 dBm NOTE Some firmware releases do not support this command Refer to the firmware release notes at the beginning of this document for details Page 136 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XRI RF Input Signal Level Check This command will report the RF level in dBm at a particular XRM QE3 or QRM matrix system input This will give the RF level at the XRM QE3 QRM input for matrices consisting of a single XRM QE3 QRM or the XRD QED for larger matrices Old format required leading zeros Current version is variable in length from 1 to 3 characters No leading zeros required Command Format 02 XX XX 58 52 49 XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X R I n lt a aoa EIX CHK n Input number of matrix Response Format 06 XX XX 58 52 49 XX XX XX 2E XX 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X R I t TENS ONES 1 10 ETX CHK Example Command 02 XX XX 58 52 49 30 30 35 03 XX STX ADR ADR X R I 0 0 5 ETX CHK Check RF level on matrix input 5 Example Response 06 XX XX 58 52 4
20. 4 5 E 5 ETX CHK Set the Q Sense threshold value for input 16 to 45 5 dBm Response Format 06 XX XX 42 54 03 XX ACK ADR ADR B I ETX CHK Page 50 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol BTR Read Q Sense Threshold for Input This command will return the Q Sense threshold level in dBm for the specified input A QE3 may return 99 which means the input threshold has been turned off Command Format 02 XX XX 42 54 52 XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR B I R IN3 IN2 IN ETX CHK IN Primary Input to read status Must be between 001 and the number of system outputs Always 3 characters Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 42 54 52 30 31 36 03 XX STX ADR ADR B I R 0 I 6 ETX CHK Get Q Sense threshold value for system input 16 Response Format 06 XX XX 42 54 52 XX XX XX 40 2B 2D XX XX ACK ADR ADR B I R IN3 N2 N1 10s ls 2E XX 03 XX 10th ETX CHK Alternate QE3 Response Format 06 XX XX 42 54 52 2B 2D XX XX 2E XX 03 XX ACK ADR ADR B T R 10s qe 3 10th ETX CHK Example Response Sent 06 XX XX 42 54 52 30 31 36 40 2D 34 35 2E 35 XX XX ACK ADR ADR B I R 0 1 6 4 5 9 ETX CHK The Q Sense threshold value for input 16 is 45 5 dBm Alternate QE3 Example Response Sent 06 XX XX 42 54 52 2D 34 35 2E 35 XX XX ACK ADR ADR B I Re 4 5 3 0 ETX CHK The Q Sense threshold value for
21. 7 27 2 20 08 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Add additional XRO attenuation for greater factory flexibility in XRM system testing No changes to customer features 7 28 07 14 08 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Add additional test modes for factory acceptance tests Autoroute minimum dB level and Delta dB value now can be set at front panel 7 29 09 23 08 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Initialization fixes 7 30 02 09 09 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Added Autoroute errors to front panel 7 31 05 27 09 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Added self diagnostic test Large system fan PS route data temperature reads All errors to front panel Boot up shows data Added IS XGR and XRW support 7 32 07 14 09 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Minor enhancements to Screens scrolling 7 33 07 22 09 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Screens repair Improved front panel boot up diagnostics 7 34 08 4 09 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Fix input attenuation and fan read screens Expand boot up LCD comments Rev CL Page 7 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol 7 42 10 15 09 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet Firmware Date Protocol Field Update Control Board Notes Lj iGepabli
22. Listed here are some of the most common solutions to problems associated with a firmware download Serial Port Download Method Solutions 1 Use a one to one straight through serial port cable Do not use a null modem cable or adapter Test the cable with an Ohmmeter to make sure each pin is connected to the same pin on both ends Pin 1 connected to only pin 1 pin 2 connected to only pin 2 ect Test all nine pins If there are pins that are not connected the download will not work 3 Before starting the download the controller has to be in firmware download mode Rev K Page 103 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System 4 If using RS 232 check that you are connected to the Control In or PC Control port 5 Copy the unzipped upgrade kit and run the applications from your root C or D drive A directory path with more than 104 characters causes problems with some PC operating systems 6 Make sure the COM port number in the rabbit field utility matches the com port number you are connected to on your PC 7 Try bumping down the baud rate to 57600 in the RFU utility 8 Make sure the RFU utility is pointing to the correct files Cold Loader coldload bin Pilot BIOS pilot bin Flash table flash ini 9 Make sure the serial port mode is configured in RS 232 mode Ethernet Download Method Solutions 1 If for some reason the firmware and or Ethernet connection is no longer working you must download through the serial port
23. Local Keypad Remote Remote Port Ctrl In PC Control In QEC PortA Ethernet Port QEC PortB Ethernet Port Telnet Telnet Console Use the up and down scroll arrows to display the port for which access control will be configured then press the F1 key to toggle access control on or off for that port Press F4 to return to the Features Menu Rev K Page 139 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Once access control is enabled for a port it will only accept passive monitoring commands unless a valid user logs in to that port These commands allow for passive monitoring of the matrix but do not allow changes to be made C F KS O OS and Q Other protocol commands will return with a command unavailable NAK u response See the protocol document for more information Access Control Menu Option 3 in the Main Menu displays the Access Control Menu screen From this menu you can configure various types of access controls Pressing 1 displays the Keypad Lock Screen that allows you to lock or unlock access to the front panel keypad Pressing 2 displays the Login Logout screen that controls access to certain capabilities based upon the particular user access group to which a user belongs A third option Setup will only appear when you are logged into the controller as Admin It enables the administrator to define and configure the access capabilities for various users Pressing F4 returns you to the Main Menu 1 Keyp
24. Q SENSE On off per input Tt Change Options Fl Select F4 Exit Figure 87 Q SENSE on off Turning on or off the Q SENSE function on an input will not exclusively enable the Q SENSE function on that input The input also has to be set up as a primary input and the threshold RF level has to be set in order for the Q SENSE function to be enabled properly Input 32 Q SENSE Off i Scroll or Enter F1 Change F4 Exit Figure 88 Q SENSE on off Toggle up or down or enter the input number and the current Q SENSE status is displayed F1 toggles the function on or off for the input Page 120 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Q SENSE Input Pair Setup The input pair has to be selected Q SENSE requires a primary input and a backup input to be specified Once the numbers are specified the 2 inputs cannot be used with any other Q SENSE inputs The Q SENSE function can support multiple Q SENSE pairs but the Q SENSE pair always consists of only one primary and one backup input Select Primary Backup Input Pairs Tt Change Options Fl Select F4 Exit Figure 89 Primary Backup Setup Enter F1 to set up one or more Q SENSE input pairs If an input is unused by the Q SENSE function the display will look like the following Input 6 No backup selected Fl Select F4 Exit i Scroll or Enter Figure 90 Select Primary Input Press F1 will select the current input as primary Rev K Page 121 of 176 QE3 Ma
25. Q Sense A B switch in effect Automatic Gain Control AGC value out of bounds RF input level out of set bounds QRM in Q route Route failure Failure on the new route established by Q route Output s Q Sense A B switched backup input RF level is low out of bounds Cooling fan failure 9o cl Oxo U Fe eto The M command response also contains an overflow flag If the message queue is full a new message will cause the queue contents to be sent in an SNMP TRAP message to the set IP address The message queue is then cleared and the new message entered to the queue Messages not read via the M command or SNMP are lost when the queue overflows When the M command is next executed the response will have the overflow flag set Issuing an M command clears the message queue overflow flag and also resets the alarm bit in the change flag See the C command for more information The response to the M command contains the standard response header of an acknowledge serial address and the command echo followed by a flag bit and the message count Messages are placed in the queue in the order that they occur and are separated by a colon Messages are variable in length The maximum size of the queue is 128 characters including separating colons between messages Each message contains an address This address of a given module is determined by looking at the right 2 dials on the control board The left 2 dials set up the type of module The
26. QE3 Matrix Switching System Manage Users Only available if logged in as Admin 1 This allows you to change usernames and passwords OK confirms and writes any changes to the QE3 then closes the window CANCEL closes the window and cancels any pending changes RESET cancels all changes and sets names and passwords back to what the program read in when the window was open REFRESH re rereads usernames and passwords from the QE3 APPLY writes all pending names and passwords to the switch and keeps the window open Manage Groups Only available if logged in as Admin 1 This allows changes to users allow or deny permissions for all outputs Group 1 is the Admin Group 2 is user2 etc A checkmark indicates that the user has permission to change that output Output permissions can also be changed from protocol commands or the front panel All three require Admin privileges Input Permission QE3 firmware provides both input and output access control Output access control can be set up in the group administration window Input access control can be set up from protocol commands and the front panel Scripts The run script option allows multiple protocol commands to be sent to the QE3 Scripts can define anything from multiple crosspoint setups input and output naming schemes Any QE3 compatible commands in the QE3 protocol document can be used in a script file Rev K Page 163 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Writing Data to the
27. Serial 1 is connected to controller A Serial 2 is connected to controller B The serial ports are typically connected to a PC serial port if control of the switch is to occur from a personal computer connection All operations of the matrix can be controlled from the serial ports These connectors are configurable and can operate in one of three separate modes The ports can communicate in the RS 232 RS 422 and RS 485 serial interface standards Serial Port Connectors The serial ports are standard DB 9 female serial connectors The pin definitions depend on how the serial ports are configured They are shown in Table 2 Serial Cable Each serial connector is shared for both RS 232 and RS 422 485 interfaces A NULL MODEM or crossover cable is not required on these ports The ports will not work using a null modem adapter or null modem cable Use only a straight through one to one cable Serial Communication Settings The serial port parameters are the same regardless of whether you are using RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 The parameters are fixed at 9600 baud 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit 8N1 The command protocol for controlling the switch is provided in Appendix D RS 232 RS 232 was designed for communication of local devices It supports one transmitter one receiver and uses single ended signals over unbalanced unterminated wires Single ended means the signal is sent over one wire with respect to a single ground source
28. 2 The controller does not have to be in firmware download mode to upgrade the firmware via the Ethernet port 3 If connecting directly to a PC network card use a cross over CATS Ethernet cable 4 If you are connecting to a hub or switch use a 1 to 1 straight through CATS Ethernet cable 5 Check the cable for pinched or broken conductors This is more common than you think The pin outs for both cable types are in Table 3 Ethernet Cable Pinout 6 Check the IP address gateway and subnet mask of your PC An easy solution is to turn on DHCP and power cycle the controller This will allow your Ethernet DHCP server to assign the three addresses to the controller Page 104 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System These 3 addresses consist of 4 sets of numbers These individual numbers range from 0 to 255 They are addresses that allow the PC to find the controller on the network If the mask or gateway for the PC doesn t match the controller mask and gateway you may be able to see the controller on the network but a firmware download will not work Make sure the first three sets of numbers match the gateway Make sure the IP address of the unit has the first three sets of numbers as the gateway and IP of the PC To find the IP gateway and mask numbers Windows 95 98 Open a dos window Type winipcfg A window will be displayed that shows your PC s configuration Windows NT Me 2000 XP Select Start gt Run Type command i
29. Fan 2 XRDO1 Warning Fan 2 on XRD at address 01 is running slower than normal Page 16 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XRM Power Supply Alarm This SNMP trap command indicates the power supply has a fault or failure condition Additional information can be found by using the power supply protocol command XP Complete trap lt PSX YYYZZ Warning gt Description structure lt PS gt Alarm description Power supply problem lt X gt Power supply number PS 1 is on left PS 2 is on right lt YYY gt Type of unit indicating the alarm lt ZZ gt Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board lt Warning gt Alarm description Example Alarm PX 2 XRD01 Warning Power supply on right on XRD at address 01 has an error condition Rev CL Page 17 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XRM Keypad LCD Alarm This SNMP trap command indicates the LCD and keypad have a fault condition Complete trap lt KP LCD XXXY Y Warning Description structure lt KP LCD gt Alarm description LCD problem lt XXX gt Type of unit indicating the alarm lt YY gt Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board lt Warning gt Alarm description Example Alarm lt KP LCD XRMO00 Warning The keypad LCD has a fault condition
30. Page 18 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XRM RF Card Offline This SNMP trap command indicates an RF card that was operating has stopped responding Indicates a failure or the card has been removed from the chassis The XRM has 3 types of cards and this trap indicates the type and location of the failure Each XRM has 8 input cards 8 output cards and 4 bridge cards The input and output cards are numbered from right to left The first input card is the one farthest to the right The XRM also has 4 bridge cards numbered from top to bottom Complete trap Output card X YY YZZ offline Bridge card X YYYZZ offline Input card X YYYZZ offline Description structure Output card Bridge card Input card Cards type description x Card number lt YYY gt Type of unit indicating the alarm lt ZZ gt Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board lt offline gt Alarm description Example Alarm lt Output card 3 XRMO0 offline gt Third from the right output cards has gone offline Rev CL Page 19 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XRD XRO RF Card Offline This SNMP trap command indicates an RF card that was operating has stopped responding Indicates a failure or the card has been removed from the chassis The XRD and XRO have 32 cards The cards are numbers starting at t
31. Positive Response 06 XX XX 4E 52 4F 30 31 36 52 65 63 76 72 32 03 XX ACK ADR ADR N R O 0 1 6 R e Ee V E 2 ETX CHK Output 16 is named Recvr2 Note This command will be accepted regardless of whether a user is logged in Page 82 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol NS Name Set This command sets a new name for an input or output This name is displayed on the front panel LCD of the matrix UCM for convenience when operating the unit manually Any remote commands to set crosspoints must still use input and output numbers Names can consist of any standard keyboard character when set using the N or NS command Each name can be up to seven characters long Names can also be set manually from the front panel of the UCM but are limited to using the characters a z A Z 0 9 and space since there is a simple keypad for entry Command structure NS lt I O gt lt nnn gt lt aaaaaaa gt I O I for input and O for output nnn Input or output number Aaaaaaa Up to 7 alphanumeric characters Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 4E 53 49 30 30 37 53 61 74 31 56 03 XX STX ADR ADR N S I 0 0 7 e a t 1 V ETX CHK Set the name of input 7 to SatlV Positive Response 06 XX XX 4E 53 49 30 30 37 03 XX ACK ADR ADR N S I 0 0 7 ETX CHK Note An alternate version of the NS command will be accepted to maintain compatibility with a previous custom version of the command This version
32. Rev K Page 3 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Q SENSE Quintech is proud to introduce Q SENSE which provides you with increased flexibility in meeting your RF routing needs Q SENSE enables you to configure a switching threshold power and backup input for any input If the measured input power drops below the threshold Q SENSE reroutes all outputs connected to that primary input to the backup input The QE3 offers multiple options for the recovery from a failed input Upon receiving a restore command the system will restore all primary input connections if the output status has not changed after the Q SENSE function executed Power Supply Monitoring All power supplies in a QE3 system are continually monitored If the power supply is unplugged fails or has a fault condition an error message will be generated That message will include the power supply number and the location of the power supply in the system QE3 Fan Condition Monitoring All fans in a QE3 system are continually monitored If the fan RPM drops below a set RPM value an error message will be generated That message will include the fan number and the location of the fan in the system Power Supply Fan Condition Monitoring All fans in a QE3 power supplies system are continually monitored If one of the dual power supply fans fails an error message will be generated That message will include the location of the fan in the system Internal Air Temperature Monito
33. 149 150 153 Set Control Mode Screen 107 Set dBm Warning Level 53 Set Input Names eeesesee 134 Set Input Names Screen 134 Set Input RF Warning Level 53 Set Output Names sess 135 Set Output Names Screen 135 Set QEC Port Haaai en rtan 41 Set QEC Port Screen 4 Set SNMP Trap IP 113 Setting Operating Panels 34 Setting the Control Mode 80 Setting the Serial Address 39 Setting Up the Communication Parameters eei ette eei tae 156 Setting User ACCESS ses 150 Settings RS 232 ennienni iav RE d 25 ec D iss 26 ROSS actuate anaes 26 SHG dde sociae Aa tet vies 21 Signal Reflection cetero 74 Eliminating Signal Reflection 74 SINE nc ede T e REGE 33 111 PROMS starts de au teo estende 33 Set SNMP Trap IP 113 SNMP Additional Features 33 SNMP Neils 54d Reeth eis 111 SNMP On Off Screen 112 SINNIPOPEADSAS o attese dete eve tes 7 SNMP Additional Features 33 Rev K SNMP Menu eeeeeeeeenee 111 SNMP On Off eessssses 112 SNMP On Off Screen 112 SNMP Protocol Enable Disable 111 112 SNMP Traps tinct oie ones 7 SRM Module Size
34. 50 dBm 1 5 dB 0 5 dB over any 36 MHz channel 65 dB min 60 dB min 50 dB min 14 dB 14 dB 22 dB 0dB gain L Band IF 950 2150 MHz 50 200 MHz 12 dB to 18 dB in 12 dB to 18 dB in 0 5 dB steps 0 5 dB steps 750 750 0 dBm 1 dBm 10 dBm 9 dBm 10 dBm to 70 dBm 10 dBm to 70 dBm 10 dBm 10 dBm 10 dBm to 50 dBm 1 5dB 0 5 dB over any 36 MHz channel 65 dB min 60 dB min 50 dB min 13 dB 10 dB 26 dB 0 dB gain 32 inputs 32 outputs Type F 75 O 100 240 VAC autoranging 50 60 Hz 328W Front panel keypad with LCD display RS 232 RS 422 485 SNMP TELNET or TCP IP via customer supplied PC PC compatible operating software and protocol included with the system 6 RU 10 5 H x 19 W x 25 1 4 D including rear handles 57 lbs CE NRTL TUV FCC Part 15 Note 20 dBm minimum input signal level is recommended from 50 200 MHz to achieve 50 dBc spurious noise ratio 250 Airport Road Indiana PA 15701 800 839 3658 724 349 1412 Fax 724 349 1421 hitp www quintechelectronics com info quintechelectronics com 2011Quintech Electronics and Communications Inc All rights reserved All product designs and specifications are subject to change without notice QE3250032X32CAFFFO000 Rev G CO 15364 Page 1 of 2 QUINTECH ES CONTROL A CONTROL B ale alo gla ale 99 a A Le Oreconnect power conde from ACT and AC to remove al
35. Interface Options 3 Remote Control F4 Exit Figure 56 System Options Menu From this menu you can elect to change the system configuration change the communications setup or set up communications with an optional 1RU controller The remote control refers to setting up an additional 1RU controller not typically sold with a QE3 system The main controller is always integrated into one of the 6RU QE3 units The remote control will set up an additional IRU remote controller Rev K Page 87 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Configuration Menu Warning The settings under the configuration menu are included in case of a system upgrade or servicing Most settings included under the configuration menu are set at the factory and should never be changed Exceptions to this may be Setting up SNMP protocol Naming Inputs and Outputs Changing Priority mode Changing access control for a port Option 1 of the System Options Menu displays the Configuration Menu Pass code screen To invoke the Configuration Menu Pass code screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 2 System Options 1 Configuration Enter code to change factory settings Fl Enter F4 Exit Figure 57 Configuration Menu Pass code Page 88 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Factory Settings Code Number A code has been introduced into the front panel hierarchy in order to prevent accidental changes to the system settings If valid changes
36. Out 1 In 1 Output 1 Input 1 F1 Enter F2 Protect Change 1 F4 Exit Figure 17 Change Connection The menu heading will change from showing the assigned names to Change and the cursor will move to the right side of the display just after Input Select the new input by either typing it in or scrolling through the available inputs with the arrow keys Press F1 to enter the change No connection will be made until you press F1 To exit back to the main menu without making any changes press F4 Rev K Page 47 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Locking and Unlocking Connections This function is available if the user is logged on with permissions or if access control for the local keypad setting is off Pressing F2 while the Connection Status screen is displayed locks unlocks the connection status of the currently displayed output The display is not currently able to display the locked or unlocked condition of the output If the display shows the F1 and F2 options but the output cannot be changed the output is locked Simply press F2 to unlock the output and then proceed to change the output connection The F2 button operates as a toggle Pressing it once locks the connection as currently specified Pressing it again disables the lock thereby allowing changes to be made The F1 button has no effect upon the output s connection status while the lock is enabled The connection must be unlocked before any changes to the connect
37. Output card 3 QE300 Lower bank offline Lower bank output cards number 3 has gone offline Page 24 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol QE3 Power Supply AC Input Alarm This SNMP trap command indicates the AC input to the supply is not plugged in Complete trap lt PSX AC Input error YYYZZ gt Description structure lt PSX gt Power supply number 1 on left 2 on right lt AC input error gt Alarm description lt YYY gt Type of unit indicating the alarm lt ZZ gt Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board Rev CL Page 25 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol QE3 Power Supply DC Output Alarm This SNMP trap command indicates the DC output of the supply is low or not functioning Complete trap PSX DC out error YYYZZ gt Description structure lt PSX gt Power supply number 1 on left 2 on right lt DC out error gt Alarm description lt YYY gt Type of unit indicating the alarm lt ZZ gt Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board Page 26 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol QE3 Power Supply Temperature Alarm This SNMP trap command indicates the power supply temperature is exceeding normal operating limits Complete trap lt PSX Temp Warning YYYZZ gt Description s
38. ecce eee ee ee eene eene eene enne 24 Figure 3 XR Bus Connections oy ccsssessscsecssscensstcasocsensessicoossceseosteessseeteneceonsseudceneacensestens 28 Figure 4 Quintech UCM Connection cscccssscsssssssscsssccssscsssssssscsssssscssoeseoees 31 Table 3 Ethernet Cable Pinout s soeseeseoeseessessoesoosseesoesoossoesoesooesoesoeeeoesosssessossoossessose 32 Figure 5 Mam MehUsissessossrseroeteccesstessriscsasssoss rieres seson soseste SG eEbE qe pu iuo DrbRec Duca us eeu 34 Figure 6 Interface Options Menu eere eese eene eese een senserat esatta se tasses sets s toas 38 Figure 7 Serial Mod ration Pub retdeiex iii cetiir das as ie rAi d ae IARE NRI 39 Figure 8 Serial Address e iste 40 Figure 9 Reset Password i nei casseesedcccensssansndcdscccessddeabacsdstvedd sceesasidessivccccusbaccastsees 40 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Rev K Ethernet POrt 1 nene eoe ea veas ee che o Dno eo teo ee eder eat pe onses eissaia 41 Lern e 43 Serial Termination i scsccocssssccossvcscsecsesccsedesesecscocsessesecosesecoss
39. the front panel is unlocked and monitoring is enabled the status of the keypad lock will be updated within the specified monitoring interval Controlling Monitoring Monitoring the current status of the QE3 can be enabled or disabled using the START STOP button on the main window When monitoring is enabled the data transfer activity box in the lower left corner of the main window will flash green each time the QE3 is polled for information Rev K Page 159 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Online Offline The Online Offline button is useful when you want to change your communication settings without closing the program While communicating with the QE3 the Online Offline button will display Go Offline Clicking the button will stop communications with the MRF and close any Ethernet connections While offline the button will display Go Online Clicking the button will re establish communications with the QE3 Options Various global and configuration options can be specified via the Options menu which is under the Tools menu The Options window can be displayed by choosing Options in the Tools menu Configuration options are stored in saved configurations Global options are not Load last configuration on startup This option automatically loads the last configuration that was used when the program is restarted Default On Debug mode Setting this option forces the program to wait the entire specified Read Timeout
40. 06 XX XX 49 53 30 31 03 XX ACK ADR ADR I S 0 1 ETX CHK only users in group 1 are allowed access to the input 06 XX XX 49 53 36 46 03 XX ACK ADR ADR I S 6 F ETX CHK users in group 1 2 3 4 6 and 7 are allowed access to the input Note This command will be accepted regardless of whether a user is logged in Page 66 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol KL Keypad Lock This command locks the front panel keypad as a convenience feature to prevent accidental keystrokes To unlock the keypad use the KU command Command Sent 02 XX XX 4B 4C 03 XX STX ADR ADR K L ETX CHK KLPositive Response 06 XX XX 4B 4C 03 XX ACK ADR ADR K L ETX CHK Note The front panel will display Keypad Locked The keypad can be unlocked from the front panel by entering the 3 digit password 857 Note To secure against unauthorized changes from the front panel keypad use Access Control features See the user s manual and the Z commands for more information Rev CL Page 67 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol KS Keypad State This command gives the locked unlocked state of the front panel keypad Command Sent 02 XX XX 4B 53 03 XX STX ADR ADR K S ETX CHK Positive Responses 06 XX XX 4B 53 4C 03 XX ACK ADR ADR K S L ETX CHK keypad locked 06 XX XX 4B 53 55 03 XX ACK ADR ADR K S U ETX CHK keypad unlocked Note This command will b
41. 06 XX XX 58 46 52 4D 40 2B 31 33 2E 35 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X G R M 1 8 P 0 ETX CHX Input set at 18 0 dB of gain in manual mode 06 XX XX 58 46 52 4D 40 2D 31 33 2E 35 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X G R A E 1 0 S ETX CHX Input auto gain control enabled and level set at 10 5dBm Page 116 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XGRO Gain Control Read Status Output This is QRM and LTE command This command will report the output gain control settings and RF level of the specified output LTE Since the LTE does not support AGC automatic gain control the mode returned from the LTE will always be M for manual Also because the LTE supports gain values in increments of 25 dB the tenths value will be one of four digits 0 2 5 or 7 which respectively represent the values 00 25 50 and 75 Therefore if a value of 13 2 is returned the actual attenuation value is 13 25 dB Likewise if a value of 06 7 is returned it represents 6 75 dB Command Format 02 XX XX 58 47 52 4F XX XX XX03 XX STX ADR ADR X G R O OUT3 OUT2 OUTI1 ETX CHK OUT Output to read status Must be between 001 and the number of system outputs Always 3 characters Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 46 52 30 31 36 03 XX STX ADR ADR X G R 0 1 6 ETX CHK Read gain control status of system output 16 Response Format 06 XX XX 58 46 20 4F 4D 41 40 2B 2D XX XX 2E ACK ADR A
42. 141 Access Control Setup Menu 146 Configuration Menu 89 Display Control Mode Init Remotes Mei ieman ana 82 Features Menu 106 Front Panel Hierarchy 35 Get Output RF Levels Menu58 59 63 I O Names Menu 120 127 133 Interface Options Menu 38 Main Men eee 34 Options Menu Screen 108 110 Select Input to Set Threshold Menu 53 SNMP MENU neisa tte grae 111 System Information Menu 49 System Options Menu 87 System Setup Menu 90 NiGdel oat engl 90 92 Model Number Type Screen 92 Module Inputs Outputs 90 Module Interconnections 9 Module Sizes niet 93 Module Sizes Menu 93 Module Sino res a OM Rd des 9 Controller Module 12 Definition OL fioe eet 9 Descriptions oo edic dete 12 Module Interconnections 9 Module Sizes Menu 93 SRM Module Size Screen 94 SRO Module Size Screen 95 96 Switching System Modules 10 System Setup Menu 90 Types of Modules 10 Monitor a Connection 45 Monitoring va are inter tds ias 156 Alarm Condition Notification 6 Alarm Message Queue 6
43. 2 35 2E 35 03 XX 5 5 ETX CHK Set auto gain control on for input 18 Set the dB level at 25 5dBm Response Format 06 XX XX 58 46 41 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X G A ETX CHK Page 110 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XGAO Set Gain Control to Automatic Mode Output QRM only Gain control can be set to manual or automatic This command turns on automatic gain control for the specified output By default when an output is set to auto mode the manual gain control settings are turned off An output can be set to automatic or manual gain control not both at the same time This command has 2 formats Both commands turn on the automatic gain control for the output One sets the output to the previous auto dB value The other sets the value to the dB value given in the command Valid values for QRM auto gain control are between 60 dBm and 0 dBm Tenths value must be either 0 or 5 Command Format 1 02 XX XX 58 47 41 4F XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X G A O OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 ETX CHK Command Format 2 02 XX XX 58 47 41 4F XX XX XX 40 2B 2D XX XX STX ADR ADR X G A O OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 Sy 10s 1s 2E XX 03 XX tenths ETX CHK OUT Output Must be between 001 and the number of system outputs Always 3 characters Tenths must be either 0 or 5 values valid in 5 increments Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 46 41 4F 30 31 36 40 2p 30 STX ADR ADR X G A O 0 1 6 Q 0 25 2E 35 03
44. 2 Model 3 Module Sizes 4 I O Names F4 Exit Figure 59 System Setup Page 90 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Matrix Size Option 1 of the System Setup Menu displays the Matrix Size screen This option allows the specified size of the matrix to be changed when multiple Quintech switch modules are used to form a larger matrix switching system For standard QE3 systems i e single enclosure systems the matrix size is equal to the number of inputs and outputs built into the QE3 unit This setting should never be changed unless the configuration of the matrix has been changed To navigate to the Matrix Size screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 1 1 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 1 System Setup 1 Matrix Size of inputs 64 of outputs 64 Fl Enter F4 Exit Figure 60 Matrix Size Rev K Page 91 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Model Option 2 of the System Setup menu displays the Model Number Type screen This option is included as part of the system s firmware identification in accordance with the protocol outlined in Appendix D The control system is not affected by the model number or type System expansion requires no change of the model number To invoke the Model Number Type screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 1 2 2 System Options 1 Configuration fact
45. 30 37 ACK ADR ADR F X 7 7 0 0 2 a 1 9 0 pe 3A 58 52 4D 32 32 35 30 3A 33 32 3A 33 32 3A 3A 3A 3A X R M 2 2 5 0 3 2 3 2 ne XX ETX CHK Note This command will be accepted regardless of whether a user is logged in Page 64 of 157 Rev CL IS Query Input State XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol This command queries for the access control parameters of the specified input The access control parameters are given by the last two characters in the response They give numbers that represent an access control bitmap table Bit 7 6 5 3 2 1 Group 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Hex Response character 1 Response character 2 If a particular bit is set then that group is allowed to change a particular input with the L S and U commands If the bit is clear then the corresponding group is not allowed access Character Response 1 Groups allowed Response 2 Groups allowed access access 0 none none 1 5 1 2 6 2 3 5 6 1 2 4 7 3 5 5 7 1 3 6 6 7 2 3 7 5 6 7 1 2 3 8 8 4 9 5 8 1 4 A 6 8 2 4 B 5 6 8 1 2 4 C 7 8 3 4 D 5 7 8 1 3 4 E 6 7 8 2 3 4 F 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 Rev CL Page 65 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 49 53 30 30 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR I S 0 0 1 ETX CHK Query the state of output 1 Examples of Positive Responses
46. 41 XX XX ACK ADR ADR X A ETX CHK NOTE Some firmware releases do not support this command Refer to the firmware release notes at the beginning of this document for details Rev CL Page 101 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XAS Attenuate Input Simplified This command will attenuate an XRM system input If the system has XRDs then the attenuation value is applied to the that input If the system input is on an XRM then the attenuation is applied at that input The attenuation of an input is in O 5dB steps from 0 0 dB attenuation up to a maximum of 15 5dB of attenuation for XRM systems QE3 systems can be equipped with input attenuation or gain control depending on the system modules If the system has input distribution modules the system can attenuate the inputs and this is a valid command Otherwise use XG gain control commands Check your user s manual to see if this feature is available on your system Command Format 02 XX XX 58 41 53 XX XX XX STX ADR ADR X A S IN IN IN XX XX 2E XX XX XX TENS ONES TENTHS ETX CHK INPUT System input number you want to attenuate Must be between 001 and number of system inputs Always 3 characters TENS ONES Number of dB of attenuation from 00 0 to 15 5 and TENTHS The tens and ones value can range from 00 to tenths always have to be 5 or 0 Attenuation is only in 0 5 increments so any other tenth value wi 15 The ll
47. 5 only Half dB steps only Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 STX A DR ADR X 46 5A 31 30 38 402B 35 2E 3 G Z 1 0 8 5 5 Set zero gain control value on input 108 to 5 5dB Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 STX A DR A DR X 46 5A 33 40 2D 3 32 2E 30 G Z 3 1 2 0 ee 5 3 XX ETX CHK gain 3 XX ETX CHK Set zero gain control value on input 3 to 12 0dB attenuation Response Format 06 XX XX 58 ACK A Note DR A Som Page 128 of 157 DR X 46 4D 03 XX G Z ETX CHK e firmware versions do not implement this command symbol Command must Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XP Check Power Supply and LCD Status This command will report the condition of the power supplies and LCD in an XRM system If a degrade or failure condition is indicated the power supply requires servicing or is unplugged The power supply current capacity will begin to degrade at temperatures over 50 degrees Celsius The degrade signal will be asserted when the power supply temperature reaches 40 degrees Celsius Command Format 02 XX XX 58 50 XX XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X P MSADR ADR ADR ADR ETX CHK MSDXADR Most significant digit of the XRM address This determines what type of unit will respond in an XRM system MSADR 0 XRM unit MSADR 1 XRO unit MSADR 2 XRD unit MS
48. 6 23 04 i Fixes DHCP function 2 69 12 09 04 i Fixes SNMP function 2 71 6 14 05 Includes 15 Second screen refresh 2 73 7 05 06 7 Support for BAE 32x2 system only 2 74 5 03 07 2 15 08 Added features 2 75 8 21 07 2 15 08 Added features Input access control enhanced M amp C LCD panel ZAI amp ZAO commands 2 76 9 21 10 2 15 08 Added features priority and protected modes Full SNNP protocol control Commands SP SC SU LC IS PM and ZG Short form L SP and U commands SNMP event traps generated 2 77 1 4 11 2 15 08 Multiple internal fixes and additions MAX size 464 Features remain same QRM 4 00 03 12 09 2 15 10 Ethernet 1661 Added QRM specific commands 4 03 04 07 09 2 15 10 Ethernet 1661 Added M cmd amp alarm msgs 4 04 04 29 09 2 15 10 Ethernet 1661 Added A B switch backup alarm Deleted XQA command 4 05 06 11 09 2 15 10 Ethernet 1661 Added IS XRW XWIS support 4 06 4 10 06 09 2 15 10 Ethernet 1661 No Protocol Changes 4 11 07 29 09 2 15 10 Ethernet 1661 Added BB BBR BE BER BO BOR BR BT and BTR for Q Sense These commands replace and render obsolete XBRO and XBWO Rev CL Page 5 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Firmware Date Protocol Field Update Control Board Notes Capability XRM 7 00 10 25 05 2 15 07 Serial 1514 D or later Support for XRM features and I O naming No remote UCM support 7 01 11 07 05 2 15 07 Serial 1514 D or later Fixes messa
49. 7 Reset PASSWOrd seers a EAA E ata tet ined 40 Page 36 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System 2 3 Control Mode Init Remotes Menu seen 80 2 3T Display Control Mode de iie Hoe op oed ptis 80 2 599 Remotes Initialization uoa odi edu tu dass aa De c dpedss 85 3 Access Control Nen o scedsss see S es efe Rd ade po US ey ae metu ee rna E vp ete 140 SUM Keypad LOCK JS Op 125 3 2 OSIM IO rol E ER 127 3 3 Access Control Setup Men ees dtrir es du og oyu ce sneademoiv ne cuee se caaeesaveasl Ges ant ies 145 CNN ot ct MC ER 146 3313 2 BEL ACCESS a eei eo Ub Cie ER eue 148 3 3 3 COEGIT m 148 4 Syst m Inforimauon Men ooi dq is ete anes SIME E des U a ea In T QI SERIA UEM N 49 Al Firmware Verstoft ue deceat ott eet at on tui ba ates E ebat ates uicit 50 4 2 Input Warning Leyeh iet I EROR Us ies PR LIC ANDERE GARE AERIS 53 d 3 Eni Speed s aoro ard So eeu te iei ii e aus ane bte e ia eod bd ees 54 4 4 Power Supply LACUS uuo 4 casa bou n De aiani i o tM een buen 54 4 5 Internal Temperature cinin serice russa ie Pea nes a e De Eee a aee bo eias 55 4 6 Get Input RE L eyel uie e e e tan s Rad V REALE E Ve EN de ted 56 4 1 Get Output RF Level iiee ettet haee aS ra iin eS Ce End Renee te Uh 58 45 OB SYNEM DOSE Reden aliti eae dui mn AL e EE 59 g 9G CONTO ac beat seal stra dette indu utet eiie hf goa uio ssse ae teaser 63 4 TO Automate Gain Onus eu ee eerte sod tu e
50. ACCESS CONT OL iicet taf o rad px eee o deed 150 Defining User OGrOUDS iie t eed iate oa dedu 151 SOLA CCOSS Ss I eet orae xi de eae este e a oer ba deed ge ee Reged 152 Firmware Speelfies sad scccassiandndessnctenisadevasvosascescanecdsneedacheswsssadecsentassensscen 153 Factory Defaults for Access Control cccscsscssccssssccscccsscsccsoeees 153 Vili Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Flies e 154 Admin Default Username eden ne Goatees eti teva quts 154 Admin Default Login Pass word ives uid Aaah cect ene testet Statt etceee iue dt 154 Admin User Name and Password Warning esee 154 MATRIX CONTROL SOFTWARE 155 Setting up the Communication Parameters sccssccccssssscsssseees 155 Ethernet vs Serial Comtrmnunicatiolis esce ei tram itc eei oto desr dede 155 MODI OPHIE iid pte odes tiu qtd eed ba pasta oculo pa eon ca etes eius 155 General Parameters e eee se e eun 157 Testing the Comminiedtofis sce ted besten t eei te voe deti gte dis oett eun nn 157 Creating and Managing Configurations eerte 157 Controlling the OE3 auis eti pe Oeta ra SUM VE Sex OU ePi e c vua a cR us MY ant TUS URS 158 Changing CrosspolDt sisses neose RUE SQ SY Re Onda ARR E e ERES REE E SERE UL 158 Cancel Crosspoint CHanpes iei Mone o tet eode qoxe 158 Change Impending Inputs coo tenete pau tiene toate 158 Locking Cross Points isis er e ES ANN QR ER ER SESS
51. Connection Status Screen 45 Fan Condition Monitoring 4 Input and Output RF Level Read 7 Internal Air Temperature Monitoring OE E EE 4 5 LCD Status Monitoring 5 Monitoring Connections 46 Power Supply Monitoring 4 RF Level Monitoring 5 6 Self Monitoring esse 3 Monitoring Connections 46 Names sess nei enai e ae oca 137 Assigning Names Using Protocol Commands cereo 136 VO Names Menu 120 127 133 Set Input Names Screen 134 Set Output Names Screen 135 Naming Inputs and Outputs 120 127 131 132 133 Noise Immunity esses 12 Number of Devices s an 13 Online Offline s once 161 ODUONlS x coton iet tu cei tuts estas 106 161 Interface Options Menu 38 Rev K Options Menu Screen 108 110 SNMP Menu 5 aeree o dinde 111 System Options Menu 87 Options Menu Screen 108 110 Output C ats O88 Seti od di his 15 Packets Command Packet 32 Parameters enii araoa 44 DHCP On Off Lot bes 42 Ethernet Addtess 4st tes 43 Serial Address ussss 39 Serial Mode n onte ue coto orte 39 Set QEC Port 4 41 Setting Operating Panels 34 Partitioning a Matrix System Between Multiple Use
52. ETX For example 02h 30h 30h 51h 03h 50h STX 0 0 Q ETX CHK Page 40 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Command Descriptions BB Set Q Sense Backup Input This command will set the Q Sense backup input for the specified primary input The QE3 will only accept this command if both specified inputs are not currently active QSENSE inputs used elsewhere in the system Command Format 02 XX XX 42 42 XX XX XX XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR B B IN3 N2 N1 BUI3 BUI2 BUII ETX CHK IN Primary Input Must be between 001 and the number of system inputs Always 3 characters BUI Backup Input Must be between 001 and the number of system inputs Always 3 characters Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 42 42 30 31 36 30 30 37 03 XX STX ADR ADR B B 0 1 6 0 0 7 ETX CHK Set Q Sense backup input 7 for primary input 16 Response Format 06 XX XX 42 42 03 XX ACK ADR ADR B B ETX CHK Rev CL Page 41 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol BBC Turn Off Qsense Input Pair This command will clear an input primary and backup pair This command will accept a primary or backup input number and clear both the primary and the backup association Command Format 02 XX XX 42 42 43 XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR B B E N3 N2 IN ETX CHK IN Primary or backup input number Must be between 001 and the number of sy
53. F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 41 System Errors Press F1 to select the System Errors option Ignore System Errors No F1 Change F4 Exit Figure 42 Ignore System Errors Press F1 to toggle the option ON or OFF Page 62 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Gain Control Every QE3 system has been equipped with input gain control which can be set either manually or automatically In manual mode a simple user specified gain or attenuation value is consistently applied to the input s regardless of the input s current RF level In automatic mode the QE3 tracks the input s and automatically applies gain or attenuation to maintain the user specified RF level Press F1 to set up input gain control Gain Control Tt Change Options F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 43 Enter Gain Control If the QE3 system has more than 64 outputs but is not equipped with QED input modules this feature will not be available Manual Gain Control Manual gain control consistently applies a set amplification or attenuation value to all input signals equally Input signal strength has no effect on manual gain control The attenuation or amplification value is set and that value is added or subtracted from the input signal level consistently Rev K Page 63 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Notice the top line reads Gain Control Manual This means the currently selected input is already in manual mode and set at 0 0 dBm This value
54. F4 Exit Figure 115 Password Entry Page 143 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System A password is built one character at a time You can enter a number directly from the keypad or use the scroll keys to bring up an alphanumeric character Once you have the correct character push F2 to enter it and move forward to the next character position After all characters in the password have been entered push F1 to attempt the login If the password is incorrect the message incorrect login will be displayed and the password will be cleared to allow for another attempt Logout Once the user is logged in re displaying the Login Logout screen will display the current user and provide the option to logout The Logout Screen will be displayed To logout press F1 Control will be returned to the Access Control screen Current user Admin F1 Logout F4 Exit Figure 116 Logout Page 144 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System User Accounts Option 3 Setup of the Access Control menu allows you to setup user accounts User accounts consist of a fixed user ID an assigned group ID and a variable username and password User accounts can be managed remotely using the ZA ZG ZL ZP and ZU commands See the protocol document for more information They can also be managed from the front panel keypad Access Control Setup Menu Note that you must be logged in as Admin and local access control has to be enabled to be able to acces
55. MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol 50 41 38 40 32 6D 73 3 XX P A 8 2 m S ETX CHK Pre attack time on input 8 to 2 1000 of a second 50 41 38 40 32 73 3 XX P A 8 2 S ETX CHK Pre attack time on input 8 to 2 seconds 50 41 34 38 40 E A 4 3 73 3 XX S ETX CHK Pre attack time on input 43 to 6500 milliseconds or the equivalent of 6 5 seconds Response Format 06 XX XX 58 46 54 ACK ADR ADR X G I Note Rev CL 50 41 P A 03 XX ETX CHK Some firmware versions do not implement this command Page 125 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XGTPD Set Gain Control Time Pre Decay Time Number of seconds or milliseconds the system waits before acting on an input signal if the gain control is set to start attenuating a signal If an input signal increases above the user defined dB level the gain control will want to attenuate that signal This is a set time interval the system will wait before starting that attenuation process Can be set from 0 to 60 seconds in 1 1000 intervals This only applies to the gain control feature when a strong signal needs to be attenuated For delay time for weak signals refer to the XGTPA command 6699 Command will accept milliseconds or seconds User must specify with an s or ms in the command structure Command length is variable also User does not need to enter leading zeros Input number and pre decay number must be separated by the symbol The end of the
56. Matrix Switching System Power Supply Monitoring 4 RF Level Monitoring 5 6 Self MOnIOEn uo ecd 3 SNMP ApS aE 7 Unity Galing da erin eoim S TQ 8 User Permissions see 7 System Information 40 Firmware Version sss 49 Get Fan Speed eset 54 Get Input RF Level 56 Get Internal Temperature 55 Get Output RF Level 58 63 Get Power Supply Status 54 Read Input RF dBm Signal Level 56 Read Output RF dBm Signal Level 59 63 Report Power Supply Status 54 Set dBm Warning Level 53 Set Input RF Warning Level 53 System Information Menu 49 System Information Menu 49 System Options sseeeeee 44 Configuration Menu 89 Configuration Menu Pass Code SCreeTis c a 88 IDEHCPQOBUOMT does ninss 42 DHCP On Off Screen 42 Display Control Mode Screen 80 Ethernet Address 43 Ethernet Address Screen 43 Factory Settings Code Number 89 Features Menu ess 106 VO Names Menu 120 127 133 Interface Options Menu 38 Load Firmware Screen 100 Model Number Type Screen 92 Module Sizes Menu 93 P
57. Mi Lacu 26 BA SUICNQqUELSSSS TEE UIT UU 27 D sy Chanina nennen a ras M uM eter caine eee ass MEAE Cre eas aa ae es ao 27 XR B s ContectiOnS 3 natas an A a A N i b a iens 27 XR Bus Terminators nocet pete rie Ea eco arie a ss XE T teen Bes 27 XR Bus Terminators for 64X64 System essere 28 Quintech UCM N due TRES 29 Daisy C hant usd ssepe iS o asus MI M tuo adi Er 29 Quintech UCM Port Crossover Adapter eere 30 Ethernet ullam 32 Ethernet Connections inu eo Se EO OR HD VIE ends 32 Ethernet Cable Pinout cccccccccccccccssssssssececececessessnseceeeeeeeeeesenseaeeeseeseeees 32 Ethernet Command Protocol esssssseeseseeeeee eene enne nnns 32 TE DIIP eis ene edet uid oae Rata desciende MM M DeL E MM 32 drm EE 33 SNMP co brc iot altema teta ala LE ds 33 SNMP Additional Features eee n nnn nn 33 Front Panel Interface 34 IVD AMM VIN Ee 34 Front Panel Hierarchy and Page References eere 35 Rev K lii QE3 Matrix Switching System Communications Setup icisscecescecsdcveicscssideadscccessdendasnsdedcansaeseasdessadecossanteds 38 Int rtace Options Meno eame seve a e etas iet scusa lude tenses 38 Sertal Mode tete detenido teeth oted bates ea eee adu e ES 39 Seridl Address iss p E He S ES eee os 39 Reset P
58. QE3 Only success or failure feedback is provided when scripts are executed An acknowledgement will confirm whether any value written to the QE3 was successful A script can write anything that a protocol command can write including crosspoints names attenuation data warning levels etc Reading Data from the QE3 A command that asks for data to be returned from the QE3 may be successful but the control program provides no way for the script data e g fan speed temperature etc to be returned from the QE3 Script Naming Extension Scripts can be named as desired The file extension for a script file is scr which happens to be the same extension that Windows uses to define screen saver files Thus double clicking on a script file name that has the scr suffix will likely cause an error because Windows will think that it is a screen saver file Editing Scripts The easiest way to write and edit scripts is to rename the file suffix to txt Once the ffile suffix has been renamed open it with a text editor make the desired modifications and then resave the file using the scr suffix Page 164 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Command Structure A script does not require the STX ETX address or CHK bytes Scripts Examples Scripts should be created using a simple text editor such as windows notepad MS Word and other programs will save additional formatting data that will not be understood du
59. QE3 internal memory This internal memory stores all QE3 system parameters to allow for control board hot swap QE3 with Internal Memory An QE3 with internal memory can be upgraded without interrupting crosspoints or changing any system parameters Rev K Page 101 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System QE3 Without Internal Memory Write down the settings for your system before you start the download process Record all the settings under the configuration menu and the Interface Options menu These setings will be overwritten during a firmware download You will also have to recreate any user acounts user names and passwords Input Output connections will also go back to factory defaults as well A firmware download is not something that can be done in the background while the switch is operating A firmware download will overwrite all settings in the system After a successsful firmware download the system settings will be set to Quintech defaults These defaults are listed in the protocol document but listed here again for your convenience Firmware Default Settings DC POT io oencacosSporDetoa guod teed ue Dres Off Side Dao uita Renter en unctus et RS c ME 010 000 000 050 Static Netmask x eo UM OUS 255 255 255 000 Static Gateway ve cx esr nne eH ees 192 168 000 001 Telnet Bortzoo s nti toI EMI 23 ORC Ethernet POort 2 299 95m rex zip ecu 9100 Serial Portes 2er tbv bb Erba Ere RS 232 9600 baud 8N1 RS 485 Terminations
60. Quintech UCM Connections Page 31 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Ethernet Port Each QE3 system has the ability to communicate over Ethernet Your QE3 may be equipped with a 10BaseT or 100BaseT Ethernet port depending on the options ordered The Ethernet port supports a Telnet interface TCP IP and SNMP All commands are sent to the configured IP address and port The command protocol for controlling the switch is provided in Appendix D Ethernet Connections For Ethernet connections connect the controller to a network port or router via the Ethernet port using a standard cable You can also connect directly to the computer s network port but this requires a crossover cable Standard and crossover Ethernet cable pinouts are provided below Ethernet Cable Pinout Crossover Cable Standard Cable RJ 45 RJ 45 RJ 45 RJ 45 Pin 1 Tx Pin 3 Rx Pin 1 Tx Pin 1 Rx Pin 2 Tx Pin 6 Rx Pin 2 Tx Pin 2 Rx Pin 3 Rx Pin 1 Tx Pin 3 Rx Pin 3 Tx Pin 6 Rx Pin 2 Tx Pin 6 Rx Pin 6 Tx Table 3 Ethernet Cable Pinout Ethernet Command Protocol TCP IP The same command protocol is used for control over Ethernet TCP IP and the serial port Since the same command formats are used the command packet will contain a serial address This address must match the serial address of the QE3 or the packet will be rejected even though the address is unnecessary when the command is sent over TCP IP Page 32 of
61. S out WWW in XXX from QSENSE portZ address AA gt QSENSE restore command trap S out WWW in XXX from BR command Description structure Sg out WWW gt in XXX from lt userY gt lt portaZ gt lt address AA gt QSENSE Page 34 of 157 Event description Set output command Output number Input number more event description User that issued the command Userl is the Admin up to user8 User 9 is no user logged in Port of access Local keypad 0 Remote port 1 Control in port 2 Ethernet A 3 Ethernet B 4 Telnet 5 SNMP 6 QSENSE 7 Serial address of 1RU remote or main controller unit the command originated from Indicates the crosspoint was changed automatically by the system in accordance with QSENSE settings Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol SP Command Event This event trap is generated on SRM QE3 XRM and SRM products This SNMP trap indicates that the SP command has been successfully issued Complete trap lt SP out WWW in XXX from userY portZ address AA gt Description structure lt SP gt lt out WWW gt in XXX from userY portZ address AA Rev CL Event description Set Protect command Output number Input number more event description User that issued the command Userl is the Admin up to user8 User 9 is no user logged in Port of
62. SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol ELE Ethernet Lock Enable This command enables the QEC Ethernet command lock When the lock is enabled command packets input from the Ethernet port are received but ignored except for the ELD command The ELD command is used to disable the lock and enable the processing of command packets Command Format 02 XX XX 45 4C 45 03 XX STX ADR ADR E L E ETX CHK Example Command 02 46 46 45 4C 45 03 4D STX F E E L E ETX CHK Enable Ethernet Command Lock Positive Response 06 46 46 45 4C 03 OC ACK F F E L ETX CHK Note The switch is shipped from the factory with the Ethernet lock disabled so it will accept and process command packets If the ELE command is never issued the Ethernet lock will never be enabled and the ELD ELE and ELP commands can be ignored If the Ethernet lock is on valid command packets sent over the Ethernet will return a NAK message with the issued command indicating that it was rejected because of the lock Valid packets sent over the serial port will still be accepted This command has been superceded by the access control features available with Protocol 2 15 release 6 It is included for backward compatibility Rev CL Page 59 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol ELP Set Ethernet Lock Password This command sets a new QEC Ethernet Lock Password The password is an alpha numeric value from 1 to 10 characters A null password no
63. Switching System SNMP On Off Option 1 in the SNMP Menu displays the SNMP On Off screen To invoke the SNMP On Off screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 3 2 2 1 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 3 Features 4 Options 1 SNMP 1 On Off SNMP Off F1 Change F4 Exit Figure 79 SNMP On Off Press F1 to toggle SNMP protocol on and off F4 exits to the previous menu For details on SNMP refer to SNMP Page 112 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Set SNMP Trap IP Option 2 in the SNMP Menu invokes the Set SNMP Trap IP screen refer to SNMP To navigate to the SNMP Trap IP screen from the main menu key sequence 2 factory settings code number F1 3 2 2 2 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 3 Features 4 Options 1 SNMP 2 Set Trap IP IP 10 0 0 50 Fl Enter F4 Exit Figure 80 Set SNMP Trap IP Some versions of the QE3 firmware can send additional traps to up to 4 different IP addresses IP 10 0 0 50 i Scroll multiple IP F1 Select IP address to change F4 Exit Figure 81 Select IP Address Rev K Page 113 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Scroll through the available 4 IP addresses and press F1 to select one Eneter the new IP address and press1 to add the new IP address to the trap address list QE3 Setup This screen may have a fourth option to set u
64. These ports are used to control other modules in the QE3 system If your system contains more than one module these ports will be used to daisy chain the modules together XR Bus ports are not Ethernet ports They are only used for QE3 system communications The ports that supports TCP IP communications are labeled NET 1 and NET 2 Netl is connected to controller A NET2 is connected to controller B Page 12 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System The port labeled Quintech UCM has two uses It can be used as an RS 485 communications port It can also be used to communicate with additional IRU controllers The port labeled SRM SRO Control is for non QE3 system equipment The new QE3 systems can be integrated into non QE3 existing system This is the port used to control your non QE3 Quintech communications equipment Controller Appearance The controller may exist as a stand alone 1 RU unit or it may be integrated within the QE3 module as shown below QUINTECH ae Ea a ea Een Ee Een Een En E EL EE EIL EIE Figure 1 Front Panel of QE3 w Integrated Controller The placement of the control unit in relation to the other matrix switch modules in the system rack will depend upon the size of the switching system Rev K Page 13 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Basic QE3 Architecture Fully populated a QE3 module contains a variety of card types and modules The figure below illustrates the type of
65. Unterminated means the signal lines do not have impedance matching at the line ends This interface is useful for point to point communication at slow speeds and over short lengths of cable Most PCs come equipped with one or more RS 232 serial ports Rev K Page 25 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System RS 232 Advantages Disadvantages RS 232 is easy to implement and has a long history of standardization and industry acceptandce However due to the nature of RS 232 the signals are susceptible to noise and grounding problems which sets a limit to cable lengths If using RS 232 Quintech recommendis that the cable length be limited to 20 meters or approximately 60 feet RS 232 facillitates only point to point communications thus only two devices will typically communicate with each other over the RS 232 standard RS 422 In RS 422 communications a pair of twisted wires is used to carry a signal The data is encoded and decoded as a differential voltage between the two lines In principle as a voltage in principle the interface is unaffected by differences in ground voltage between sender and receiver RS 422 Advantages Disadvantages RS 422 differential signals over twisted pair wires are less affected by noise They can therefore communicate at faster rates and across longer distances Unlike RS 232 RS 422 connectors are not standardized Refer to Table 2 for the RS 422 interface pinouts Although RS 422 is better than RS 232 it still is
66. X G S IN d deok XX ah L xg XX03 XX DELAY Bee ub ETX CHK IN Input port Must range from 1 to the number of system inputs Numbers only no characters 1 to 3 digits accepted DELAY Number of secionds Value 0 to 255 no characters 1 to 3 digits accepted Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 48 38 40 32 3 XX STX ADR ADR X G H 8 2 ETX CHK Set hysteresis on input 8 to 2dB Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 48 33 35 40 31 30 3 STX ADR ADR X G Hiag 5 1 0 ETX Set hysteresis on input 35 to 10dB Response Format 06 XX XX 58 46 48 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X G H ETX CHK Numbers only XX CHK Note Some firmware versions do not implement this command Rev CL Page 119 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XGTA Set Gain Control Time Attack Time Only supported by certain QE3 systems Number of seconds or milliseconds the system waits between 0 5 dB power increases during the time that a weak signal is boosted to get it back up to a user pre defined dB signal level Can be set from 0 to 60 seconds in 1 1000 intervals This is a QE3 automatic gain control command Attack time is when the input RF level has decreased and the system is now increasing the input signal strength to get the RF level back up to the user pre defined automatic gain control dB level The gain control feature can increase this signal strength slowly or quickly based on this number If the v
67. XX 9 E 5 ETX CHK Set auto gain control on for output 16 Set the dB level at 5 5dBm Response Format 06 XX XX 58 46 41 4F O03 XX ACK ADR ADR X G A O ETX CHK Rev CL Page 111 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XGH Set Gain Control Hysteresis dB Number of dB a signal has to rise or fall beyond the set user level before the gain control feature will act upon the signal Can be set from 0 to 60 seconds in 1 1000 intervals Command will accept value from 1 to 10 Command length is variable also User does not need to enter leading zeros Input number and dB number must be separated by the symbol The user must specify a number for both the input and delay time Zero is not acceptable for either value Command Format 1 02 XX XX 58 47 48 XX bue as 40 STX ADR ADR X T Q D z e XX aie US XX03 XX DB xD os ETX CHK IN Input port Must be between 1 and the number of system inputs DB dB value Value 1 to 10dB Numbers only no characters Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 48 38 40 32 3 XX STX ADR ADR X G H 8 2 ETX CHK Set hysteresis on input 8 to 2dB Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 48 33 35 40 31 30 3 XX STX ADR ADR X G Hi 3 5 1 0 ETX CHK Set hysteresis on input 35 to 10dB Response Format 06 XX XX 58 46 48 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X G H ETX CHK Note Some firmware versions do not implement this command Page 112 of 157 Re
68. all 95 of all problems with remotes are cable issues 1 Make sure you are using the supplied Quintech adapter in line between the main unit and the first remote Forgetting this adapter is usually the cause of a communications error The adapter connects pins 3 to 4 4 to 3 6 to 9 and 9 to 6 NOTE This is not a NULL MODEM adapter pinout If you don t have this adapter you can call us and order another or simply make a cable that crosses these connections If you have the adapter then use the adapter and a straight through 1 to 1 cable between the main controller and the first remote 2 Use the Quintech crossover adapter between the main and first remote only All other remote connections use straight through cables 3 Make sure the cable is 1 to 1 straight through cable Test the cable with an Ohmmeter to be sure all pins are connected from end to end Some manufacturers will only connect pins 2 3 and 5 This type of cable will work for most RS 232 applications but a Quintech remote will not operate without all the pins connected 4 Make sure the RS 485 termination settings are correct 5 Make sure that the address of the main and remotes are different If you have more than one remote those addresses have to be different as well 6 Check that any address isn t set to FFH 7 Make sure the main and remotes are connected via the remote ports and not the control ports 8 Re initialize the remote Page 174
69. an Output 48 Types of Modules 10 UCM heinera E a amma sbavtase 11 Quintech UCM Port 20 Unbalanced Signal 71 Unbalanced Signaling 71 ETT CHIEDI aeee OR mess 8 Unlock Keypad Code 143 Unlock Keypad Screen 143 Unlocking Crosspoints 160 Upgrades Firmware Upgrade Kit 101 Load Firmware Screen 100 Syste SIZES aen E EE irte 9 System Upgrades eene 9 User ACCESS iorri eeta Bree ta e 150 User ACCoOuUntsS s 138 146 User Names Change User Name Screen 148 Defining User Names and Passwords T RET 147 User POrfHllsSIODs sace edis o asdpa d vs 7 Username soe pecu ben b e 138 Valid Passwords and Length 149 Valid Serial Addresses 40 Rev K Viewing the Status of a Particular Output Channel 46 Voltages 2e eect 22 Voltages and Signaling 72 Warranty Information 168 What Is a QEC Port Number 41 Why Change the QEC Port Number 42 XR Bus Daisy Chaining uec ecran 27 XR Bus Connections 27 XR Bus Ports esseeeeeee 27 XR Bus Connections 27 XR B s Ports ec in 27 XRD XRD Module Rear Panel
70. be sent This condition will occur if there is a delay of about 200 milliseconds between bytes Address Field The address field consists of two ASCII digits The address for a control unit is normally set using the front panel keypad Each unit will only respond to a command with a matching address This allows multiple control units to be connected on a shared RS 422 485 control bus The address can be set from 00 to FF on units with front panel configuration Address FF is a serial broadcast address Any unit will respond to a command with an address of FF regardless of the actual serial address set for the unit Commands being sent to units over Ethernet must contain an address of FF for proper operation If you use a serial address other than FF in your Ethernet command packet that serial address must match the serial address set for the target unit or the command will be rejected even if the IP address is correct Rev CL Page 39 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Command The command is one or more ASCII characters from A to Z A list of available commands is in the next section Data Bytes Each command has a fixed number of data bytes A response to a command may have a variable number of data bytes In that case one of the data bytes will signify how many data bytes are contained in the message Checksum The checksum byte is a bit wise Exclusive OR XOR of all the bytes inclusively from the header to the
71. changes executed since the last Q command This includes changes to the lock state of a crosspoint All crosspoint changes are put in the queue regardless of the source If more than one change is executed for a given output only the last change will be stored in the queue The ASCII number after Q in the response is the number of changes that the queue contains and ranges from 0 to 8 If no crosspoint changes are stored in the queue this number will be zero If more than 8 changes occurred since the last Q command this number will not be valid and bit 3 of the queue change flag see command C will be set to signal that an overflow has occurred After the queue is checked the queue and the queue change flag are cleared including the crosspoint queue overflow and access control change bits Command Sent 02 XX XX 51 03 xx STX A DR A DR Q ETX CHK Example Positive Responses 06 XX XX 51 30 03 XX ACK A DR A DR OQ 0 ETX CHK No changes have occurred 06 XX XX 51 32 30 30 ACK A Two DR A DR Q 2 0 0 chan ges have occurred 3o 180 T 35 5 0 1 5 output 5 was connected to input 15 16 was connected to input 1 Note This command will be accepted regardless of whether a user is logged in Page 90 of 157 30 0 31 36 6 30 0 30 0 31 03 XX ETX CHK and output Rev CL RH Hard Reset XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol This command
72. decoded as a differential voltage between the two lines A typical truth table is shown below VA VB lt 0 2v Logic 0 VA VB gt 0 2v Logic 1 As a differential voltage the interface is in principle unaffected by differences in ground voltage between the sender and receiver Noise Immunity Furthermore if lines A and B are close together they will be affected almost identically by external noise If the lines are also twisted together then neither line is permanently closer to a noise source than the other Hence the well known twisted pair is extremely effective in eliminating noise from the signal Due to the nature of the differential receiver any equivalent noise on both wires is cancelled out Page 72 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Number of Devices The RS 485 standard allows 32 devices on one bus whereas RS 232 is typically only a one to one connection Quintech allows one main controller and up to 31 remote controllers Master Slave Most RS 485 systems use Master Slave architecture where each slave module has its unique address and responds only to packets addressed to that module These packets are generated by the master controller which periodically polls all connected slave units This is how Quintech controller modules communicate with each other Each controller on the RS 485 bus has a unique assigned address Only communications sent to the assigned address will cause a response by the remot
73. generated This trap is sent to the assigned trap IP address This command will set the RF dBm level that will generate this error message Note that the XRD XRM QE3 and QED inputs can be attenuated This warning level is compared directly at the system inputs before any attenuation is applied to the signal see XA or XG commands For the XRM this command will only accept values from 10 to 50 dBm and 99 To turn RF monitoring on set the level from 10 to 50 To turn monitoring off set the level to 99 dBm For the QRM this command will only accept values from 0 to 60 dBm and 99 To turn RF monitoring on set the level to any value from 0 to 60 To turn monitoring off set the level to 99 dBm Command Format 02 XX XX 58 57 49 53 XX XX XX 40 2D STX ADR ADR X W I S IN1 IN2 IN3 F XX XX 03 XX dBTENS dBONES ETX CHK IN System input dBTENS dBONES Ihe dBm value that the signal is compared to Range from 10 to 50 and 99 turns monitoring off Other values will be rejected as out of range Response Format 06 XX XX 58 57 49 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X W I ETX CHK Example Command 02 XX XX 58 57 49 53 32 31 33 40 2D 34 30 03 XxX STX ADR ADR X W I S 2 1 3 E 4 0 ETX CHK Set RF dB threshold level at input 213 set to 40dBm NOTE Some firmware releases do not support this command Refer to the firmware release notes at the beginning of this document for details P
74. in effect until either the PreAttack Delay or PreDecay Delay expires the first time Advanced AGC PreAttack Delay Time PreAttack Delay Time is the amount of time the input signal must remain aabove the set point before any reduction in gain will occur In order to start the PreAttack timer the level increase must exceed the hysteresis value and remain above the set point plus the hysteresis until the PreAttack timer expires The Attack phase starts when this condition 1S met Advanced AGC PreDecay Delay Time PreDecay Delay Time is the amount of time the input signal must remain below the set point before any increase in gain will occur In order to start the PreDecay timer the level decrease must exceed the hysteresis value and remain below the set point minus the hysteresis value until the PreDecay timer expires The Delay phase starts when this condition is met Page 68 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Advanced AGC Attack Delay Time The Attack Delay Time is the amount of time required for the AGC to decrease the input signal level to the desired setpoint level The change occurs in 5 dB increments divided by the total Attack Delay Time Advanced AGC Decay Delay Time The Decay Delay Time is the amount of time required for the AGC to increase the input signal level to the desired set point level The change occurs in 5 dB increments divided by the total Decay Delay Time NOTE Specifications such as P1dB OIP3 and no
75. isn t with the AC supply contact Quintech for service One of the LEDs is not lit Make sure the unit is turned on Verify with a volt meter on a module with integral that the AC source is available If the problem isn t with dual supplies and or dual the AC supply contact Quintech for service AC inlets LNB Power I m not getting any DC QE3s are not equipped with LNB supplies power out from the input Page 170 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Problems with Cross Point Connections No signal is passing at all The connection is shown as being made but no switch occurred 1 First be certain that all coaxial cables are properly connected and that all control cables are connected and in good working conditioning Refer to the appendix for your system connections 2 Make sure that the main controller unit is set to Main control mode Type in the desired path again 3 Type in a different path to verify that the units are switching For example if you cannot route Input 7 to Output 7 try routing Input 8 to Output 7 Try this for several different inputs 4 If the units are switching verify that the signal you requested is actually there the matrix switching system is DC blocked and will not allow receivers to power LNBs It is useful to monitor the system with some type of analyzer 5 Make sure that the matrix size is set correctly The actual matrix size will only switch up to th
76. maintenance and upgrades in the field e Local control via front panel keypad and LCD e Remote control via RS232 RS422 RS485 Ethernet TCP IP Telnet and SNMP e Secure partitioning of matrix control between multiple users to prevent unauthorized changes e Field upgrades of control firmware via serial or Ethernet to add features and enhance existing capabilities e 64x64 matrix size in just 6 RU 10 5 or 267mm high e Large matrix systems up to 1024x1024 or larger by combining multiple QE3 modules with QED and QEO expansion modules QE3 Matrix Switching System QE3 Introduction eese eee J Quintech A Company Introduction 1 WHO WE AEQ Lu essve cooks ees n seco de zung an cCeUguve doen e bru a fe sace ve cub eu ve eua basa Vase VENE ER OU USE Ep EE 1 OU ITS STON soos heed oe oue coucou ramum e E E A D VRC LED AE UU LUE LUUD 1 Our PEOQUCU uiae e enin ei ei orn eoa co e oed e nbebedDus ee so eeoa Dx ardeo ches 1 Just Some of our Customers EAE EEE E e nenne enne het esee heres nent tese rre 2 The Quintech System Advantage eee ecce eee reete eene eren nante 3 System Fi CAUUIVEOS t E 3 SELL MOHIO 2 co cet alate cespite ie eel une eh iced aati 3 SENSE naa dudas R A A O E A e AE atas 4 Power Supply Monitoring sesesseessessseessseessseessressresseresseesssresseesseesseressees 4 QE3 Fan Condition Monitoring eiie attrita etae neck aed n dpa eee ee 4 Po
77. not adjustable Rev K Page 127 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Default Names and Priority In Order Admin Highest priority User2 User3 User4 User5 User6 User7 User8 No user logged in Lowest priority Priority Mode On Off Clear Memory Priority mode can be set and read from the front panel or from a protocol command Refer to the PM command When this mode is turned on every output that is locked is associated with the user who locked it This information is stored until the output is successfully unlocked At that point the user information is cleared All output locked priority information is cleared after the system is power cycled or whenever the priority mode is turned off Priority Example Priority mode is turned on User5 is logs into the Telnet port User5 locks output 1 User6 logs into TCP port User6 fails to unlock output 1 User 6 can not unlock output 1 because user5 has higher priority than user6 User3 logs into control in port User 3 unlocks output User3 can unlock the output because user3 is higher priority than user5 Page 128 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Output Protection Protected Outputs Description Protection is another way to prevent an output from being changed by an unauthorized user If an output is protected it cannot be changed until the protection status has been removed The protected status is removed by making the output unprotected This can be done fr
78. number then the signal level will decrease quickly back down to the pre defined RF level If the value is set to a large number then the signal level will decrease slowly back down to the pre defined R level Command will accept milliseconds or seconds User must specify with an ms or s in the command structure Command length is variable also User does not need to enter leading zeros Input number and decay number must be separated by the symbol The end of the decay number is indicated by the s or ms characters The user must specify a number for both the input and decay time If the user wants to set this value to zero then the user must specify 0 character in the decay time Command Format 1 02 XX XX 58 47 54 44 XX AC 40 STX ADR ADR X G T D IN RET XX Se d x 73 XX03 XX DT amp oux S ETX CHK Command Format 2 02 XX XX 58 47 54 44 XX we Od 40 STX ADR ADR X G T D IN E x XX uo 6D 73 03 XX DT EE m S ETX CHK IN Input port Must be between 1 and the number of system inputs DT Decay time Value in seconds or 1 1000 seconds wait period If the user specifies ms then valid values range from 0 to 60 000 If the user specifies s then valid values range from 0 to 60 Can vary from 1 to 5 characters Numbers only no characters Page 122 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Example Command Sent
79. of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Passwords and Permissions I forgot my password 1 Default passwords are listed in Table 4 2 If the Admin has re assigned names and passwords contact that person for your username and password 3 If you are the Admin and you don t know your password contact Quintech for technical assistance I am typing in my password but it won t let me login Passwords are case sensitive If the admin gave you a password of PasSMe then the P S and M need to be capital letters when you type it in 2 The Admin has reassigned or changed your password 3 The unit has been given a hard reset which sets all accounts to default permissions names and passwords Defaults are listed in Table 4 I have permissions but I still can t change an output connection Check if the output is Locked Unlock the output first before you change the connection I can t turn on off access control Login as Admin first Only the Admin can turn on off access control for a port I can t modify the user accounts or permissions Only the Admin can modify accounts Login as the Admin The system won t allow me to make cross point changes 1 Log in using your assigned username and password If the Admin has denied you access to some or all outputs then you can t change those outputs without the Admin changing your account first 2 Login as Admin 3 Turn off acces
80. output has been changed by the Q SENSE function to the backup input the restore function may be able to restore the output to the primary input If the output status has been altered after the Q SENSE action this restore command will not be available for that output Output 9 Backup in 2 Primary input 1 F1 Restore primary F2 Skip out F4 Exit Figure 96 Restore Output This screen shows an example that output 9 has been automatically switched to input 2 Output 9 was originally connected to primary input 1 Pressing Fl will connect output 9 to input 1 F2 will skip the output and look for more outputs that have been switched to the Q SENSE backup input by the Q SENSE function Page 124 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System This function will continually look for outputs that can be restored F4 will exit the menu or if there are no longer any output that can be found that information will be displayed If there are no outputs that the restore command can change the screen will indicate this status No outputs detected that were switched to backup input by Q SENSE F4 Exit Figure 97 No Outputs Detected Rev K Page 125 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Priority Mode Priority On Off Priority mode can be turned on or off from the front panel To navigate to the Priority mode screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 3 3 2 System Options 1 Configuration
81. over the Ethernet and serial ports if available and use a standard STX ETX protocol wrapper Each packet includes a header byte a two byte address field a command byte necessary data bytes end byte and a checksum byte The bytes are transmitted using an 8 bit word with 1 stop bit and no parity The general form for commands and messages is Header Address Command Data byte s End Checksum Control Bytes Control bytes are transmitted as hexadecimal values Command Header Byte 2 STX 0x02 Command End Byte ETX 0x03 Response Header Byte 2 ACK 0x06 for accepted commands Response Header Byte NAK 0x15 for rejected commands Response End Byte ETX 0x03 The Header Byte STX is also used to reset the command receive buffer If this byte is received it will be accepted as the beginning of a new message The previous message will be discarded The only exception to this is if the byte 0x02 is a checksum byte When the buffer is reset the checksum byte is also reset There is a 32 byte limit on command length Any command longer than this will automatically generate an error response if or when an ETX end byte is received If a new STX is received before an ETX it will reset the command receive buffer and no error message will be sent If a break in communication occurs while a message is being transmitted i e before the unit receives the ETX and CHK byte the buffer will clear and the command will be lost no response will
82. panel F2 Protect output 9 15 05 27 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Add QED termination Fix RF polling of QI1 2 9 16 06 17 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 SNMP protocol buffer 9 17 Internal 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Modify SC SP amp L commands and release protect front panel function Add boot SNMP trap Added 2 TCP IP message queues and 3 trap addresses 9 18 87 8 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Fix power supply front panel poll screen Boot SNMP trap Added user ID Alternate L U SP SU commands Unit address in trap All SNMP taps sent from main 9 19 8 10 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Fix power supply front panel poll screen Remove beta version switch 9 20 8 31 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Add QSENSE and QROUTE Add B commands 9 21 9 16 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Additions to front panel interface Rev CL Page 9 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Firmware Date Protocol Field Update Control Board Notes Capability QE3 9 22 9 28 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Additions to front panel boot up Q route alarms SNMP objects input and output tied to access control 9 23 10 21 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Output access control 1RU remote update fix Priority lock fix 9 24 10 26 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Fix Zl ZL LC commands Add ZG screen to KP LCD Modified access control KP LCD function
83. password is also allowed Command Format 02 XX XX 45 4C 50 XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR E L P Password ETX CHK Example Command 02 46 46 45 4C 50 78 79 7A 7A 79 03 20 STX F E E L E X y Z Z y ETX CHK Set password to xyzzy Example Command 02 46 46 45 4C 50 31 2B 52 61 4C 70 48 21 32 03 16 STX F E E L P 1 F R a L p H 2 ETX CHK Set password to 1 RaLpH 2 Example Command 02 46 46 45 4C 50 03 58 STX F E E L P ETX CHK Set password to no password Positive Response 06 46 46 45 4C 03 OC ACK F F E L ETX CHK Note Although almost any hex value or ASCII character can be used in the password users would be wise not to use the hex values 00 1F or 7F FF since these are not associated with keys on a standard keyboard They may also cause undesirable side effects In particular hex 02 STX and 03 ETX are used to delineate the command packet and should never be used in the password If the password is set to some unknown value it can be reset to the default Quintech from the front panel LCD and keypad This command has been superceded by the access control features available with Protocol 2 15 release 6 It is included for backward compatibility Page 60 of 157 Rev CL EP Set Ethernet Port XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol This command sets the QEC Ethernet port that is monitored for STX ETX command packets The default port set at the factory is 9100 Th
84. period before issuing another command This option should normally be off and is only useful when trying to debug a faulty connection Display raw command data in log Setting this option displays the command s sent to the QE3 in hexadecimal format This feature is useful when trying to debug a faulty connection and should normally be disabled Page 160 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Display raw response data in log Setting this option displays the response s sent by the matrix in hexadecimal format This feature is useful when trying to debug a faulty connection and should normally be disabled Log size This option specifies the maximum number of lines that can be held in the command response log file The logfile is stored in memory so you must limit the log size to prevent it from using up all available memory If you have problems with your PC running out of memory set this option to a lower number Default 1000 lines Default to only show errors in the log When this option is set the command response log will only show errors by default All commands responses will be logged but only the errors will be shown Save only errors in the log When this option is set only command response errors will be saved in the log Use matrix controller names When this option is set the program will read the input and output names from the matrix during boot up The QE3 stores its input and output names in memory T
85. resets all parameters to the factory specified defaults Note that the matrix and module sizes are reset as well as the output module size If these are not correct your matrix will no longer operate correctly Other parameters are also changed that might make it difficult to access the controller to reconfigure the matrix WARNING DO NOT USE this command unless you are absolutely sure you want the following configuration DHCP Default Static IP Default Static Netmask Default Static Gateway Telnet Port QEC Ethernet Port Serial Port RS485 Terminations Matrix Size Module Size XRO Size Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 52 STX ADR ADR R Example Positive Response 03 XX H ETX CHK 06 XX XX 52 ACK ADR ADR R Rev CL Off 192 168 0 249 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 23 9100 RS232 9600 baud 8N1 Off 32x32 32x32 4 03 XX H ETX CHK Page 91 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol RS Soft Reset This command reboots the control program and is the equivalent of a power cycle Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 52 53 03 XX STX ADR ADR R S ETX CHK Example Positive Response 06 XX XX 52 53 03 XX ACK ADR ADR R S ETX CHK Page 92 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol S Set Crosspoint This command will connect one input to an output The command byte is followed by three bytes giving the output then three bytes g
86. right 2 dial will match this address in the error message This is how you determine which module sent the error message Rev CL Page 73 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 4D STX ADR ADR 03 XX M ETX CHK Query th Example Positive Response 06 XX XX 4D 30 30 ACK ADR ADR M 0 0 The queue did not overflow and there are Example Positive Response 06 XX XX 4D 30 32 ACK ADR ADR M 0 2 46 61 69 6C 75 72 F a i l 65 6C 40 58 52 4D e l X R M 03 XX ETX CHK message queue 3A 3A 65 03 XX ETX CHK 50 53 32 40 58 52 44 P S 2 X R D 3A 49 6E 32 30 52 45 I n 2 0 R F 30 57 61 72 6E 69 6E 0 W a f n i n no alarms or messages 30 33 0 3 4C 65 76 L e V 67 g The queue did not overflow and there are two alarms messages Power Supply 2 at an XR The has 000 on input 20 Note Page 74 of 157 D unit at address 003 has fail This command will be accepted regardless of whether a user is logged in The error occurred at ed input RF minimum dBm level has been set and the monitored input level dropped below that set level XRM unit at address Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Types of Messages Received Type 1 Power supply message 06 XX XX 3A 50 53 XX 40 58 52 XX XX XX ACK ADR ADR B S NUM X R TYPE XADR XADR 46 61 69 6C 75 72 65 03 XX E a i 1 u r e ET
87. specify with an s or ms in the command structure Command length is variable also User does not need to enter leading zeros Input number and delay number must be separated by the symbol The end of the delay number is indicated by the s or ms characters The user must specify a number for both the input and pre attack time If the user wants to set this value to zero then the user must specify 0 character in the pre attack time Command Format 1 02 XX XX 58 47 54 50 41 XX a yi 40 STX ADR ADR X G T P A IN XX Se ENS 73 XX03 XX PAT S wo S ETX CHK Command Format 2 02 XX XX 58 47 50 41 54 XX Sow ds 40 STX ADR ADR X G P A T IN EDS XX EE 6D 73 03 XX PAT 5 tg us m S ETX CHK IN Input port Must be between 1 and the number of system inputs PAT Pre attack time Value in seconds or 1 1000 seconds wait period If the user specifies ms then valid values range from 0 to 60 000 If the user specifies s then valid values range from 0 to 60 Can vary from 1 to 5 characters Numbers only no characters Page 124 of 157 Rev CL Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 54 STX ADR ADR X G T Set auto gain control Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 54 STX ADR ADR X G T Set auto gain control Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 54 STX ADR ADR X G T S6 395 304 30 6D 6 5 0 0 m Set auto gain control XRM QE3 QRM SRM
88. technical service personnel or Quintech technical support assistance Page 154 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System MATRIX CONTROL SOFTWARE This tutorial describes Quintech s Matrix Control Program The Matrix Control Software makes it easy for you to configure and manage multiple QE3 systems It does this through the use of system configurations which store multiple settings and options Using the software multiple configurations can be created and saved for the same QE3 or different QE3s The Matrix Control Program is available free of charge and can be found on the Quintech website Setting up the Communication Parameters Open the program and click the setup button This will open the Communication Settings window Ethernet vs Serial Communications The initial task in setting up the communications parameters involves specifying whether Ethernet or serial communications will be used If you choose Ethernet you will be prompted to set the Ethernet address and port The default port is 9100 It should not need changed unless port 9100 is not allowed on your network If a new port will be specified make sure that it matches the port setting of the matrix controller The default port value of the matrix controller is also 9100 If you choose Serial you will be prompted to set the serial control address and local COM port The local COM port is whatever serial port on your PC you are using to connect to the matrix Be sure that
89. the input signal needs to be replicated The capacity of a QED can be increased by simply adding additional expansion cards For systems where the number of inputs or outputs is larger than 64 an attached appendix describes how to interconnect the RF cables between the QED s and the other matrix modules Interconnect all matrix modules as outlined All unused outputs of the QED should be grounded using terminations that match the system impedance Rev K Page 19 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Output Switch Module QEO The QEO is the final stage of RF signal processing within the matrix system The Output Switch Module QEO receives RF signals from the QE3 and routes them to the appropriate system output s QEO Function and Appearance The internal structure and physical dimensions of the QEO will vary depending on your system s configuration QEO Sizes The quantity of QEOs required and the number of cards installed in them depends upon the size of the QE3 system being implemented For each output there are multiple inputs An attached appendix describes how to interconnect the RF cables between the QEO s and other QE3 modules for systems with more than 64 inputs and or outputs Page 20 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Connections and Port Descriptions AC Power Redundancy All modules in the matrix system are equipped with integrated redundant power supplies and or dual AC inlets This provides redundan
90. the polled input is 45 0 dBm Rev CL Page 51 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol C Check Change Flag and Unit Status Each control port for the system maintains a change flag and several change queues that allow changes throughout the system to be tracked The change flag contains an eight bit flag to indicate the various changes The flag bits are defined as follows Bit Flag Change Indication Action Indicated Cleared By Crosspoint One of the following has changed Front panel access Q command control change 0 Crosspoint input to output connection crosspont lock unlock or change Crosspoint lock status L U S or SP command Access Control setting for input or output The affected crosspoint is entered in to the crosspoint queue 1 Alarm An error or fault has been detected Fault condition M detected The associated message is entered in the message queue 2 Access Control Access Control has been turned on or off for the Front panel set Q port Only the port where access control has group or access changed will show this bit set control on off or ZG command A user s group ID setting has changed 3 Overflow The crosspoint change queue has overflowed More than 8 L SP Q or S commands for 8 different outputs 4 Name An input or output name has changed NSI NSO NI NO NQ The affected input or output is entered in the name queue 5 Overflow The n
91. the specified serial address matches the serial address setting of the matrix controller The default is 00 Monitoring The Matrix Control Program can be set up to monitor the QE3 for any changes made at any other port including the matrix front panel The Monitoring On Off checkbox controls whether monitoring is used or not Checking the checkbox enables monitoring Clearing the checkbox disables it By default monitoring is enabled Located below the monitoring checkbox are fields where you can set a monitoring interval The monitoring interval is the frequency at which the control program polls the matrix to determine if changes have been made The default interval is 15 seconds but you may wish to increase this in order to minimize traffic across your network Rev K Page 155 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System The minimum interval that can be specified is 5 seconds but this interval should not be used in most cases unless a dedicated serial connection is being used to control the matrix and it is a small matrix Communications Settings o go go gno EN senal Parameters i N J Figure 126 Communication Setting Window Page 156 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System General Parameters Two general parameters can be set for the Matrix Control Program The first identifies whether the Ethernet connection should stay open between the transmissions of control commands to the matrix If this feature is disa
92. to OFF the static IP address that is specified in the IP configuration screen will be used Contact your network administrator to confirm the correct setting of DHCP service Page 42 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Ethernet Address The Ethernet Address parameter allows you to set the static IP address gateway and mask for the controller Contact your network administrator for the correct values to use for these parameters IP 10 0 0 50 Msk 255 255 255 0 GW 192 168 0 1 Fl Enter F4 Exit Figure 12 IP Settings The information displayed in the IP field depends upon the DHCP setting Whether or not you can change the configuration also depends upon the DHCP setting Changes are only made after pressing F1 F4 will back you out without making changes to the settings IP Configuration with DHCP Off If DHCP is off the currently configured static IP information will be displayed When DHCP is off the IP address the gateway and mask can be changed IP Configuration with DHCP On If DHCP is on and the controller has successfully been assigned an address from the DHCP server that current information is displayed on the screen If DHCP is on but for some reason a DHCP server could not be found for addressing the static configuration will be displayed In this case you can change the IP configuration even if DHCP is on Rev K Page 43 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Serial Termination The Serial Ter
93. to link to GID not UID 9 25 11 11 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 QEO attenuation enhancements 9 26 11 16 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 QEO attenuation enhancements and debug tool removal 9 27 11 18 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 ZX telnet command restored 9 28 12 2 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Adjust memory timing write Change NQ command 9 29 12 9 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Change boot procedure for AGC value for QE3 inputs Fix DHCP lockup 9 30 12 16 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Change XGH memory saving function Redesign set group and set user screen for 14 character names 9 31 12 2140 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Fix S command 9 32 1 5 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Modify SNMP response to S U SP SU and L commands 9 33 2 16 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Add XGS Enhance boot process 320x320 support QEO off switch Note 7 XX and 9 XX firmware has limited support for the remote 1RU controller Remotes do not support advanced features such as reading RF levels fan status power supply status temperature read and Qsense Most advanced feature commands return error code u for unavailable Page 10 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Firmware Date Protocol Field Update Control Board Notes Capability Special Builds 8 00 2 23 06 2 15 06 Serial Ethernet 1433 F or
94. 02 XX XX 58 46 4D 4F 30 31 36 03 30 STX ADR ADR X G M O 0 1 6 0 35 2E 35 03 XX 5 5 ETX CHK Set auto gain control on for output 16 Set the dB level at 5 5dBm Response Format 06 XX XX 58 46 4D 4F 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X G M O ETX CHK Rev CL Page 115 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XGR Gain Control Read Status This is a QE3 and XRM command This command will report the input gain control settings and RF level of the specified input It will return the attenuation value for an XRM Command length is variable User can but does not need to enter leading zeros Command Format 02 XX XX 58 47 52 XX ie ove 03 XX STX ADR ADR X G R IN3 E wx ETX CHK IN Input to read status Must be between 001 and the number of System inputs Always 3 characters Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 46 52 30 31 38 03 XX STX ADR ADR X G R 0 1 8 ETX CHK Read gain control status of system input 18 Response Format 06 XX XX 58 46 20 4D 41 40 2B 2D XX XX 2E XX 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X G R M A 10s ds tenths ETX CHK M A M for manual mode A for automatic mode Always returns M for XRM or a for gain for attenuation Always returns for XRM 10s 1s tenths dB value input is set at Example Response 06 XX XX 58 46 52 4D 40 2D 31 33 2E 35 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X G R M 1 3 5 ETX CHX Input set at 13 5 dB of attenuation in manual mode
95. 1550 D or later Enhanced SNMP trap IP address storage Improved memory allocation Addition of advanced diagnostic screen for 32x32 systems 7 19 5 15 07 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Simtek memory changes for 32 inputs and 33 outputs XRM system inputs XRO route to zero changed to assume route confirmed from XRM 7 20 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Simtek memory write routine modified to support hardware Simtek written after keypad is released 7 21 7 16 07 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Firmware re written to correct access control bug for 7 09 7 14 7 22 7 18 07 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Firmware now will boot in main mode in a XRM remote 1RU UCM 7 23 8 31 07 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Designed to support SRM XRM combination system No support for XWI XRI XRO amp XA No front panel for reading RF level set warning level and attenuate inputs if front panel is set to XRM SRM system 7 24 11 13 07 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Fixes input access control for an additional 1RU remote controller 7 25 12 10 07 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Adds support for XRO attenuation after a crosspoint change 7 26 1 22 08 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Enhanced factory test mode No changes to customer features
96. 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System To avoid any problems commands sent over TCP IP should use the broadcast address FF hexadecimal Telnet A Telnet console window is provided for configuring and controlling the matrix A command mode is provided where the same protocol commands can be issued but no serial address or packet headers are required See Appendix D for more information SNMP SNMP or Simple Network Management Protocol is now implemented on the QE3 system It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices SNMP works by sending messages called protocol data units PDUs to different parts of a network SNMP compliant devices called agents store data about themselves in Management Information Bases and return this data to the SNMP requesters To use the protocol it must be enabled from the front keypad first Currently the default is on SNMP Additional Features The QE3 polls the input RF levels and the system status If an alarm condition develops a message and SNMP trap are generated specific to the alarm condition If more than 4 alarm conditions are noted before the message queue is read out the QE3 will send out these messages in an SNMP trap containing alarm messages The trap will be sent to the SNMP
97. 19 Figure 88 Primary Backup Setup ssesssceessosssoesssesssecessocssoossoosssossssesssoessoossoossssssssee 121 Figure 89 Select Primary Input seessesssoeesoosssoesssesssesssocesoossooesssesssesesooesoosssossssesssoee 121 xii Rev K Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 QE3 Matrix Switching System Select Backup Input a 2 ese densas teo ie pe Yea poete pes pvase ipee quae io epu V o busa db epa 122 Q SENSE Pair Displayed issscccsscsescccsssasjeasssesens sousssseacdssedessvescsdendtcocssasesasses 122 Threshold Select oeil ce e HIR D a burst unii Dp oc een Cina etui eH 123 Threshold Display OME iiiiueeee erben es obe co eeen exa ble r oe eV ineo la Pee er eu vr el p reu Eae 123 Threshold Display On NU M 124 Rest re Ot i RR RE A 124 No Outputs D tected 4e iere pese la nap eene UHR ES REX PETPEEN a e seso a re Yep eE a ERU 125 Priority Mode Screen P 126 Locked with Priority 205i eek eher Rnerut Fere Po gae io 9 eo Ee bvN eco pw ER ee plebe ERR israse 127 Locked without Priority Per 127 WER C AEE E E E E E E EOE T OE SEE E TEE 129 Front Panel Protected Output Display eesssesssesssesesoossoossoossssesssosssosee 130 logge H 131 Figure 105 I O Names Memoire cero teens ete on pose ied ceni stu a rae scires Dien deh 132 Figure 104 Select Input to Assign Name
98. 23 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Control Ports There are typically three DB 9 control ports on a system controller each of which utilizes female style connectors They are Serial Quintech UCM SRM SRO Control The pinout definitions for both the serial port and the Quintech UCM port are listed in Table 2 As illustrated by the table the pinout definition of the Serial port depends upon how it has been configured The SRM SRO Control port is reserved for Quintech communications with other non QE3 modules thus the pinout has not been listed Pin Control In Serial Control In Serial Quintech UCM RS 232 mode RS 422 485 mode In Out 1 GND GND GND 2 TXD not used not used transmit data 3 RXD Non Inverting Non Inverting receive data Transmit Transmit 4 DTR Non Inverting Non Inverting data terminal Receive Receive ready 5 GND GND GND signal ground 6 DSR Inverting Inverting data set ready Transmit Transmit 7 not used not used not used 8 not used not used not used 9 not used Inverting Receive Inverting Receive Page 24 of 176 Table 2 Serial Quintech UCM Pin Definition Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Serial 1 and Serial 2 Ports The Serial 1 and Serial 2 ports are where serial data from a PC is accepted for communications control of the matrix Serial control can be established using any Serial port including those on connected remote controllers
99. 4 38 40 E D 4 3 73 3 XX S ETX CHK Set auto gain control pre decay time on input 43 to 6500 milliseconds or the equivalent of 6 5 seconds Response Format 06 XX XX 58 46 54 ACK ADR ADR X G I Note Rev CL 50 44 P D 03 XX ETX CHK Some firmware versions do not implement this command Page 127 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XGZ Set Gain Control for Zero Input It is possible for the signal strength of an input to drop to a strength level that can t be read by the gain control hardware This is referred to as zero input If an input set on automatic gain control is at zero input this value is applied to the gain control hardware until the signal comes back and is acted upon by the gain control feature This value can be set to the same range when gain control is in the manual mode Current values range from 13 5dB of attenuation up to 18dB of gain Command length is variable dB and input numbers must be separated by the symbol Tens and tenths place need to separated by the contain the and period and a valid number for both parameters Command Format 1 02 XX XX 58 47 5A XX oe SP 40 2D 2B XX STX ADR ADR X G Z IN3 V amp x dB 2E XX 03 XX tenths ETX CHK IN Input port Must be between 1 and the number of system inputs dB positive or gain values range from 0 to 18 Negative or attenuation values range from 0 to 13255 tenths Valid tenths values are 0 and
100. 48 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol BRO Restore Output Currently Connected to Q Sense Backup Input This command is valid for the QE3 system QSENSE operation This command will connect an output back to the original primary QSENSE input This command can be used if the QSENSE function has taken action and changed the output to the backup input based on QSENSE settings Command Format 02 XX XX 42 52 XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR B R OUT3 OUT 2 OUT 1 ETX CHK OUT Output Must be between 001 and the number of system outputs Always 3 characters Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 42 52 30 31 36 03 XX STX ADR ADR B R 0 1 6 ETX CHK Restore output 16 Response Format 06 XX XX 42 52 03 XX ACK ADR ADR B R ETX CHK Rev CL Page 49 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol BT Set Q Sense Threshold Level for Input This command will set the Q Sense threshold level in dBm for the specified input The threshold value must be between 60 dBm and 0 dBm QE3 only accepts values from 10 to 50 and 99 QE3 will accept a value of 99 to turn off the threshold value essentially disabling the QSENSE feature for that input Command Format 02 XX XX 42 54 XX XX XX 40 2B 2D XX XX STX ADR ADR B I IN3 IN2 IN 10s ls 2E XX 03 XX tenths ETX CHK E xample Command Sent 02 XX XX 42 54 30 31 36 40 2D 3435 2E 35 03 XX STX ADR ADR B I 0 1 6
101. 6 1 ETX CHK The Q Sense reset ability for input 16 is on Alternate Example Response Sent 06 XX XX 42 45 52 31 03 Xx ACK ADR ADR B E R 1 ETX CHK The Q Sense reset ability for the sent input is on Rev CL Page 45 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol BO Set Q Sense On Off Q Sense Enabled Disabled for Input This command will set the Q Sense on off enabled disabled status for the specified input Command Format 02 XX XX 42 4f XX XX XX 31 30 03 XX STX ADR ADR B O N3 N2 N1 ON OFF ETX CHK IN Primary Input Must be between 001 and the number of system inputs Always 3 characters ON OFF Q sense on off status for input Either 0 off disabled or 1 on enabled Always 1 character Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 42 4f 30 31 36 30 03 XX STX ADR ADR B O 0 1 6 0 ETX CHK Disable turn off Q Sense for input 16 Response Format 06 XX XX 42 4f 03 XX ACK ADR ADR B O ETX CHK Page 46 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol BOR Read Q Sense On Off Q Sense Enabled Disabled Status for Input This command will return the Q Sense on off enabled disabled status for the specified input Command Format 02 XX XX 42 4f 52 XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR B O R IN3 IN2 IN ETX CHK IN Primary Input to read status Must be between 001 and the number of system outputs Always 3 charact
102. 76 QE3 Matrix Switching System If the user is logged on with permissions or access control for the local keypad setting is off then you have permission to change the output Out 1 In 1 Output 1 Input 1 Fl1 Change F2 L U F4 Exit Status 1 Figure 16 Connection Status w Permissions To view the status of a particular output channel type in the output number or use the scroll T4 keys to scroll up or down respectively When a valid output channel is entered the channel input will be displayed approximately two seconds after the last digit is entered Do not precede numbers by leading zeros The out 1 and in 1 captions in the upper left quadrant is the associated name of those inputs and outputs This screen shows factory default names but they can be named with any name using a standard character set from a common keyboard Refer to the N commands for further details Changing a Connection This function is available if the user is logged on with permissions or if access control for the local keypad setting is off These permissions are discussed in the Access Control section of the manual Pressing F1 will allow the user to change the input connected to the currently displayed output The Change Connection screen is displayed when F1 is pressed on the Connection Status screen It allows you to change the input connected to the currently selected output Page 46 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System
103. 9 2D 31 32 2E 36 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X R I 1 2 6 ETX CHK RF level read 12 6 dBm NOTE Some firmware releases do not support this command Refer to the firmware release notes at the beginning of this document for details Rev CL Page 137 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XRO RF Output Signal Level Check This command will report the RF level in dBm at a particular XRM QRM matrix system output This will give the RF level at the XRM QRM output for matrices consisting of a single XRM ORM or the XRO for larger matrices Old format required leading zeros Current version is variable in length from 1 to 3 characters No leading zeros required Command Format 02 XX XX 58 52 4F XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X R O n mug db ys ETX CHK n Output number of matrix Response Format 06 XX XX 58 52 4F XX XX XX 2E XX 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X R O TENS ONES 1 10 ETX CHK Example Command 02 XX XX 58 52 4F 31 31 32 03 XX STX ADR ADR X R O 2 ETX CHK Check RF level on matrix output 112 Example Response 06 XX XX 58 52 4F 2D 31 32 2E 36 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X R O 1 2 6 ETX CHK RF level read 12 6 dBm NOTE Some firmware releases do not support this command Refer to the firmware release notes at the beginning of this document for details Page 138 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XRW Read Input Warning Threshold Levels Thi
104. ADR 3 QED unit MSADR 5 QEO unit ADR Address of individual box in an XRM system Must be between 000 and 255 Response Format 06 XX XX 58 50 XX XX XX XX XX ACK ADR ADR X P PSl Degrade PS1 Fail PS2 Degrade PS2 Fail LEDI XX XX 03 XX LED2 LCD ETX CHK PS1 Degrade 0 no Degrade 1 Danger condition on power supply 1 PS1 Fail 0 no Failure 1 Failure on Power supply 1 PS2 Degrade 0 no Degrade 1 Danger condition on power supply 2 PS2 Fail 0 no Failure 1 Failure on Power supply 2 PSI LED 0 LED on 1 LED off PS2 LED 0 LED on 1 LED off LCD 0 LCD OK 1 Not responding Example Command 02 XX XX 58 50 31 32 33 35 03 XX STX ADR ADR X P 1 2 3 5 ETX CHK Check status of power supplies and LCD on XRO unit at address 235 Example Response 06 XX XX 58 50 30 30 31 30 30 30 30 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X P 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ETX CHK Power supply 2 running in degrade mode Power supply 1 normal LCD OK Rev CL Page 129 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XPI QE3 Check Power Supply Current This command will report the current in amps output of a power supply in a QE3 system Command Format 02 XX XX 5850 49 XX XX XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X P I NUM MSADR ADR ADR ADR ETX CHK NUM Power supply number 1 or 2 MSADR Most significant digit o
105. ADR ADR X P Power su 54 T 32 39 2 9 43 20 C OF O Page 132 of 157 D unit at address 7 72 r 20 38 8 34 4 46 F 03 XX ETX CHK pply reports temperature 29 Celsius or 84 Fahrenheit Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XPV QE3 Check Power Supply Voltage This command will report the voltage output a power supply in a QE3 system Command Format 02 XX XX 5850 56 XX XX XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X P V NUM MSADR ADR ADR ADR ETX CHK NUM Power supply number 1 or 2 MSADR Most significant digit of the QE3 address This determines what type of unit will respond in a QE3 system MSADR 4 QE3 unit ADR Address of individual box in a QE3 system Must be between 000 and 255 Response Format 06 XX XX 58 50 56 XX XX 2D XX 56 6F ACK ADR ADR X P V 10s 1s tenths V O 6C 74 TE ETX CHK l t S 03 XX Example Command 02 XX XX 58 50 56 31 34 30 30 39 03 XX STX ADR ADR X P V 1 4 0 0 9 ETX CHK Check Vout of power supply 1 on QE3 unit at address 9 Example Response 06 XX XX 58 50 56 32 34 2D 31 56 6F 6C 74 73 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X P V 2 4 T V O l E S ETX CHK Power supply 1 reports voltage is 24 1 volts output Rev CL Page 133 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XRB RF Signal Level Check at PC Board Level This command will report the RF level in dBm at internal and extern
106. CHK Example Response 06 XX XX 5A 43 3A 31 3A 31 3A 41 64 6d 69 6E 03 XX ACK ADR ADR Z C 1 1 A d m i n ETX CHK User 1 group 1 username Admin Rev CL Page 147 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol ZG Set User Group This command can only be executed by the Admin This command sets a new group for a user Command structure ZG lt username UID gt lt GID gt Username UID The username or User ID GID Group ID The username must start with a character not a number Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 5A 47 3A 41 64 6d 69 6E 3A 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR Z G A d m i n E 1 ETX CHK Set the Admin user to be in group 1 Example Command Sent 02 XX XX SA 47 3A 31 3A 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR Z G 1 1 ETX CHK Set the Admin user to be in group 1 Positive Response 06 XX XX A5 47 03 XX ACK ADR ADR Z G ETX CHK Note This command will set a flag in the Change C command response Note Some firmware versions do not implement this command For those firmware releases the group ID is set to be the same as the user ID and can t be changed For example User 1 UID 1 Admin is in group 1 UID 2 is in group 2 and so on Page 148 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol ZI Login This command is used to login to a particular control port A different user may be logged in to each available command port on a controller The
107. DR X G R O M A ye 10s 1s XX 03 XX tenths ETX CHK M A M for manual mode A for automatic mode QRM only for gain for attenuation LOs ls dB value output is set at Half dB steps 0 or 5 tenths Example Response 06 XX XX 58 46 52 4F 4D 40 2D 31 33 2E 35 03 XxX ACK ADR ADR X G R O M 1 3 5 ETX CHX Output set at 13 5 dB of attenuation in manual mode Rev CL Page 117 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Example Response 06 XX XX 58 46 52 4F 4D 40 2B 31 33 2E 35 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X G R O M F 1 8 s 0 ETX CHX Output set at 18 0 dB of gain in manual mode Example Response 06 XX XX 58 46 52 4F 41 40 2D 31 33 2E 35 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X G R O A 1 0 E 5 ETX CHX Output auto gain control enabled and level set at 10 5dBm Page 118 of 157 Rev CL XGS Set Simple Gain Control Second Delay XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Number of seconds the system will wait before acting upon a signal that requires a changed based on the AGC settings This applies to simple AGC mode only Can be set from 0 to 255 seconds in 1 second intervals Command length is variable User does not need to enter leading zeros but they will be accepted Input number and delay number must be separated by the symbol The user must specify a number for both the input and delay time Command Format 1 02 XX XX 58 47 53 XX IE 40 STX ADR ADR
108. Exit Figure 68 QE3 XRM System Selecting Option 4 from the QE3 XRM SRM Systems screen sets up the original size of the XRM system Since the QE3 system is being added to an original XRM systems the QE3 operating system needs to know which inputs and outputs are XRM and which are QE3 This screen sets up the XRM inputs and outputs Enter the original XRM system size of XRM Inputs 0 of XRM Outputs 0 F1 Enter F4 Exit Figure 69 QE3 XRM Setup Option 3 of the QE3 SRM Expanded Setup screen sets up the QE3 system modules A QE3 system can contain XRD distribution modules and QEO output modules The operating system needs to know the system configuration and where in a system the inputs and outputs are located This is asking if the system includes QED modules If the system has more than 64 outputs but is not equipped with QED input modules then this setting needs to be set to no This type of system is equipped with customer supplied input splitters and all input features such as attenuation and gain control are disabled Page 98 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System QEDs Option 4 of the Module Sizes Menu displays the QED Setup screen which enables you to specify whether the system includes QED modules If the system has more than 64 inputs but is not equipped with QED input modules then this setting needs to be set to no This type of system is equipped with customer supplied input splitters and all input features suc
109. G aeu RUE 90 Figure 59 Matrix Size er E 91 Figure 60 Model Number Type cesse eere eene ee eee eene eren netta s ease tetas tss stone sena 92 Ligure 61 Module SIZ6S rois a eter e totns GE sooscecstnedesavaecenndessbinncsstuasoosenecunessensucseds 93 Figure 62 SRM Module Size 5e euet uae orba rkeo sepe sees a baee DoK ERU ona RD pea eu HERR UE KR ReT e pa 94 Figure 63 SRO Module SIZE itii eite iot rts e EPOD CO gei XS SERI EEREE Ec I SREER ERES ERREUR eR IUEE 95 Figure 64 QE3 XRM SRM Systems eere eee ee eese een seen etta seta setas stas tasses sets sena 96 Figure 65 QE3 SRM System 1r cest tra tp ccsens un set et eq eos yea e oed Caec op eR aR Road equo au eE n Sor oe Rep 97 Figure 66 OEJ SRM Seblip eerte ce ether cte t etse ce kae d ort ba ee In e PERE SE CHIESE sS BE Ya eC uera eR MEE SEE 97 Figure 67 QES XRM Sy Stennis inedite eta eben eL Sedis o ea eepon ie i ide ca bepten SEE cWi drea pK EUR 98 Figure 68 QE3 XRM Setup aei inire crimi ceptis Cages bi dus Si CI SHE Me sPERD E c bid pi ei ids 98 Figure 69 QED Setlp csentcsicacescuicessdedeseusvespasucsiatiecsavensessssdvands sosite osoro sses ienes stoerste 99 Figure 70 Set L O Namesesciiescscessecieshececsacesaicasuleestcccchwedsasseuicuacebsuseaststacccusiuatengesussueceoe 99 Figure 71 Load Firmware esseessosseesoesoossoesoesoossoesoeseoesoesoesooesossoeseoesoessessossoossessoseoosse 100 Figur
110. G commands or XAS command Command Format 02 XX XX 58 41 XX XX XX XX XX XX STX ADR ADR X A MSADR ADR ADR ADR INPUT INPUT XX XX XX XX XX TENS ONES TENTHS ETX CHK MSDXADR Most significant digit of the address This determines what type of unit will respond in an XRM system MSADR 0 XRM unit MSADR 2 XRD unit XADR Address of individual unit in an XRM system Must be between 000 and 015 for an XRD and range from 0 to 255 for an XRM unit INPUT Input number of the individual unit you want to attenuate Must be between 01 and 32 TENS ONES and TENTHS Number of dB of attenuation from 00 0 to 15 5 The tens and ones value can range from 0 to 15 The tenths always have to be 5 or O Attenuation is only in 0 5 increments so any other tenth value will be rejected as an invalid data range Any value larger than 15 5 will also be rejected as invalid data range Example Command Q2 XX XX 08 4L 82 32 33 35 30 35 30 34 3 03 XX STX ADR ADR X A 2 2 3 5 0 5 0 y 5 ETX CHK Attenuate XRD unit at address 235 or EBH Input 5 a total of 7 5 dB Page 100 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Example Command 02 XX XX 58 41 32 30 31 36 31 37 31 34 30 03 XX STX ADR ADR X A 0 0 1 6 1 7 1 4 5 ETX CHK Attenuate XRM unit at address 196 or OFH Input 17 a total of 14 5 dB Positive Response 06 XX XX 58
111. If the port is configured for RS 485 communications and it is the last unit on the RS 485 bus control termination should be on If the controller is not the last unit on the bus the control termination should be off See Figure 48 for a graphical example If you are not using RS 485 in the control port leave this setting off Page 76 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System MAIN Termination On Quintech UCM In Quintech UCM Out 1 to 1 pinout cable Quintech Supplied Adapter UCM REMOTE 1 Quintech UCM In Quintech UCM Out Termination Off 1 to 1 pinout cable UCM REMOTE 2 Quintech UCM In Quintech UCM Out Termination Off 1to 1 pinout cable UCM REMOTE 3 Termination On Quintech UCM In Quintech UCM Out Figure 51 Quintech UCM Termination Rev K Page 77 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Controlling PC Cantralling PC with with R5485 R5485 Interface Interface Peripheral Peripheral with with R5 485 B5 485 Interface Interface Peripheral with Guintech AS 485 Cantraller Interface Contral Termination Of Peripheral with H5 485 Interface CQuirtezh Cantraller Cantal Termination On Figure 52 Serial Control In RS485 Connection Termination Examples Page 78 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Main vs Remote Mode All Quintech switching systems come with at least one controller which may exist as a stand alone unit or may be integrat
112. Improved communications interface with memory enhanced 1530 on off card No remote UCM support 7 12 10 12 06 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Improved communications interface with memory enhanced 1530 on off card Limited remote UCM supported See note 7 18 10 26 06 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Fixes accidental 1530 on off card memory re initialization Limited remote UCM supported See note 7 14 11 19 06 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Fixes incorrect backup memory writing Fan PRM read timing change Support for 512x512 Access control bug fix 7 15 12 19 06 2 15 07 Serial 1550 D or later Internal Release 7 16 12 20 06 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Fan speed read correction Firmware version and release not stored on XRM memory Correction now advances version numbers after an upgrade 7 17 02 07 07 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Systems requiring multiple XRM units now store and initialize individual XRM unit inputs attenuation values Support for up to 512x512 size Possible 256 XRM x 32inputs 8192 input attenuation values Page 6 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Firmware Date Protocol Field Update Control Board XRM Notes poo Capability PO 7 18 03 01 07 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet
113. N2 IN1 ON OFF ETX CHK IN Primary Input Must be between 001 and the number of system inputs Always 3 characters ON OFF Reset status for input Either 0 reset off or 1 reset on Always 1 character Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 42 45 30 31 36 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR B E 0 1 6 1 ETX CHK Set the Q Sense reset ability for input 16 to on Response Format 06 XX XX 42 45 03 XX ACK ADR ADR B E ETX CHK Page 44 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol BER Read Q Sense On Off Reset Ability of Input This command will return the Q Sense on off reset ability for the specified input Command Format 02 XX XX 42 45 52 XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR B E R N3 N2 N1 ETX CHK IN Primary Input to read status Must be between 001 and the number of system outputs Always 3 characters Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 42 45 52 30 31 36 03 XX STX ADR ADR B E R 0 1 6 ETX CHK Get Q Sense reset status for system input 16 Response Format 06 XX XX 42 45 52 XX XX XX XX 03 XX ACK ADR ADR B E R N3 IN2 IN1 ON OFF ETX CHK Alternate QE3 Response Format 06 XX XX 42 45 52 XX 03 XX ACK ADR ADR B E R ON OFF ETX CHK ON OFF Reset status for input Either 0 reset off or 1 reset on Always 1 character Example Response Sent 06 XX XX 42 45 52 30 31 36 31 03 XX ACK ADR ADR B E R 0 1
114. Negative response sent 15 XX XX 78 03 XX NAK ADR ADR x ETX CHK c Command Unrecognized This type of error message occurs when the matrix receives an unspecified command The unit will respond as specified below Negative response sent 15 XX XX 63 03 XX NAK ADR ADR c ETX CHK u Command Unavailable This type of error message occurs when the matrix receives command that is not implemented or can t be done on a particular system or at a particular time The unit will respond as specified below Negative response sent 15 XX XX 75 03 XX NAK ADR ADR u ETX CHK Rev CL Page 155 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol i Improper Data This reply is sent if an improper number of data bytes are contained in the protocol wrapper For example if an S command is sent with only an output number and no input number This error will also be sent for any command that contains too many or too few bytes even if the command does not have any data bytes Negative response sent 15 XX XX 69 03 XX NAK ADR ADR i ETX CHK d Data out of Range This message will be sent if the data bytes sent are outside the parameters of your matrix If the SRM is polled for the status of output 17 and you only have 16 outputs you will receive this message Negative response sent 15 XX XX 04 03 XX NAK ADR ADR d ETX CHK f XRM Command Failed This message will be sent if there was no response or an u
115. O e Listas NIRE UBL Mu eH iners 73 R 5 485 Pin Oil dettes tte omae toties qe metior hcm 73 Cable Lengths oes REIR EAS STE a USA NEUSS EARS Sa PR E VUE ENR E OTEA AN EEES 13 Sigial Reflection mee ocio o He eas eee en Rel ERE a 74 Receiver Transmitter Termination eeeeeeeeeeeeeenene enn nnnm nnnm nnn nnn nn nnn 74 Biasing R SISlOIS eee oe DIEI RR STE OA UR eS LUE ES A EUR URS dU EUCH A ERS 74 Which ports are R 5 485 oi ssscssesiaisiosegnsescesesenscsecosanuncsnacsasnsssasnvsnsacssandens 75 SSEPTIVIIN ALY Aer 75 Front Panel RS 485 Termination sese enne nnne 75 Which Controllers in My System Should be RS 485 Terminated 76 RS 485 Port Termination cccccccccccssssssecececccessessnsecececccsesesenseaeeeseesenees 76 RS 485 Serial Control In Port Termination see 76 Main vs Remote Mode e 79 Differences between Main and Remotes eee eee eee ee eere enano 79 Rev K V QE3 Matrix Switching System eronsuu ML CTI Om 9 79 Checking Control Mode o ea eese aer sh ase tod sesles diee a ec kme p eeu as sepu EET 80 Setting the Control Modenie ita pw e ee a a a avesse te gita etn 80 System Commands from the Main Controller eene 81 System Commands from the Remote Controller s sees 8l DE LINO CSS abo ia e suomi Gti tudo bu edds utto Metall etd dab ce sedo 81 Initi
116. OX X X lt X DX DX X lt X X X lt OK DK X X lt OK OX DK X DX X lt DK OK X OX DX lt lt X lt gt lt gt lt X S X X X lt X X X X DX OX DK DX X lt DK DX DK X DK X DK X DX DK DK OK DX DX X X lt DX X lt OX gt X lt OX OX gt lt gt X lt X lt gt lt X lt OX OX OX OX lt X lt gt X lt XxX gt lt gt lt gt lt X Rev CL Page 3 of 157 XRM QE3 ORM SRM MRF MRM LTE Series Protocol XGR X XIX X XXX XX XXX px 5 X lt lt X lt lt X lt X X X lt X lt X X DK OK X X lt OK lt X X lt DK lt X lt gt X lt X lt gt X lt X X lt gt OS gt X lt X lt lt X lt X lt X lt X lt X X lt X lt X OSI X lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt lt lt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt OX gt lt OX gt lt X lt gt X lt X lt gt lt gt lt N O XXX XXX px XIXI lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt X lt gt x lt Note 1 Some firmware versions implementing releases 2 15 01 2 15 03 allowed an L lock command to change a locked output to a different input without first using the U unlock command to remove the lock In order to mainta
117. Port Termination Front Panel RS 485 Termination 75 RS 485 Port Termination 76 RS 485 Serial Control In Port Termination eee 76 RS 485 Termination Screen 75 Serial Termination 44 Serial Termination Screen 44 Port Level Access Control 8 POFSS er e scescseckosseas aaa 12 44 Control Ports eee 24 Ethernet Connections 32 Ethernet Port eeeeeeeeeeee 32 Port Access Control Enable Disable Sore nerna an adi 140 Quintech UCM Port 29 Quintech UCM Port Crossover Porno ME 30 RS 485 Port Termination 76 RS 485 Serial Control In Port Termination eese 76 Serial Quintech UCM Pin Definition E E AE E E N ETA 24 Set QEG Port noie tied fot 41 Turning Off an Output 48 Which Ports Are RS 485 75 XR Bus Connections 27 XR Bus Ports eseeeeeee 27 Power AC Connections eeceeeeeee 21 AC POWE cesis e tei eeeisiivus 21 AC Redundancy 5 edere 21 DC Redundancy 21 RedundafiCy ace ice dec 21 Voltages 4 5 coste esito toteis 22 i 7 QE3 Matrix Switching System Power Cords scisma 21 Power LEDS uice eet es 22 Power Supplies 18 21 Get Power Supply Status 54 LNB Power
118. RM is D unit is 000 to 015 The XRM examines If the RF t does not closely match the RF level then this message will be generated level at Page 79 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Type 6 RF Input Threshold Level Message 06 XX XX XX 49 6E XX XX 5246 4C 05 76 ACK ADR ADR CTYPE I n NUM NUM R F L e V 65 6C 40 58 52 XX XX XX 57 61 72 6E 69 6E e l X R UTYPE XADD XADD W a E n i n 67 3 XX g EXT CHK NUM Input number This value is not preceded by zeros If the input number is 1 9 then only one character is output If the input number is 10 32 then two characters are output XADR Address of individual unit in an XRM system XRM is 000 to 255 An XRO and XRD unit is 000 to 015 UTYPE M O or D to represent XRM unit XRO output module or XRD distribution module Warning The XRM has the ability to monitor the RF levels of each input and determine if the dBmlevel has dropped below a set threshold value This message Page 80 of 157 is generated if a dBm value has been set for an input and the RF level has dropped below that set level Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol N Name I O NOTE This command is included for backward compatibility It is recommended that new users use the NS command to change a name This command limits the name to 4 characters The NS command has a variable name length from 0 to 7 character
119. References The entire front panel hierarchy is listed below The page number that refers to a particular menu item is listed here for your convenience Some options are only available if logged in as the Admin Other options are only available if the system is a combination SRM QE3 system Access control for the local keypad LCD has to be turned on to view the access control setup menus l Monitor amp erii Cc 45 2 System Options MOD aea cont poletitesbetena pps uet blan pastu Eu cma ies Earn 82 PARE BOUT 008 2 C511 MP RC 84 Entry into the configuration menu requires a factory code The code is 732 Refer to Factory Settings Code Number for more information on this code Most settings under this menu are critical to system functionality Care should be taken any time this menu is accessed 2 1 1 System Setup Men aue rbi pa Hob ER 85 2L 1 Matrix Size aui Ie bi rto esta ien qai sides icm Eis 86 PANES c 87 2 1 1 3 Module Sizes Me itio dentro eR noire au ede lpinde 88 2 1 Ne Sell ca RIV Mod le S126 uinci an e ha tra Rer crat 89 2 1 1 3 2 SRO Module Size eost eieteen icc itat ea tote da pus e 90 2 1 1 3 3 Combination QE3 XRM SRM 89 2 1 1 3 3 1 QB3 SRM System eoe 92 2 1 1 3 3 2 QB3 SRM Setup uec etie 92 2 1 1 3 3 3 QE3 XRM System iooor rite 93 2 1 1 3 3 4 QOB3 XRM Setup 93 PRIMUS IURE OI a a a 94 Rev K Page 35 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System 2 1 1 4 O Names Menu
120. Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol QE3 Response Example 06 XX XX 58 43 3A 49 34 2C 38 ACK ADR ADR X G I 4 y 8 3A 30 39 2C 36 ETX CHK O 3 7 6 03 XX Input card 4 and 8 not responding Output cards 3 and 6 not responding QE3 Response Example 06 XX XX 58 43 3A 42 3A 4F 3 XX ACK ADR ADR X C i O ETX CHK All cards installed and responding Rev CL Page 107 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XF Check Fan This command will report the speed and condition of an individual cooling fan in an XRM or QE3 system Command Format 02 XX XX 58 46 XX XX XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X F NUM MSADR ADR ADR ADR ETX CHK NUM Fan number 1 through 5 QRM units only have two fans If a fan 3 or 4 is polled that does not exist a NAK failed condition will be returned MSADR Most significant digit of the address This determines what type of unit will respond in a system This field is not used for QRM MSADR 0 XRM unit MSADR 1 XRO unit MSADR 2 XRD unit MSADR 3 QED unit MSADR 4 QE3 unit MSADR 5 QEO unit ADR Address of individual box in a system This is the two dials on the control board on the right on an XRM system or the bottom two dials on a QE3 system control board The control board address is in Hex format note the dials go from 0 to F This address must be converted t
121. Serial Communications 156 Event Logeion 167 Factory Configuration Settings 86 Factory Defaults for Access Control 154 Factory Settings Code Number 89 Fan Condition Monitoring 4 Fans Fan Condition Monitoring 4 Get Fan Speed stet 54 Fe t tes 4 e ted inet 3 Alarm Condition Notification 6 Alarm Message Queue 6 Circuit Elements uiii eines 8 Fan Condition Monitoring 4 Features Menu sq hiberna 106 Input and Output RF Level Read 7 Internal Air Temperature Monitoring 4 5 i 4 LCD Status Monitoring 5 Port Level Access Control 8 Power Supply Monitoring 4 RF Level Monitoring 5 6 Self Monitoring eeeesees 3 SNMP Traps nreno 7 Unity Ga sau eot ore od ween cdots 8 User PermisslOns oder dete eto besuht 7 Features Menu eese ins 106 Firmware Ethernet Download Method 104 Firmware Default Settings 102 Firmware Download Instructions 101 Firmware Download Preparation 101 Firmware Upgrade Kit 101 Firmware Version eeseeee 49 Load Firmware ss 100 Load Firmware Screen 100 Serial Port Download Method 103 Firmware Default Settings 102 Firmware Download Instructions 101 Firmwa
122. Setup A s sesvdsiend qusdam tute in edu oed eU ca edens 121 Q SENSE Threshold 5 5 rette ttes tet eiit visites 123 Q SENSE Manual Restore ssssssseseseeeeeee eene nennen enne tnnn nnne 124 Priority Mode oseonoemsswteecetescdh26 Priority OO OM Ku m 126 Priority Mode Description iod enc dee ct ben fauna cte dede accede 126 Eront Panel Priory Displays ein nnani joe o Eu ditte daos 127 User s Priory Erotic cedere datis Delo a ted as datus Dead 127 Default Names and Priority In Order eere 128 Priority Mode On Off Clear Memory eee 128 Priority Example 22 no rires ubt eri eu AR DeL cde ue dba 128 Output Protection eeeeeeeeeeeees L29 Protected Outputs Description 1 eere esee eese e eren eene eneneen 129 Protected vs Locked eene uto An a metis Latein Ped rete 129 Commands d setae ost ap Me esp A red eater 129 Ports Specific ermaten E M 130 Address SDepIHeo ud dcs en eo p eu o ies 130 Front Panel Protected Output Display eee 130 Uhiptotect Output 5i v HERES ls easter dea ead er det uv pax alae 131 Rev K vii QE3 Matrix Switching System Naming Inputs and Outputs 132 T O Names Options Menu 5 en bose Pas pn ea ea es eh ate Ua a rep Ee bd epaa i ae eer e eia ged aa 132 Set Dap t Names rekri ssc at gasarseinas es deii TE a Lu edad 133 Set Output Names miye
123. Supplies 21 Power LEDS 5 nete 22 Power Supply Monitoring 4 Report Power Supply Status 54 NODE BES r sien o ais Hae Re eda 22 Power Supply Cards Power Supplies ees 18 Power Supply Monitoring 4 Preventing Accidental Crosspoint CHANGES S 138 Privilege Groups 138 151 Problems and Solutions 169 Ethernet Problems 174 Front Panel LEDs 171 General Problems 170 ENB Power 5 2 e eie 171 Passwords and Permissions 176 Problems with Crosspoint Connections 172 Remote Not Working 175 Serial Port Problems 173 Problems with Crosspoint Connections Nossa det eie A ue ME 172 Protection Against Accidental Crosspoint Connection Changes 48 Protocol Ethernet Command Protocol 32 RS 232 own etica E 25 RS 232 Advantages Disadvantages 26 Ra uh c pisos 26 RS 422 Advantages Disadvantages 26 RS 485 sins tie ee eed 26 SNMP oeste e ass 33 SNMP Menu tht 111 CPD Au So cae nsns eive tore 32 Protocol Data Units PDUS 33 QES eiit neet 11 QE3 Matrix System Types of Modules 10 QES System ians tbe 11 Qee Port ce oA RS 139 QEC Port Access 1 8 Port Access Control Enable Disable ho d oo POM PSU NU EE 140 Reset Password Screen
124. UID may be fixed or there may be a menu where the group ID can be set Once the correct user is selected press F1 to enter the Select Name Password screen Page 146 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System User User2 Pass 2 F1 Set Name F2 Set Pass F4 Exit Figure 119 Select Name Password To change the user name press F1 To change the password press F2 This will display either the Change User Name or the Change Password screen They are both identical except for the cursor location User Admin Pass 1 F1 Done F2 gt F3 F4 Exit Figure 120 Change User Name Password Use the F2 and F3 keys to position the cursor at a particular character position then use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through a list of alphanumeric characters Repeat this process as often as necessary until the desired name or password has been entered Then press F1 to save it and return to the Set Name Password Screen Pressing F4 will exit without making any changes Rev K Page 147 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Valid Passwords and Length A user name can consist of up to 14 alphanumeric characters and must begin with a letter A password can also consist of up to 14 alphanumeric characters and can begin with any alphanumeric character Usernames are not allowed to start with a number Once the user name and password has been specified press F1 to enter the information press F4 to return to the user selection screen
125. X CHK NUM Power Supply number 1 or 2 TYPE M O or D to represent XRM unit XRO output module or XRD distribution module XADR Address of individual unit in an XRM system XRM is 000 to 255 An XRO and XRD unit is 000 to 015 Failed Power supply is not operating Power supply may have failed it may be unplugged or it may be not installed in the slot Rev CL Page 75 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Type 2 Fan message 06 XX XX 3A 46 61 6E XX 40 58 52 XX XX XX ACK ADR ADR F a n NUM X R TYPE XADR XADR 46 61 69 6c 65 64 03 XX F a i l e d ETX CHK NUM Fan number 1 2 3 or 4 TYPE M O or D to represent XRM unit XRO output module or XRD distribution module XADR Address of individual unit in an XRM system XRM is 000 to 255 An XRO and XRD unit is 000 to O15 Failed Fan should be replaced The fan is not rotating at all or so slow that it cannot keep the unit at optimum operating temperature Page 76 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Type 3 Temperature Message 06 XX XX 3A 54 65 6D 70 40 58 52 XX XX ACK ADR ADR T e m p X R UTYPE XADR XX 57 61 72 6E 69 6E 67 3 XX XADR W a n a n g EXT CHK UTYPE M O or D to represent XRM unit XRO output module or XRD distribution module XADR Address of individual unit in an XRM system XRM is 000 to 255 An XRO and XRD un
126. a aT Ue YR Ee APR NEP E ANa 159 Unlocking Cross POMUS c m eie Dpq qoos coderi qp rh decibte te se PEU IRE Sp t eR REN 159 Locking and Unlocking the Keypad eerte etate 159 Controlling Monitorin siessen sta eto Is eroi oettaiu daba vet aec totes 159 Onine OH nes osisadietothoietkoecm unxit cedem iue La E 160 jus Pw P 160 Load last configuration on startup essen enne 160 Deb g HOdez cm oq ooo de vedete eU Rob fuge edu bu 160 Display raw command data m log rie qct ce ettet oa 160 Display raw response data in log ee edite etate se Fecit rta tb bae 161 MSO SUF Slaton dept ette dt uo GIA esu IL ott e I Bou uiis 161 Default to only show errors in the log eee 161 Save only exrors in th Og ied asein ped eS eue 161 Use matrix controller TialTieso utut pede totu citu oe mio dac hoc d tae 161 FeO OU OC OUE Pls DU NEN 162 Matrix Customization seessosssesssessoessoessossoossoossoossoosseesssesssessosssssssoee 162 Customizing Input and Output Names seeeeeseeessesesseseresresserererressessreeseeseeseresee 162 Write Names cuin cu Aare Madea eens acento eee 162 Read Names 252a cape ata ener eee ie dd tu IU eM E 162 hi PCIE e 163 Manage GEOUDS 2 oii eene Ces etes ra dito tipi CP qii Hes eei bene Le dad iE Sps I UE 163 Input PermisstOH 3 2 0 p repa cec deed Ucet ead it eibi code ER 163 Rev K 1X QE3 Matrix Switching System su
127. abel QA1 Figure 25 Label Prompt 6 Enter the label identifier This tells the controller which module in the system you want information about F2 and F3 moves the cursor left and right Up or down arrows select the next character in a pre determined list of characters available An invalid label or a label that is not compatible with the current system size will be rejected Page 52 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Input Warning Level Input Warning Level sets warning threshold levels for input alarm conditions RF warning level can be set from 10 to 50dBm This is the total power at the input before any QE3 attenuation is applied If this value is set and the total power on that input drops below the set threshold an SNMP trap will be sent and a message will be added to the message queue Input 1 RF Monitoring Off Fl Select F4 Exit Tt Scroll or Enter Figure 26 Monitoring Off Scroll up or down to select the system input for whichyou want to set an RF warning level then press F1 to select Set RF dBm Warning Level Type in a number from 10 to 50 The threshold is not accepted until the F1 key is pressed This screen can be exited without any changes by pressing the F4 key F2 will turn RF monitoring off for that input Input 1 Off New Value F1 Enter F2 Off 7 Scroll F4 Exit Figure 27 Set RF Warning Level Menu Rev K Page 53 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Fan Speed Get Fan Sp
128. able adapter is supplied with the purchase of an additional controller that will be used as a remote unit The adapter is used between the main controller and the first remote controller If more than one remote is connected to the system additional adapters are not required Use only a straight through one to one cable between the additional remotes Pins 3 4 6 and 9 on the main side connect to pins 4 3 9 and 6 on the supplied adapter The pinout of the adapter is shown below Main controller Remote controller Remote out Remote In Pin number Pin number NC 2 NC 3 4 4 3 NC 6 9 NC 8 NC Q 6 This adapter is custom built by Quintech and cannot be purchased from another vendor Note that this is NOT a NULL MODEM adapter The adapter can only be used in one location between the main controller and the first remote controller in the daisy chain Page 30 of 176 Rev K Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System MAIN 6 RU 64x64 Controller Quintech UCM 1 to 1 pinout cable Quintech Supplied Adapter Remote 1RU Controller Remote Out 1 to 1 pinout cable Remote 1RU Controller Remote In Remote Out 1 to 1 pinout cable Remote 1RU Controller Figure 4
129. access Local keypad 0 Remote port 1 Control in port 2 Ethernet A 3 Ethernet B 4 Telnet 5 SNMP 6 Serial address of 1RU remote or main controller unit the command originated from Page 35 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol SU Command Event This event trap is generated on SRM QE3 XRM and SRM products This SNMP trap indicates that the SU command has been successfully issued Complete trap SU out WWW in XXX from userY portZ gt Description structure SU Event description Set Un Protect command out WWW Output number in XXX Input number from more event description userY Q User that issued the command Userl is the Admin up to user8 User 9 is no user logged in lt portZ gt Port of access Local keypad 0 Remote port 1 Control in port 2 Ethernet A 3 Ethernet B 4 Telnet 5 SNMP 6 lt address AA gt Serial address of 1RU remote or main controller unit the command originated from Page 36 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol U Command Event This event trap is generated on SRM QE3 XRM and SRM products This SNMP trap indicates that the U command has been successfully issued Complete trap lt U out WWW in XXX from userY portZ address AA gt Description structure lt U gt lt out WWW gt in XXX from userY portZ address AA Rev CL Event descrip
130. ad Lock 2 Login Logout 3 Setup F4 Exit Figure 110 Access Control Menu Keypad Access Control The simplest method of access control is locking the keypad This can be done to prevent someone from bumping into the UCM keypad and accidentally changing a setting When the keypad is locked only the exact key sequence of 857 will allow the user back into the system from the keypad Note that the keypad lock does not disable port access in any way Page 140 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Keypad Lock Option 1 in the Access control menu will load the lock keypad screen To navigate to the Lock keypad screen from the main menu key sequence 3 1 3 Access Control 1 Keypad Lock F1 Lock Keypad F4 Exit Figure 111 Lock Keypad From the Keypad Lock Screen press F1 to lock the keypad or press F4 to return to the Access control screen When enabled the phrase Keypad Locked will be displayed on the screen to indicate that the lock is in effect Keypad Locked Figure 112 Keypad Locked Rev K Page 141 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Unlock Keypad To remove the keypad lock press any key on the keypad The Unlock Keypad Screen will be displayed Enter code to unlock keypad F1 Enter F4 Exit Figure 113 Unlock Keypad Unlock Keypad Code Enter the numeric sequence 857 After a few seconds you will be returned to the Keypad Lock Screen The numeric sequence equates to the lett
131. age 142 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XT Check CPU Temperature This command will report the temperature of the local control CPU card in the module with the specified address The temperature is reported in degrees Celsius This command is useful for making sure that the module is receiving adequate cooling If the temperature begins to raise it can indicate that the air intake filters are becoming blocked with dust and need to be cleaned Command Format 02 XX XX 58 54 XX XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X T MSADR ADR ADR ADR ETX CHK MSADR Most significant digit of the address This determines what type of unit will respond in an XRM system MSADR 0 XRM unit MSADR 1 XRO unit MSADR 2 XRD unit MSADR 3 QED unit MSADR 4 QE3 unit MSADR 5 QEO unit ADR Address of individual box in a system Must be between 000 and 255 for an XRM Must be between 000 and 015 for an XRD or XRO Response Format 06 XX XX 58 54 XX XX XX XX 43 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X T T00 S LOS DS C ETX CHK Example Command 02 XX XX 58 54 32 30 31 32 03 XX STX ADR ADR X 3E 2 0 1 Z ETX CHK Check temperature of XRD unit at addresses 012 Example Response 06 XX XX 58 54 2B 30 35 36 43 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X T F 0 4 1 ETX CHK temperature on CPU card reads 41 degrees Celsius NOTE Some firmware releases do not support this command Refer to the firmware release notes
132. aie tee eh cae eee 134 Assigning Names Using Protocol Commands ees 135 Command Advantage uscite toties iet es eda Eee Eiai SE e ai uaes 135 Default INA OS eR 136 Access Coamtrol cccccccccccccaccascascascrsccsccscsscsscsece 237 Access Control Overview siscsecnssceceasdsccnerscesancsedecksssceudasecasucedonsrsoasessseces 137 Syste M ACCESS NR 138 Port Access Control Enable Disable esee eene nnne 139 PveccaB sq RR 140 Keypad Access Control eec eI aote teri aE Queda cou Ens EV Ei 140 Keypad Do6kissesciaeaore eo De IRE Mani aate ond i factos 141 Unlock Keypad suceso ope a Nasa ied aa 142 Unlock Keypad C Ode etoisaedaen ntis veedie Mee o Seda aep Eaque o ER 142 Logging In and Logging Out 2 err pete tetaaseieq er ges Sev toes Fein thes sanesededes 142 Opi OC OU cm 143 Password TTY merenan alae a aa a a a R aa 143 LEO COUR dsl E E E A DRE e ee e aes 144 User Tlcgnu c 145 Access Control Setup Mn cies esee ect oe eda tna ANE eden etse pa B Ue ge de ong dd 145 Defining User Names and Passwords eee 146 DCH EC a E EE E EE 146 Defining Group Permissions eoe tret heo en seta sae en tedensteaveeees 148 SY m AC COGS T S 146 Setting User ACCESS ii aiii en RELATA GREG R Ede FORD E 149 CEOSSDODNLCOBBOLA GOES nd Matti Latvia sssdw ruso atte tit acutis beares 150 Output Access Control snot edi derit Made ele Sid MER IE UC 150 Input
133. al points in a XRM system This command was included to aid in diagnostics of an RF path failure RF level sensing is currently available on XRD inputs XRO outputs XRM inputs XRM outputs Command Format 02 XX XX 58 52 42 XX XX XX XX XX STX ADR ADR X R B MSDXADR XADR XADR XADR I O B XX XX XX XX XX 3 XX CNUMO CNUM1 I O NUMO NUM1 ETX CHK MSDXADR Most significant digit of the XRM address This determines what type of unit will respond in an XRM system MSDXADR 0 XRM unit MSDXADR 1 XRO unit MSDXADR 2 XRD unit XADR Address of individual unit in an XRM system Must be between 000 and 255 for an XRM Must be between 000 and 015 for an XRO and XRD unit CARD This can be an I or O Stands for Input card or Output card CNUMO This is the card number to be read Currently this value will be 0 because current systems only have 8 maximum cards This value is included for future system expansion CNUM1 This is the card number to be read Currently 1 8 for the input output or bridge cards Page 134 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol I O This can be I for input or O for output of the selected card NUMO This is the card input or output number 10s place Currently this value is always 0 It is included for future system design NUM1 This is the card input or
134. alizing Remotes 5 e emet e UE XV UAR ATE RU UR E Pva eae Tin 8l Remotes Initialization Procedure eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeennree 82 What Mode Should This Controller Be In 85 Factory Configuration Settings 86 System Options Menu scosiecessesssscceassssenocedecssssaocesecseascasvadassscsavnisivosonttes 86 Coniteuratl om Meni E 88 Factory Settings Code Number i qe Ie a emi quse ie aides adi 89 System Setup Meni o deseada tod s TE BREED ON Das nM Uh dab dr eus 90 Matrix Size dis eu oe E eb ee ex eR Reve gus 9 WRT CT T TES 92 Mod le Sizes meneren dio eosque decus iode ud bass apes eU LA dti 93 AU UNGIHON Qucm det ata qae RIEN DA DAS I RC BR AERE E AR RUR EM RARE MARE ER ROG 99 Load Firmware T oseaeene dds 100 Exiting Download Mode dose io eae eo ee ee nce In exe Eee Yo tenons 101 Firmwart Dperade Kito estu assente A E Mod n 101 Firmware Download Instructions esses 101 Firmware Download Preparation eese 101 DOES Internal Memory aie eiiie aio bae cong ete iia a ded 101 QE3 with Internal Memory 225 e ag ase deis ee ee teer aa iu aeunio 101 QE3 Without Internal Memory eese 102 Firmware Default Settings uisi icri vx Ice eid eder etu veau 102 Ethernet or Serial Port Download sse 103 Why Download Firmware oed edidere eor tas leer te e dedo q ecd e ecu tea ees fe
135. alue is set to a small number then the signal level will increase quickly back up to the pre defined R level If the value is set to a large number then the signal level will increase slowly back up to the pre defined R level 6699 Command will accept milliseconds or seconds User must specify with an s or ms in the command structure Command length is variable also User does not need to enter leading zeros Input number and delay number must be separated by the symbol The end of the delay number is indicated by the s or ms characters The user must specify a number for both the input and attack time If the user wants to set this value to zero then the user must specify 0 character in the attack time Command Format 1 02 XX XX 58 47 54 41 XX oues 40 STX ADR ADR X G T A IN iust XX ae teas 73 XX03 XX AT ae Sar S ETX CHK Command Format 2 02 XX XX 58 47 54 41 XX uS 40 STX ADR ADR X G T A IN a ine XX Ws 6D 73 03 XX AT z oda vs m S ETX CHK IN Input port Must be between 1 and the number of system inputs AT Attack time Value in seconds or 1 1000 seconds wait period If the user specifies ms then valid values range from 0 to 60 000 If the user specifies then valid values range from 0 to 60 Can vary from 1 to 5 characters Numbers only no characters Page 120 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Examp
136. ame change queue has overflowed NSI NSO NI NO NQ 6 Reserved 7 Reserved None Always set to 1 Page 52 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol The C command is typically sent periodically to check if any changes have been made or if any alarms have occurred There are three different crosspoint message and name change queues for each control port serial Ethernet etc Each queue will store up to eight changes made anywhere in the system Once the queue overflows the contents are no longer valid and different actions will have to be taken to recover the system state If any changes have occurred since the last Q command the crosspoint flag bit will be set Changes include a crosspoint change Access Control setting or crosspoint lock status change If eight or fewer changes have been made then all the affected crosspoints can be read from the crosspoint queue If more than eight changes occur before the queue is read and cleared the overflow flag will be set If the queue has overflowed then all crosspoints in the matrix will have to be queried The Q command clears the queue and both the crosspoint flag and the overflow flag The alarm bit indicates that an error or fault has been detected and an associated message indicating the problem has been stored in the message queue If the message queue is full a new message will cause the queue contents to be sent in an SNMP TRAP message to the set SNMP trap IP addres
137. an endpoint or channel for network communications Port numbers allow different applications on the same computer to utilize network resources without interfering with each other Port numbers most commonly appear in network programming particularly socket programming Rev K Page 41 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Qec Port Number Default Setting The default setting of the Qec port is 9100 This number was selected because it is a port number that is not widely used or registered by IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority Most applications use much lower numbers like 1000 or less Why Change the Qec Port Number In almost all cases there is not a conflict and the port number will be left at the default of 9100 In case your network happens to be using port 9100 for some reason you can change Quintech s port number to some other value to avoid communication conflicts DHCP On Off The DHCP On Off parameter allows you to enable or disable DHCP service This will cause the controller to look for a DHCP server to assign an address for network communications after boot up Pressing F1 turns DHCP on off 1 DHCP On F1 Change F4 Exit Figure 11 DHCP Should DHCP be On or Off When set to ON the IP address of the QE3 system is dynamically assigned by the DHCP server Note that the IP address assigned in this manner will override any IP address that may have been specified via the Static IP configuration screen When set
138. an one controller in the system For a detailed description of main and remote modes refer to Main vs Remote Mode To invoke the Set Control Mode screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 3 1 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 3 Features 1 Control Mode Mode Main F1 Change Figure 75 Control Mode Setup F1 toggles the mode between main to remote Set it to the proper mode and exit with F4 If you have only one controller with an LCD and keypad this setting has to be set to main Remote mode is for an additional IRU UCM controller Rev K Page 107 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Set Priority Mode Option 3 in the Features Menu invokes the Options Menu From this menu you can select to enable disable Priority Mode For a detailed description of Priority Mode refer to Priority Mode To navigate to the Priority Mode screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 3 3 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 3 Features 2 Priority Mode Priority Mode Off F1 Change F4 Exit Figure 76 Priority Mode Screen Pressing F1 toggles Priority Mode on and off Set it to the proper mode and then exit by pressing F4 Page 108 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Port Access Control Enable Disable This option is discussed in detail in the Access Control sectio
139. and 1 64 for QE systems dBTENS dBONES Page 140 of 157 Ihe dBm value that the signal is compared to Range from 10 to 50 and 99 turns monitoring off Other values will be rejected as out of range Rev CL Response Format 06 XX XX 58 57 49 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X W I ETX CHK Example Command 02 XX XX 58 52 49 31 30 STX ADR ADR X W I 1 0 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol 33 30 35 34 30 03 XxX 1 5 4 0 ETX CHK Set RF dB threshold level for XRO at address 003 input 15 to 40dBm NOTE Some firmware releases do not support this command Refer to the firmware release notes at the beginning of this document for details Rev CL Page 141 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XWIS Set RF Input Signal Warning Level Simplified RF signal monitoring is done on the XRM and QE3 system inputs This simplified version of the XWI command is input based rather than address based This warning level can be set differently for every system input Comparison of the input signal is monitored at the XRM inputs Simple for a 32x32 system If the system has XRDs user should note that when this level is set for a system input the monitoring will be done on every XRM that the XRD distributes that input to The signal is compared to this warning level and if the signal level is below this level then a message is generated and placed in the message queue and an SNMP trap will also be
140. and and log file which can be used to monitor communication activity between the control program and the QE3 This does not record scripts or script responses To view the log choose Event Log in the Tools menu Each command should have a response and a green check mark indicating SUCCESS Page 166 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Troubleshooting Quintech Technical Support We are available for your questions and to assist you Contact us through e mail or call us directly toll free Whether your system is 6 month old or 6 years old we strive to help our customers any way we can Before I contact Quintech There are several pieces of information that many times help us answer technical questions in minutes rather than hours or longer Please have with you the following information when calling Quintech or include this information in an e mail question 1 Model 2 Matrix size 3 Protocol version 4 Firmware version All this information is available at the front panel It is under the System Information Get Firmware Version menu It is also displayed when you apply power to the controller Have Information Ready If you call or write in with a technical question and you have this information available let us know Rev K Page 167 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Warranty Information If your unit may need warranty service having the following information ready makes a repair process easier and
141. ard these traps to other mediums SNMP Trap Structure Quintech SNMP traps contain additional information in a description field that indicates the location and type of condition that generated the SNMP trap and may contain additional details about the condition The location is usually indicated by an address or number pointing to the exact source of the event The type of event is usually indicated by a description in a few words about the event SNMP Trap Descriptions SNMP traps are all the same in general structure but contain different text information related to the condition Quintech SNMP traps usually indicate two types of conditions events or alarms Events SNMP traps indicating events can be turned on or off by turning on or off SNMP functionality Events are considered normal operational events and usually require no user intervention Events include but are not limited to locking an output unlocking an output changing an output and protecting an output Alarms SNMP traps indicating alarm conditions can not be turned off and are sent regardless whether SNMP is on or off Alarm traps usually indicate a condition that may require user intervention Alarms include but are not limited to power supply failure power supply or unit overheating RF board offline RF level warning auto re route and fan failure Page 12 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XRM Re route Alarm This SNMP trap indicate
142. assigned IP address The message buffer will then be emptied and the current message will be added to the now empty queue QE3 SNMP Traps The QE3 can send additional traps to indicate crosspoint changes and other system changes These traps contain information such as where the change originated and specifics about the type of change If access control is enabled the user logged in is also reported Rev K Page 33 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Front Panel Interface The front panel keypad and screen are used to set various operating parameters and to monitor and control the QE3 matrix switch Depending on the tasks being performed various sub menu screens will appear The display utilizes a refresh mechanism which redisplays the screen about every 5 seconds Main Menu The Main Menu has four choices Monitor amp Control System Options Access Control and System Information When in any other menu pressing F4 repeatedly will exit you out of a screen back to the previous screen Pressing F4 repeatedly will return you to the Main Menu There is one exception the download firmware screen can only be exited by downloading firmware or power cycling the controller This Main Menu is the top of the front panel hierarchy 1 Monitor and Control 2 System Options 3 Access Control 4 System Information Figure 5 Main Menu Page 34 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Front Panel Hierarchy and Page
143. assword 3 hots tetti rt bis eed ete bte reed eode ee Ro 40 DHCPONO suddetto d uh E M nn 42 Ethernet Address sas ie o te T et ERANT 43 Serial Termination ue ee vite eese er eee ette EES 44 Monitor 3 Conulecllolh o eiensces chos ipe se Suevia ens Fey o dx Y Ve RUP RIEN detosiacadestonets 45 Changing a Connection siscisscsdscssnsssacccstesssatsscstesseavesssseceanv ssavcsscassasseeeves 46 Locking and Unlocking Connections soesssooessoeessooecssoeessoocsesesesooeeso 48 Turning off an Output cnet na roo e In eo Uc FEX CH HAYE a DeN To Lua ed 48 System Information Menu 49 reden ro DU TM 49 Firmware VerslOli od ccscvscsiccseacccacacusudnassenascsutugudadestessoassssctaducserspedeacdices 50 QE3 System Bel cse Tc 50 Input Warning Level siscccisscscscissscccsccccazcacsceessccectssacguaspesncdsasaudsnssousscessaae 53 Set RF dBm Ware Eeyel ci eiue teu obuia Sead wae 53 BANG SP C 54 Power Supply Status sseccsssssecssssoseecsssooesesssoosessssscosessooeesessossessssossese 54 Internal Temperature eccsssssecesssoseessssocesesssoossessscosesssoseessssooeessssosssse 55 Get Inp t RE Gevelisssscscasucesccscatacceseedavstvcdesoseasndsecooust sesvesiapaovassosasscoasses 56 Get Output KE Leyel sssssssssssesssssssssssssssscsssssosssssssossossssossossssossss sssssss esos 58 Read Output RF dBm Signal Level v cise csssesccesssvonteessseschedseasndsedeceo
144. at the beginning of this document for details Rev CL Page 143 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol ZA Set Group Access for Output This command can only be executed by the Admin This command sets the privilege for a group to change an output Command structure ZA GI D gt lt access gt lt output gt GID Group ID Can be 1 8 Access Access Control 1 Output Matrix output number Allow 0 Can be 1 with 1 being Admin Deny to the size of the matrix If access is allowed for that output an L S Example Command Sent 02 XX XX SA 41 3A 32 3A 30 STX ADR ADR Z A 2 0 Deny group 2 access to output 5 3A Positive Response 06 XX XX A5 ACK ADR ADR Z 41 03 XX A ETX CHK Page 144 of 157 or U command for that output then any user in that group can issue 30 30 35 0 0 5 03 XX ETX CHK Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol ZAI Set Group Access for Input This command can only be executed by the Admin This command sets the privilege for a group to change an input Command structure ZAI lt GID gt lt access gt lt input gt GID Group ID Can be 1 8 with 1 being Admin Access Access Control 1 Allow 0 Deny Input Matrix input number Can be 1 to the size of the matrix If access is allowed for that input then any user in that group can issue an L S or U command for that
145. ave occurred An alarm has occurred Access Control changes have occurred The crosspoint queue has overflowed A name has been changed Alarm amp crosspoint changes have occurred Access control amp crosspoint changes have occurred Name amp crosspoint changes have occurred The crosspoint queue has overflowed plus an alarm Crosspoint alarm Access Control and name changes have occurred plus the crosspoint queue has overflowed Note This command will be accepted regardless of whether a user is logged in Page 54 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol ED Set DHCP On Off This command turns DHCP on or off Command Format 02 XX XX 45 44 30 03 XX STX ADR ADR E D 0 ETX CHK 02 XX XX 45 44 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR E D 1 ETX CHK Example Command 02 XX XX 45 44 30 03 XX STX ADR ADR E ETX CHK Turn DHCP Off UO Ea 02 XX XX 45 44 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR E D 1 ETX CHK Turn DHCP on Positive Response 06 XX XX 45 44 03 XX ACK ADR ADR E ETX CHK Jg Note DHCP will immediately be set as on or off If DHCP is turned on the unit will not ask for new IP parameters from the DHCP server until the unit is reset or the power is cycled Rev CL Page 55 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol EG Set Ethernet Default Gateway This command sets the static default Ethernet gateway Comma
146. basically turns off the gain control function Gain Control Manual Input 1 0 00Bm Enter or Scroll 1 F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 44 Manual Gain Control Select an input then press F1 to set up manual gain control value Input 1 0 0dBm Enter 18 to 13 5 dB F1 Enter F2 M A M Scroll 1 F4 Exit Figure 45 Set Up Manual Gain Control Here input 1 is selected Arrow up or down to set the input gain or attenuation value F4 will exit without any changes F2 will toggle the input between automatic and manual gain control modes Page 64 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Manual Gain Control Limitations Manual gain control is limited to 18dB of gain or 13dB of attenuation per input Press F2 to switch this input to automatic mode Adding too much gain to an input can cause degradation of the signal Gain compression of a signal can occur if the input signal is at a high level and the manual gain is set high as well Automatic Gain Control When operating under automatic gain control the QE3 tracks the input s and automatically applies gain or attenuation where needed to maintain the user specified RF level Automatic Gain Control can be categorized as Simple or Advanced Simple mode uses a simple timer that adjusts the input level at regular intervals whereas advanced mode utilizes multiple timers that determine how the system will react to the user RF level changes at the input s The system can be se
147. be Page 102 of 157 rejected as an invalid data range Any value than 15 5 will also be rejected as invalid data range larger Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Positive Response 06 XX XX 58 41 53 XX XX ACK ADR ADR X A S ETX CHK Example Command 02 XX XX 58 41 53 31 33 35 40 30 35 2E 35 03 XX STX ADR ADR X A 9 1 3 5 0 5 5 ETX CHK Attenuate system input 135 a total of 5 5 dB Example Command 02 XX XX 58 41 53 30 32 34 40 31 33 2E 35 03 XX STX ADR ADR X A S 0 2 4 ip 3 s 5 ETX CHK Attenuate system input 24 a total of 13 5 dB NOTE Some firmware releases do not support this command Refer to the firmware release notes at the beginning of this document for details Rev CL Page 103 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XC Check for Cards Installed This command will report any cards not installed in an XRM or QE3 unit This command applies to input bridge and output cards on the XRM This command applies to input and output cards on the QE3 XRD and QED units only report missing input cards XRO and QEO units only report missing output cards QE3 only has input and output cards No bridge cards XC command issued to a QE3 has no bridge card response only input and output card response XRM The bridge card is a special case Each bridge card has two separate addresses The addressing is as follows Bridge card 1 2 cards 1 amp 2 Bridge
148. bled the control program will open and close the Ethernet port for each command This may add substantial overhead if you are monitoring the switch The second general parameter that can be set is the Read Timeout The Read Timeout parameter identifies how long the control program will wait for a response after sending a command If you are controlling the switch over the Internet or on a heavily utilized network you may need to increase this time to ensure that the matrix response is correctly received Testing the Communications Once all of the communication parameters are set click the Test button at the bottom of the Communication Settings window The program will attempt to communicate with the matrix using the parameters as set If it is successful you will receive a pop up window displaying some of the matrix settings Click OK to close the pop up window and then click OK on the Communication Settings window to start normal operation Creating and Managing Configurations Configurations are for multiple systems Configurations only save communications parameters They are not intended to change crosspoints To write one or more crosspoints at a time refer to scripts Once the communications parameters are set up and a connection is made to the switch the user can save those communications settings in a configuration file Multiple configurations can be used to connect to several different systems without having to reset all communicat
149. card 2 2 cards 3 amp 4 Bridge card 3 2 cards 5 amp 6 Bridge card 4 cards 7 amp 8 It is possible in a fault condition for only half of a bridge card to respond to a check command If for example no response is read from bridge card 3 then half of the second bridge card is not responding and will be reported as not installed Command Format 02 XX XX 58 46 XX XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X c MSADR ADR ADR ADR ETX CHK MSADR Most significant digit of the address This determines what type of unit will respond in a system MSADR 0 XRM MSADR 1 XRO MSADR 2 XRD MSADR 3 QED MSADR 4 QE3 MSADR 5 QEO ADR Address of individual box in a system This is the two dials on the control board on the right on an XRM system or the bottom two dials on a QE3 system The control board address is in Hex format Note the dials go from 0 to F This address must be converted to decimal format to use this command correctly Page 104 of 157 Rev CL EXAMPLE Q XXE right Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 43 34 30 STX ADR ADR X C 4 0 Report Cards installed on Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 43 30 30 STX ADR ADR X C 0 0 Report Cards installed on XRD Response Format 06 XX XX 58 43 ACK ADR ADR X C 3 XX ETX CHK XRO Response Format 06 XX XX 58 43 ACK ADR ADR X C B XX ETX CHK XRM Response Format 06 XX XX 58 43 ACK ADR ADR X C
150. cards that are installed and their position s within the QE3 chassis INPUTS 33 64 INPUTS 1 32 INPUTS 1 32 lt Ai 3 o Qo Q A P I2lvoli a kd paad e A E H kea e A aa E ololol o HIHETTE za 3E Hamm z z z z INPUTS 9 16 INPUTS 25 32 INPUTS 17 24 INPUTS 1 8 OUTPUTS 17 32 INPUTS 33 64 OUTPUTS 33 48 INPUTS 33 64 OUTPUTS 1 16 OUTPUTS 17 32 NPUTS 1 32 OUTPUTS 49 64 INPUTS 1 32 OUTPUTS 1 16 OUTPUTS 49 64 OUTPUTS 33 48 CONTROLLER B QE3 MEMORY lt x oO ul Q c i o Oo 1 2 3 4 5 8 T S 10 WW 19 Th 18 16 17 18 19 205 21 Figure 2 QE3 Architecture Front View Typically a QE3 contains 8 Output cards 8 Input cards 2 Hot swappable power supply modules QE3 memory card 1 Display card installed only in QE3s containing integrated controllers 2 Hot swappable controller cards Power supply on off card Page 14 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Input and Output Cards A bank of eight output cards are located between two banks of four input cards Input and output cards are not interchangeable They can only be installed in their respective slots At least one input card and one output card must be installed Input and Output Card LEDs Each input card and output card contains two LEDs On both input and output cards the top LED indicates that the card is powered On an output card the bottom LED indicates that at least one route has been e
151. ch and we can help you with your growing communication needs System Sizes The number of modules and size of your system depends on the amount of inputs and outputs that are originally designed into your system A small switching matrix may consist of one module with everything integrated into that module while a large switching matrix may contain several modules all working together to achieve configurable and effortless RF signal switching Modules We refer to the main building blocks of a matrix system as modules Every QE3 switching system is made up of one or more modules A module refers to an enclosed unit that is mounted on the rack as part of the entire system Your system is simply one or more modules connected communicating and working together All modules have a unique function and all have their own power supplies The LEDs on the front panel of the modules indicate the status of the power supplies Module Inter Connections Modules talk to each other through XR Bus cables connected to XR Bus ports on the rear panels of the modules These connections are made when the system is set up and in most cases never needs to be changed However there are a few exceptions such as changing serial port control or upgrading the system These specific situations are covered later in the manual The RF signals that are being switched are also connected to the rear of the modules The RF connections between the modules are determi
152. col Field Update Control Board Notes Capability QE3 9 01 3 05 09 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1624 A QE3 Firmware 9 03 3 18 09 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 QE3 changed to single processor with shared memory for main and backup processor 9 04 3 18 09 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Added additional boot up screen information 9 05 3 21 09 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Changed boot procedure for enhanced hardware boot 9 06 6 17 09 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Added support for SRM QE3 systems 9 07 7 8 09 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Added leading zeros to F command System size 9 08 10 6 09 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 DOES NOT REPLACE 907 Released to support 1 system A 128x64 with 2 QE3s and 2 XROs Removed all front panel system options except firmware and RF warning levels 908 does not support any XG subset XRI or XRO 9 09 12 09 09 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Setup XRD XRO for QE3 systems 9 10 12 22 09 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Adds QED on off switch 9 11 12 22 09 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Fixes input 100 boot up error 9 12 05 06 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Add 1RU remotes Protection and priority modes Add LC SP SU SC PM ZG 9 13 05 12 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Fix 1RU remotes Protection and priority modes shared with remotes SNMP traps corrected 9 14 05 12 10 2 15 09 Serial Ethernet 1665 Fix remote screens Fix XGA XGM commands Add front
153. col command to read and write a name allows the user to assign all the available characters on a standard keyboard These usable characters are in the ASCII range of 20Hex up to 126Hex Rev K Page 135 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Default Names Option 3 in the I O names menu will reset all names back to factory default The default names for inputs and outputs is 7 characters containing the word in or out then spaces and then the number of the input or output Default names are always 7 characters Le input default name in 1 input 15 default name in 15 input 3 default name out 3 input 23 default name out 23 Page 136 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Access Control Quintech systems can limit a person s access to the system in several ways Our mechanism is the factory code that is required to gain access to the configuration menu the second is a lockable keypad and the third is the enabling of access control and creation of user accounts to assign permissions Access control on a Quintech matrix allows a matrix system to be partitioned between multiple users or groups It also prevents the accidental changing of a cross point by an unauthorized user The access control features described in this section are available on Quintech matrix controllers that are executing protocol 2 15 releases 6 and later This corresponds to all QE3 firmware releases The access control o
154. command is sent with the username and password The user ID and group ID are returned in response to a successful login Example Command Sent 02 XX XX SA 49 3A 41 64 6d 69 6E 3A 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR Z K A d m i n 1 ETX CHK Example Response 06 XX XX 5A 49 3A 31 3A 31 03 XX ACK ADR ADR Z ji ETX CHK User 1 group 1 Rev CL Page 149 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol ZL List user by User ID UID This command can only be executed by the Admin This command shows the current group ID username and password for a given user ID UID Command ZL lt UID gt Response structure ZL lt GID gt lt username gt lt password gt Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 5A 4C 3A 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR Z L 1 ETX CHK Example Response 06 XX XX 5A 4C 3A 31 3A 41 64 6d 69 6E 3A 31 03 XX ACK ADR ADR Z L E 1 s A d m i n 1 ETX CHK User ID 1 is in group 1 has a username of Admin and password 1 Page 150 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol ZO Logoff System This command will logoff the current user Example Command Sent 02 XX XX SA 4F O03 XX STX ADR ADR Z O ETX CHK Positive Response 06 XX XX A5 4F O03 XX ACK ADR ADR Z O ETX CHK Rev CL Page 151 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol ZP Set User Password This command can only be executed by the Admin This command sets a n
155. commands defined in Protocol 2 15 B C Bo wo zm 2 mw un Backup Various commands to set up the QRM QE3 XRM Q Sense feature Check Change Flag Unit Status Contains system change flags that indicate whether crosspoints messages names or access control settings have changed Ethernet Various commands to set Ethernet parameters and control access Firmware version Identifies the model protocol and firmware version and size of the matrix as set on the controller Input Command to read the access control setting of an input Keypad Various commands to control access to the front panel keypad Lock a crosspoint Messages Retrieve message log Name Commands to manage naming of inputs outputs and other parameters Output query Various commands to get information on the specified output Protected Mode command Crosspoint queue Reset Soft reset equivalent to a reboot or a hard reset back to factory defaults Set a crosspoint Connect an input to an output Protect and unprotect outputs Unlock a crosspoint XRM QE3 and QRM commands Various commands to support the XRM QE3 QRM advanced feature set Access Control Various commands to support control access and manage accounts Other commands are reserved for future use Page 2 of 157 Rev CL Command Availability XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol The table gives the availability of various commands for different protocol releases C
156. communications setups with Quintech systems This section was written to eliminate confusion about the Quintech RS 485 communications specifically termination This section discusses the major points of RS 485 communications including specific details such as signaling cabling pinout and termination settings RS 485 Basics In order to discuss RS 485 let s review the basics of RS 232 for comparison RS 232 in simplest terms is a three wire interface one transmit one receive and one common ground This is called an unbalanced signal It s a simple protocol but because signaling is in reference to a common ground the speed and cable lengths are severely limited RS 232 is typically only a few feet and usually limited to less than 20 000 bits per second Rather slow for today s standards Balanced vs Unbalanced The RS 485 standard uses balanced differential signals In balanced signaling there are two lines One signal carries the true signal and the other carries the same signal except that it is 180 degrees out of phase The receiver then reads the difference between the two signals A ground wire exists but it has nothing to do with how the receiver determines the logic level of the signal Rev K Page 71 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Balanced Line Interface Line A Tranmitter Receiver Figure 49 Balanced Line Interface Voltages and Signaling A pair of wires is used to carry each signal The data is encoded and
157. creen Admin Input 1 Allow F1 Change F2 Out In Figure 123 Set Input Access Page 150 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Pressing F2 will toggle between output and input access control If access control is turned on for a port the user must log in The user must also be assigned Allow permission for an output in order to change the output With input access control the user logged in must have Allow permission for an output and an input in order to make a cross point change EXAMPLE If a user has Allow permission for all the outputs but Deny for all inputs the user can not make any cross point changes The user needs Allow permission for the output and the input before a cross point change can be made EXAMPLE A user is given Allow permission to change all outputs and Allow permission for input 1 and 2 The user can log in and change any output but can only connect the outputs to input 1 or 2 The access to control a particular output or input is set individually for each group That allows flexible partitioning of access to the matrix outputs For example you could set the following group access Group 1 outputs 1 2 3 4 Group 2 outputs 5 6 7 8 Group 3 outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Group 4 outputs 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Group 5 outputs 9 1 1 12 16 and so on 0 1 Determining Group Access The current output access settings for a group can be found in two way
158. cy so that if one power supply fails the module continues to operate properly For DC redundancy both AC inlets must be activated For true AC redundancy separate AC sources must be applied The power supplies are internally separate As such a module can be powered from two different voltage sources operating at two different voltages as long as the voltage and frequency of the source is within proper tolerances See Voltages LNB Power Supplies Note that the main power supplies DO NOT supply LNB power Separate LNB power supplies are available for purchase from Quintech RPS series of products AC Connections AC power cords are not included with your system when shipped They must be purchased separately either from Quintech or from another supplier If you decide to use an AC power cord that has not been supplied by Quintech make sure that it has a grounding plug Grounded power cords are preferred because they help isolate AC noise from the RF signals Quintech power cords are 18 AWG gauge which is the minimum size recommended for QE3 operation Rev K Page 21 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Voltages The internal power supplies used in Quintech matrix switching systems are auto ranging This means that an acceptable range AC source can be connected to the unit and it will automatically accommodate the new source voltage QE3 power supplies can operate from 90 VAC to 264 VAC at 47 Hz to 63 Hz All modules hav
159. d eMe C 163 Writing Data to the QE3 6 ocx eco ieee wea Reisen tuti nues 164 Reading Data from the B3 qp isti cen ti ettet ood seth suaetaed vhesstarsoctens 164 Script Naming Extension 2e eerie RD I IU REESE e STANT SUA LUNES IA RR EEEa 164 POU SOBIDIS euin oc ande babs wate esi R ce tUe cube bum 164 Command SS CIC CUE eienen Mox tute datenblatt deat ap sator R dbia eere 165 Scripts Examples ree eer STAR TE Ee UXVE STAT SER YS eA SAR NE ERR E e uad 165 Paed Commdaadsus ndisse atico dest ies tiset eu bat etu n ise doutes 165 IAE A p 166 Troubleshooting eee LOZ Quintech Technical Support acies ese etntsaev en cha eee o ot ua paca nean a rad aeree Ina 167 Betore I contact Quintechi uoo E oT sette calidus Duc Ua vdd 167 Have Information Ready eese duet an eei eee wie bccn pet ua dide p aquis 167 Warranty Information occ to eh lea ud a debe eoi ded 168 Problems and SOWMMOMS ois ssccsccssccecsssiacesssessccccendenssscnacdececscencssscscecaacances 168 x Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Table 1 QE3 Switching System Module e eee eren ee eese eren seen se ena se tnu 10 Figure 1 Front Panel of QE3 w Integrated Controller ceres 13 Figure 2 QE3 Architecture Front View 4 crees eee ee eee e eese eren seen setas tona seno 14 Table 2 Serial Quintech UCM Pin Definition
160. d input By default when an input is set to auto mode the manual gain control settings are turned off An input can be set to automatic or manual gain control not both at the same time This command has 2 formats Both commands turn on the automatic gain control for the input One sets the input to the previous auto dB value stored in memory The other sets the value to the dB value given in the command Valid values for auto gain control are between 10dBm and 60dBm in 5dB intervals EXAMPLE 10 5 is valid 10 0 is valid 60 5 is not valid Tenths values if entered incorrectly will be set to 0 or 5 depending on the input value Input 5 or higher set to 5 A or lower will be set to 0 The values are variable in length Leading zeros are not necessary The values must be separated by the symbols and the tenth value must be separated by the period symbol Command Format 1 02 XX XX 58 47 41 XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X G A IN xo ETX CHK Command Format 2 02 XX XX 58 47 41 XX So uu ds 40 2D ee 2E STX ADR ADR X G A IN o XX 03 XX tenths ETX CHK IN Input port Must be between 1 and the number of system inputs Up to 4 characters accepted TENS ONES Value in dB from 10 to 60 Any value larger than 10 or smaller than 60dB will be rejected as invalid data range TENTHS Rounded down to 0 or 5 Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 46 41 31 38 40 2D 32 STX ADR ADR X G A 1 8 ES
161. d output PORT Physical connection 0 Local Keypad LCD 1 Remote Port B 2 Control In Port C 3 Ethernet Port A 4 Ethernet Port B 5 Telnet Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 53 55 30 30 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR S U O0 0 1 ETX CHK Unprotect output 1 Positive Response 06 XX XX 53 55 03 XX ACK ADR ADR S U ETX CHK Rev CL Page 97 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol U Unlock Crosspoint This command will unlock a locked crosspoint Command Sent 02 XX XX 55 30 30 31 30 30 35 03 Xxx STX ADR ADR U 0 0 1 0 0 5 ETX CHK Unlock output 1 to input 5 Positive Response 06 XX XX 55 03 XX ACK ADR ADR U ETX CHK Page 98 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Alternate U Unlock Crosspoint This command will unlock a locked crosspoint without having to specify the input it is currently locked Command Sent 02 XX XX 55 30 30 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR U 0 0 il ETX CHK Unlock output 1 Positive Response 06 XX XX 55 03 XX ACK ADR ADR U ETX CHK Rev CL Page 99 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XA Attenuate Input This command will attenuate an input of a XRD or XRM unit in a XRM system The attenuation of an input is in O 5dB steps from 0 0 dB attenuation up to a maximum of 15 5dB of attenuation Check your user s manual to see if this feature is available on your system For QE3 systems refer to X
162. de is on and the output was protected by the Remote in port from unit address FD Positive Response 06 XX XX 53 43 31 35 33 38 03 XX ACK ADR ADR S C 1 5 3 8 ETX CHK Output protected mode is on and the output was protected by the Telnet port from unit address 38 Page 94 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol SP Set Protect Mode This command will connect the output and input and turn protected mode on for the specified output Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 53 50 30 30 31 30 30 32 03 XX STX ADR ADR S P 0 0 1 0 0 2 ETX CHK Connect output 1 to input 2 and turn protected mode on for output 1 Positive Response 06 XX XX 53 50 03 XX ACK ADR ADR S P ETX CHK Rev CL Page 95 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Alternate SP Set Protect Mode This command will turn protected mode on for the specified output Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 53 50 30 30 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR S P O 0 1 ETX CHK turn protected mode on for output 1 Positive Response 06 XX XX 53 50 03 XX ACK ADR ADR S P ETX CHK Page 96 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol SU Set Unprotect Mode This command will clear the protected mode status of the specified output NOTE This command is only successful if the SU command for the specified output is sent from the same port the original SP command was sent from to protect the specifie
163. do need to be made to the system the code to get into the configuration menu is 732 This is not a security password That is what access control is for This number is to remind the user that they are entering into a critical area of the menu hierarchy If these values are improperly changed the system will cease to operate To get past the password screen simply enter the key sequence 7 3 2 F1 That will load the Configuration Menu screen 1 System Setup 2 Load Firmware 3 Features F4 Exit Figure 58 Configuration Menu The options under the Configuration Menu are where all critical system settings can be modified Rev K Page 89 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System System Setup Menu Option 1 in the Configuration Menu displays the System Setup Menu The system configuration defines the number of matrix inputs and outputs the model number and the number of module inputs and outputs The configuration settings are set at the factory and should not be changed unless the system has been expanded with additional modules Altering the configuration improperly will prevent the matrix from operating correctly We included these features to make Quintech factory upgrades quick and easy to implement To navigate to the System Setup Menu screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 1 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 1 System Setup 1 Matrix Size
164. ds controller cards and a common backplane Electrical branching elements such as solid state switches splitters combiners and couplers allow the connection of any input to each output All of these components are arranged to form connecting paths between the inputs and each of the outputs on each card They are designed such that each path has an equal number of electrical branching elements and a substantially equal total length of electrical paths This assures that insertion loss and the impedance are nominally the same over each of the switching paths through the matrix and eliminates most of the internal connectors or interface cables between switching modules Unity Gain The system is designed to optimize gain flatness over the entire operating band by passing the signal at the same level and flatness through any path The excellent RF performance of these switching matrices is achieved through proprietary technology developed by Quintech U S Patents 4 935 709 and 5 481 073 No matter how many inputs or output you may have and how you have your cross points configured the system retains good impedance match and unity gain throughout the entire system Page 8 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System System Upgrades You can upgrade your system to increase the number of inputs and outputs available you A QE3Matrix Switch can be configured in a wide variety of I O combinations ranging from 8x16 up to 1024x1024 Contact us at Quinte
165. e 2 1 factory settings code number F1 1 3 2 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 1 System Setup 3 Module Sizes 3 QE3 XRM SRM 1 SRM On Off 2 SRM Size 3 XRM On OFF 4 XRM Size F4 Exit Figure 65 QE3 XRM SRM Systems QE3 SRM Setup Selecting Option 1 from the QE3 XRM SRM Systems screen displays the QE3 SRM System screen through which you can specify whether any SRM units are being used in combination with the QE3 system Press F1 to toggle between yes and no Press F4 to exit Page 96 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System System has SRMs No F1 Change F4 Exit Figure 66 QE3 SRM System Selecting Option 2 from the QE3 XRM SRM Systems screen sets up the original size of the SRM system Since the QE3 system is being added to an original SRM systems the QE3 operating system needs to know which inputs and outputs are SRM and which are QE3 This screen sets up the SRM inputs and outputs Enter the original SRM system size of SRM Inputs 0 of SRM Outputs 0 F1 Enter F4 Exit Figure 67 QE3 SRM Setup QE3 XRM Setup Selecting Option 3 from the QE3 XRM SRM Systems screen displays the QE3 XRM System screen through which you can specify whether any XRM units are being used in combination with the QE3 system Press F1 to toggle between yes and no Press F4 to exit Rev K Page 97 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System System has XRMs No F1 Change F4
166. e 72 Download FirMmWare e ssessorseessesooesoesoeseoesoesoeseoesoesoeseoesoessessossoossessossoosse 100 Figur 73 Features MGI i255 occcvissecesceseiscxcsssadecsutesdsnensseceatovaiecxouedutesedbeniavoupbedccnnsadens 106 Figure 74 Control Mode Setup i2 iret dorsi eu itas be tato aeter tala aso ra cen Ed rosa da saovecuspiebess 107 Figure 75 Priority Mode Screen e ire rt estar terna eo Resto clas Lo Tees na ein R a E Rua Lek 108 Figure 76 Options Menus ueonioo enr eaa e PRA Pr EI stir M oc sx EE hi te vare RE 110 Figure 77 SNMP IMG snc cacacevataescscgssegasescouspnosstsns ul arva SE Pac Seba pee Pe eere bee voe Pee is 111 Ligure 78 SNMP On Oll 4 niit me prre bidon ter PHP U Prts seeib a din a o eau Aden 112 Figure 79 Set SNMP Trap IP inei ccsttenecesuetncantestalecisstercashteiensuastndsesatbelectnstes 113 Figure 80 Select IP ess i esee theta cri bnb ren tle trao obey e oan Dens na a NER RENS ap CE Ne PeE 113 Figure 81 QE3 Setup c Q 114 Figure 52 Enable Er OV sucssssisicasssccsecssoswessvnastuevedeeinis cons tucoushceussacacsesseyeeseevasctenases saves 114 Figure 83 OEO Attenuation ouo eei conne tra cett teet ou bin ob sete cassancseoteavensevsctaccssneenes 115 Figure 84 Set QEO Input Attenuation 4 eres e eee entes eene ennt nett n etin s tensa sain 116 Figure 85 Q SENSE Setup SCEGeIL sessc ccessscedssscascssencosvecevsosivsicesonsencesvicosnnadsstndensdvencen 1
167. e ELE command command packets input from the QEC Ethernet port are received but ignored except for the ELD command This provides an additional level of control over the switch and the Ethernet port The ELD command is used to disable the lock and enable the processing of command packets The ELD command must contain a password value that matches the current password in order for the Ethernet lock to be disabled The default value for the password is Quintech The value of the password can be changed using the ELP command Command Format 02 XX XX 45 4C 44 XX XX 03 75 STX ADR ADR E L D PASSWORD ETX CHK Example Command 02 46 46 45 4C 44 51 75 69 6E 74 65 03 68 03 75 STX F F E L D Q u i n Du e G h ETX CHK Disable Ethernet Command Lock Positive Response 06 46 46 45 4C 03 OC ACK F E E L ETX CHK Note The password may be reset to the default Quintech from the front panel LCD and keypad An ELD command with an incorrect password value will return a NAK response The switch is shipped from the factory with the Ethernet lock disabled so it will accept and process command packets If the ELE command is never issued the Ethernet lock will never be enabled and the ELD ELE and ELP commands can be ignored This command has been superceded by the access control features available with Protocol 2 15 release 6 It is included for backward compatibility Page 58 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM
168. e accepted regardless of whether a user is logged in Page 68 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol KU Keypad Unlock This command unlocks the front panel keypad The front panel keypad can be locked as a convenience feature to prevent accidental keystrokes Use the KL command to lock the keypad Command Sent 02 XX XX 4B 55 03 XX STX ADR ADR K U ETX CHK Positive Response 06 XX XX 4B 55 03 XX ACK ADR ADR K U ETX CHK Note The front panel will display Keypad Locked The keypad can be unlocked from the front panel by entering the 3 digit password 857 Note To secure against unauthorized changes from the front panel keypad use Access Control features See the user s manual and the Z commands for more information Rev CL Page 69 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol L Lock Crosspoint This command sets a crosspoint and then locks it so that output may not be rerouted to any other input until it is unlocked using the U command Command Sent 02 XX XX 4C 30 30 31 30 30 35 03 XX STX ADR ADR L 0 0 1 0 0 5 ETX CHK Lock output 1 to input 5 Positive Response 06 XX XX 4C 03 XX ACK ADR ADR L ETX CHK Page 70 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Alternate L Lock Crosspoint This command locks the output to the currently connected input so that output may not be rerouted to any other input until it is unlocked Comma
169. e controllers between the first and last unit in the chain do not need to have termination resistors Receiver Transmitter Termination RS 485 termination is required to eliminate signal reflection as discussed earlier There is a twisted pair for sending data from the controller to the slaves and there is another twisted pair for the slaves to transmit to the master Therefore in a four wire RS 485 bus you only need to terminate the receivers Quintech RS 485 termination is only applied to the internal receivers and not the transmitters Biasing Resistors When an RS 485 network is in an idle state all nodes are in the receive mode and the transmitters are tri stated When this happens the state of the line is undefined Bias resistors are nothing more than a pull up resistor on line B and pull down resistor on line A to guarantee logic high when the bus is idle When RS 485 termination is turned on these two resistors and the termination resistor are connected to the RS 485 receiver Page 74 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Which ports are RS 485 The Remote ports are dedicated identical and connected RS 485 ports They can be used for control of remote controller units or as another input port to control the system The Control In port is RS 485 only if the mode is set to RS 485 The Control Out port is a dedicated Quintech communications port used only for Quintech equipment The remote and the Control In buses are two se
170. e fields will be returned as follows Firmware version Protocol version Model Number Matrix Size For example a 32x64 SRM would give a response of the form Fv2 69 Pv2 15 XRM2250 032X032 Command Format 02 XX XX 46 STX ADR ADR F 03 XX ETX CHK Example Command 02 46 46 46 03 47 STX F F F ETX CHK Positive Response 06 XX XX 46 76 37 2E 30 30 20 ACK ADR ADR F V 7 x 0 0 woo 52 Ap 32 32 35 30 2FE 30 33 X R M 2 2 5 0 0 3 50 H6 32 2E SL 39 20 33 382 3 XX 2 X 0 3 2 ETX CHK Note This command will be accepted regardless of whether a user is logged in Rev CL Page 63 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol FX Extended Firmware Version Unit ID This command will return a more detailed version of the information returned by the F command Response structure FX lt FV gt lt PV gt lt M gt lt l gt lt O gt lt RES gt lt RES gt lt RES gt lt RES gt FV A four digit firmware number in the format n nn PV An eight digit protocol number in the format nn nn nn M A seven digit alphanumeric model number IH Number of inputs 1 to 3 digits Of Number of outputs to 3 digits RES A reserved field for future expansion Command Format 02 XX XX 46 58 03 XX STX ADR ADR F X ETX CHK Example Command 02 46 46 46 03 47 STX F F F ETX CHK Positive Response 06 XX XX 46 58 3A 37 2E 30 30 3A 32 2E 31 35 2E
171. e matrix configuration Serial Port Problems The controller will not respond to protocol commands on the Control In or PC Control serial port 1 Make sure that you are NOT using a null modem cable or null modem adapter Use a straight through 1 to 1 pin cable 2 If using RS 232 check that the serial cable from the computer is connected to the Control In DB 9 connector port on the back panel Not the Control Out or a Remote port 3 Make sure that the address in the commands being sent matches the serial address set for the controller 4 Make sure that the COM port you are using on the computer matches the COM port the matrix control software is set at 5 Check that the serial interface mode RS 232 or RS 485 422 1s correct 6 If using RS 422 485 make sure the termination settings are correct 7 Make sure the data protocol is 8 bit 1 stop bit no parity and 9600bps Page 172 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Ethernet Problems The QE3 unit will not 1 Make sure that another Telnet session is not currently connect using Telnet open Only one Telnet session at a time is allowed 2 Make sure you are trying with the correct IP address Controller won t accept any Check that SNMP is enabled Refer to SNMP SNMP protocol commands I can t change anything in Turn off DHCP When DHCP is on the IP configuration the IP configuration displays the DHCP configuration assigned t
172. e one LED per power supply on the front panel to indicate the status of the power supply This allows you to detect any partial failures and service them to prevent a system failure If any of the LED s are extinguished and the power switch is on consult the troubleshooting guide immediately QE3 power supplies can be polled for their conditionwhich enables the QE3 modules to continually monitor their own power supplies RF Signals RF Connections Inter Module Each system is interconnected differently Your system requirements determine which modules are required Your system requirements also dictate how those modules should be interconnected to get the desired number of inputs and outputs The order and location of modules within the rack s have been predetermined and tested Refer to Appendix A and B for details on your system s RF interconnections wiring Although all systems are connected differently there are some traits that are common to all RF inter module connections RF cables don t hold up well to repeated stress Don t bend or stress the connectors and don t bend pull or stress the RF cables after installation If a module has to be removed for any reason disconnect all connectors from the unit prior to removal The replacement module must be installed in the same position as the one that was removed RF connections between the modules should remain constant Changes should only occur if a system change or upgrade is purc
173. e set matrix size Alternately if the controller is set larger it will show matrix crosspoints that are not physically available The option to change or lock unlock a cross point is only available on some outputs You are logged in as a user with assigned permissions The Admin has assigned permissions to your account Your account allows you to change only those outputs the Admin gave your account permission to change The signal is passing at a low level Using appropriate equipment check the signal level If it is below specifications contact the factory The monitor and control menu lists the wrong number of inputs and or outputs for my system Someone incorrectly changed settings under the configuration menu Refer to Factory Configuration Settings and contact Quintech for technical assistance Rev K Page 171 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Only some of the cross points will switch Make sure that no one has modified the factory settings for the matrix configuration For example if the QE3 size has been erroneously set to 1x1 then only output 1 can be controlled You can tell if the number of outputs is correctly set by going to the Monitor amp Control Screen and scrolling through the outputs Likewise you can check the set number of inputs by going to the Change Connection screen and scrolling through the available inputs Contact Quintech if the settings do not match th
174. eason FF should not normally be used as a unit address Reset Password The Reset Password parameter enables you to reset the QEC port access password to the Quintech specified default Press F4 to exit or Fl to reset the password to Quintech Resert Password to Quintech F1 Enter F4 Exit Figure 9 Reset Password Page 40 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Why Reset the Password The password can be set with the ELP command from a communication port on the controller You can find more information about this in the Quintech protocol document found in Appendix D The ELP command allows you to use almost any ASCII hex values to set the password You can even use ASCII hex values that are not found on a standard keyboard If the password is accidentally programmed with a Hex value that can t be typed in from a keyboard then the password needs to be reset The default value when reset is Quintech Set QEC Port The Set Qec Port parameter allows you to configure the port number for QEC port access Contact your network administrator for the correct values to use for this parameter Use the scroll keys to scroll the port number up or down until the desired port is displayed or explicitly type in the port number Press F4 to exit or F1 to change the port number Current Port 9100 New Port 1 9100 F1 Enter F4 Exit Figure 10 Ethernet Port What is a Qec Port Number A port number represents
175. ed into a QE3 unit The main controller is the interface where system commands are accepted and sent to the system It is the module that controls the system Every QE3 system can also be upgraded to include extra 1RU controllers called remotes Any system can be upgraded to include as many as 31 remote controllers Differences between Main and Remotes The primary difference that exists between main and remote controllers is the way in which internal communication occurs between them Once remotes are connected properly and are communicating with the main controller there is no visible difference between a remote controller and the main controller Both accept commands and control the system in the same way To the user the remote will appear the same as the main controller except for the serial address and the control mode setting The main and remote controllers are connected together via the Quintech UCM ports and remote ports on the 1 RU controllers Since they communicate using RS 485 a remote controller can be located up to 4000 feet away from the main system This provides additional control of the QE3 system Since you can now locate additional remotes in another room or even in another building Control Mode Up to 32 Quintech controllers may be connected together The first controller that is connected to the system must be designated as the main controller while all the others up to 31 function in remote mode Rev K Pa
176. eed reports the RPM of all fans in a module Press F1 to get the fan speeds Fan Speed in RPM 1 2750 2 2850 3 2800 4 2825 5 2875 F4 Exit Figure 28 Get Fan Speed Screen Power Supply Status Power Supply Status reads information available from the power supplies Press F1 to retrieve the power supply status The power supplies status reports back the current voltage temperature and any fault condition found P1 V 24 I 1 7 T 89 P2 V 241 0 2 T 89 PS1 No fault PS2 No Fault F4 Exit Figure 29 Power Supplies Status Don t be concerned with the numbers This is mainly for factory diagnostics If the third and fourth lines state no fault the power supplies are operating within specifications Any problem found will be printed on the third and fourth lines of the screen Page 54 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Internal Temperature Internal Temperature reads the temperature on the control board This is an ambient temperature read and has no status associated with it If there is an extreme difference between the room temperature and the internal temperature check the rear fans power supply tray fans and check the front panel filter for dust build up Internal Temperature 38C or 100F F4 Exit Figure 30 Internal Temperature Rev K Page 55 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Get Input RF Level Get Input RF Level reports the total input power of a specified input Get Input RF L
177. er 32 3 n seis 42 Differences Between Main and Remotes E E A EE EE EAA 79 Disabling DHCP s 42 Display Control Mode Screen 80 Display Control Mode Init Remotes MU S ostende 82 Distribution Module XRD Module Rear Panel 13 QE3 Matrix Switching System Dynamically Assigned IP Address 42 Eliminating Signal Reflection 74 Enable Disable SNMP Protocol 111 112 Enable DHCP v eiecit 42 Enter Attenuation Value Screen 89 Ethernet Ethernet Address 43 Ethernet Address Screen 43 Ethernet Cable Pinout 32 Ethernet Command Protocol 32 Ethernet Connections 32 Ethernet Port sess 32 TEPI Pisce eres citet eei es 32 TCP IP Serial Address 32 Ethernet Address ssss 43 Ethernet Address Screen 43 Ethernet Cable Pinout 32 Ethernet Command Protocol 32 Ethernet Configuration Ethernet Address 43 Ethernet Address Screen 43 IP Configuration with DHCP Off 43 IP Configuration with DHCP On 43 TEPIP abe ar teles 32 Ethernet Connections 32 Ethernet Download Method 104 Ethernet Port ooo dp ERA E 32 Ethernet Problems 174 Ethernet vs
178. erature 0 Good 1 Fault NUMA Over temperature shutdown 0 Good 1 Fault NUM5 Fan failure 0 Good 1 Fault Example Command 02 XX XX 58 50 54 31 33 30 30 37 03 XX STX ADR ADR X P S 1 3 0 0 7 ETX CHK Check status bits of power supply 1 on QED unit at address 7 Example Response 06 XX XX 58 50 54 30 31 30 30 30 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X P S 0 HE 0 0 0 ETX CHK Power supply reports DC output failure In the event that the power supply is not plugged in all bits will return a fault condition Rev CL Page 131 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XPT QE3 Check Power Supply Temperature This command will report the internal temperature of the power Command Format supply in a QE3 system 02 XX XX 5850 54 XX XX XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X P T NUM MSADR ADR ADR ADR ETX CHK NUM Power supply number or 2 MSDXADR Most significant digit of the QE3 address This determines what type of unit will respond in an QE3 system MSADR 4 QE3 unit ADR Address of individual box in a QE3 system Must be between 000 and 255 Response Format 06 XX XX 58 50 54 XX XX 43 20 6F 72 XX ACK ADR ADR X P T 10s 1s C 1 3 O r 10s XX 46 ETX CHK Is F 03 XX Example Command 02 XX XX 98 50 54 31 33 30 30 37 03 XX STX ADR ADR X P T 1 3 0 0 7 ETX CHK Check temperature of power supply 1 on QE Example Response 06 XX XX 58 50 ACK
179. ere is no need to change this unless it conflicts with another network device Command Format 02 XX XX 45 50 STX ADR ADR E P Example Command 02 46 46 45 50 STX F F E P Set Port 9100 Positive Response 06 46 46 45 50 XX XX XX XX 03 XX nn nn nn nn ETX CHK 39 31 30 30 03 1C 9 1 0 O ETX CHK 03 10 ETX CHK ACK F F E BE Note The change will take place after the current Ethernet session ends and the connection is released Rev CL Page 61 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol ES Set Ethernet Subnet Mask This command sets the static Ethernet Subnet Mask Command Format 02 XX XX 45 53 XX XX XX 2E XX XX XX 2E STX ADR ADR E S nn nn nn nn nn nn XX XX XX 2E XX XX XX 03 XX nn nn nn nn nn nn ETX CHK Example Command 02 46 46 45 53 32 35 35 2E 32 35 35 2E STX F F E S 2 5 5 3 2 5 5 32 35 35 2E 30 20 390 09 lt 3B 2 5 5 0 0 0 ETX CHK Set Netmask 255 255 255 000 Positive Response 06 46 46 45 53 03 13 ACK F F E S ETX CHK Note The change will take place after the current Ethernet session ends and the connection is released If DHCP is enabled this will not take effect until DHCP is turned off Page 62 of 157 Rev CL F Firmware Version Unit ID XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol This command will return a message with the protocol and firmware versions the series and model number and the size of the matrix Th
180. ers Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 42 4f 52 3031 36 03 XX STX ADR ADR B O R 0 1 6 ETX CHK Get Q Sense on off status for system input 16 Response Format 06 XX XX 42 4f 52 XX XX XX XX 03 XX ACK ADR ADRB O R N3 IN2 IN1 ON OFF ETX CHK QE3 Response Format 06 XX XX 42 4f 52 XX 03 XX ACK ADR ADR B O R ON OFF ETX CHK Example Response Sent 06 XX XX 42 4f 52 30 313630 03 XX ACK ADR ADR B O R 0 1 6 0 ETX CHK Q Sense is disabled for input 16 QE3 Example Response Sent 06 XX XX 42 4f 52 30 03 Xxx ACK ADR ADR B O R 0 ETX CHK Q Sense is disabled for polled input Rev CL Page 47 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol BR Restore Input Currently in Q Sense This command will attempt to restore the specified input if it is currently in Q Sense backup mode Note a successful ACK does not indicate whether the restore operation on the input was successful or not It simply indicates that the command was accepted and the restore is being attempted Command Format 02 XX XX 42 52 XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR B R IN3 IN2 IN 1 ETX CHK IN Primary Input to read status Must be between 001 and the number of system outputs Always 3 characters Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 42 52 30 31 36 03 XX STX ADR ADR B R 0 1 6 ETX CHK Restore input 16 Response Format 06 XX XX 42 52 03 XX ACK ADR ADR B R ETX CHK Page
181. ers UKP on a telephone keypad This acronym stands for Unlock Key Pad Entering an invalid code or pressing the F4 key will redisplay the Keypad Locked message Logging In and Logging Out A user is automatically logged out when the controller module is reset or if the Ethernet socket is closed or broken Once access control is enabled for a port a user must log into that port before issuing any commands except those that are allowed with no login For the computer interface ports PC Control In Remote and Ethernet the ZI protocol command is used to login For the Ethernet Telnet console window any standard Telnet program may be used to bring up a text window with a login prompt Page 142 of 176 Rev K Login Logout QE3 Matrix Switching System To invoke the Login Logout screen from the main menu key sequence 3 2 3 Access Control 2 Login Logout User fl 1 Admin F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 114 Login Logout In the Login Logout Screen 1 Admin or the current Admin username should be displayed The user ID UID is always displayed in front of the username since all usernames including Admin may be customized Use the scroll keys to scroll through the available usernames Once the desired username is shown push F1 to select the user to log in as Password Entry Once you have selected the desired username the screen will change to the Password Entry screen Rev K Admin F1 Done F2 gt F3
182. es on the bus This is why it is important to assign each controller in your system a unique address 4 Wire and 2 Wire Systems RS 485 has a 2 wire and a 4 wire standard Quintech uses the 4 wire standard which allows the master controller to send data out one pair of wires and the slaves send data back to the master on the other twisted pair RS 485 Pinout The Quintech UCM port is a dedicated RS 485 port The Serial Control In port can also be configured for RS 485 communications The pin definitions are listed in Table 2 Cable Lengths Quintech recommends the same cable length as the RS 485 standard The RS 485 cable length can be up to 4000 feet between nodes Rev K Page 73 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Signal Reflection As data speeds and cable lengths go up the problem of signal reflections becomes important Lines must be properly terminated by a resistor that makes the cable look electrically like it is infinitely long An infinitely long cable of course can have no reflected signals because the far end is infinitely far away When this reflection occurs it propagates from one end of the wires to the other end and back repeatedly Therefore to add something to fix this reflection you only need to take care of the end of the cable not any nodes in between the ends From the remote port description it was explained that the remote ports are identical and can be interchanged When remotes are daisy chained together th
183. esesssseveosbenssvecsees 44 Connection Status WoO PermMissiOn ssssccccccccscssssssssscscccsesssssssscecscees 45 Connection Status wo PermissiOns e eee ecce eee eee ee eee e eee tno see e ee ee 45 Connection Status w PermissiOns ecce ee ee ee eren eene eee e eet o oae e eee 46 Chanpe Conector oer e Erro YS Ebd e e buy Nee Pen eei Ts LUI Ee E Na o pane n 47 System Information Menu e eee esset eee ee eren esee tn seen setas tss s eto se seno 49 Firmware VerslOIL ieeeee vo sev co ca ee eee eroe pe sena a eee ee eoo uso e Varo o eno e sivo Ie Sorentas 50 Label Prompt I 22 0 tiri oerte Gro pee ee phe sasssa EUN E susse aosi Nada ea pA o oua EE 51 Label PROM E 2 5 5 ssseisvinsecscasiesadoscesesdscapsveonssobeuesdounustosduuetedscdesesseceneseucuaenaeaes 51 Label Prompt 3 soci csiccasagersiess lt escaisseadoccek vavoubsependecsseawonbessaseeeapevdvesstercoteaeeteetaes 51 Ldbeb Prompt d i casccsndesscsasscossessegspesoataanavsaceonatenvespmunsccscannceosetpecauacetenges 32 Label Prompt 2er paar Era Lost vae Ee N t EL ep pos v Ibo Xe esras Sosro esotas 52 Label Prompt 6 orae nete io vette eoo eene po pee sueco evene besser SSSss SSos rssi Ssss 52 Monitoring COTE foe 53 Set RE Warning Level Menu c cieccssctecscoscsdecacsseraccssnsdeccnsvceeuasscedecsesaussese 53 Get Fan Speed Screen cssiscscsasace lt cossecsdoshpscsssonsecsooesssesesbpucuwssssecesbonpocessetpecscees 54 Power Suppl
184. ess Screen an associated username is shown after the GID since users are assigned to groups based on their user ID UID Future firmware releases may or may not show this depending on whether multiple users can be assigned to the same group The default settings are listed in Table 4 Factory Defaults for Access Control UID Username Password Group Output Control 1 Admin 1 1 All 2 User2 2 2 None 3 User3 3 3 None 4 User4 4 4 None 5 User5 5 5 None 6 User6 6 6 None 7 User7 7 7 None 8 User8 8 8 None Table 4 Access Control Defaults Rev K Page 153 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Admin Account The Admin is the main controller of the system He is the one who hands out and sets up all other users permissions Admin Default Username The default password for the Admin is Admin The Admin can change this user name to any valid password after first logging in as the Admin Admin Default Login Password The default password for the Admin is 1 The Admin can change this password to any valid password after first logging in as the Admin Admin User Name and Password Warning Current versions of the software have no reset for the Admin username or password If the Admin name or password is programmed and then forgotten there are only two solutions Reload the firmware or reset the internal board to factory defaults These solutions require either qualified Quintech
185. ess parameter allows you to set a 2 byte hexadecimal address for the controller This address is used for two purposes If the system contains more than one controller this address is used by the controller to communicate properly through the remote ports to other controllers This address is also used by the Quintech software to communicate properly to the serial port Set the address for the controller and then when setting up the parameters for serial communications in the Quintech software set the address to the same address as the controller To change the address use the up and down arrows until the desired address is displayed then press F1 to select the new address No change is made until the F1 key is pressed The address range is from 00H to FEH Do not use FFH as an address Press F4 repeatedly to back out to the main menu again Rev K Page 39 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Current Address 0 New address 1 0 F1 Enter F4 Exit Figure 8 Serial Address NOTE If you have remotes in the system make sure the main controller address and all remote controllers have different addresses Valid Addresses Addresses can be set from 00 to FE hexadecimal The unit only responds to commands sent over the serial bus that contain a matching address The only exception is the address FF which is a broadcast address All units will respond to a command containing FF as the address regardless of its current address For this r
186. essage can also be routed to the front panel This front panel feature can be turned on or off If enabled the error message will remain on the front panel until a user presses a key to clear it The message also remains in the message queue until read by a user or until other messages fill up the message queue and flush out the oldest message Gain Control The QE3 provides gain control functionality which can be used to attenuate or amplify input signals Gain control has two separate modes manual and automatic An input can utilize automatic gain control manual gain control or have its gain control turned off Each system input has a separate manual and automatic gain control dBm value Rev K Page 5 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Automatic Gain Control Automatic gain control actively attenuates or amplifies a signal based upon the current input signal strength Each input has an automatic gain control dBm value If the input RF level is above the automatic dBm value the QE3 will attenuate the input signal down to the set dBm level If the input signal is below the set automatic dBm level the input signal is amplified to the set dBm level This feature can be either disabled or enabled for each input Manual Gain Control Manual gain control assigns a set attenuation or amplification value to an input Independent of input signal strength the set dB value is added or subtracted from the input signal before the signal passe
187. evel Tt Change Options F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 31 Get Input RF Levels Menu Read Input RF dBm Signal Level In 1 Input 1 Scroll 1 or Enter F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 32 Get Input RF Level Page 56 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System If the QE3 system has more than 64 outputs but is not equipped with QED input modules this command will not be available In 1 Input 1 48 0dB Scroll 1 or Enter F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 33 Display Input RF Level Scroll through the inputs to get the desired number You can also explicitly enter the number using the keypad Press F1 to make QE3 sample the input and retrieves a dBm value The value is displayed on the screen This feature is included to assist in determining where a system fault is located If the command fails to read a valid value a message screen will be displayed It there is no RF signal on that input the following screen will be displayed It will also detect and report if that particular input or XRD card is offline In 1 No signal Input 1 detected Scroll 1 or Enter F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 34 RF Signal not detected Rev K Page 57 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System RF Board Offline F4 Exit Figure 35 RF Board not detected Get Output RF Level Get Output RF Level reports the total output power of a specified output Get Output RF Level 7 Change Options F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 36 Get Out
188. evel XRM12 Failure Input 31 XRM at address 12 RF level dropped Page 14 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XRM Temperature Alarm This SNMP trap command indicates the temperature sensor on the control board has detected a higher than normal operating temperature This indicates a cooling problem that may require checking fans and airflow Complete trap lt Temp XXXYY Warning gt Description structure Temp gt Alarm description Temperature abbreviated XXX Type of unit indicating the alarm lt YY gt Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board lt Warning gt Alarm description Example Alarm Temp XRDO1 Warning Temperature in unit XRD at address 01 is higher than normal Rev CL Page 15 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XRM Fan Speed Alarm This SNMP trap command indicates the fan specified is running well below the normal expected RPM Fan may require servicing or cleaning Complete trap FanX YYYZZ Warning Description structure Fan Alarm description Cooling fan x gt Fan number Fans are numbered from left to right on the rear panel lt YYY gt Type of unit indicating the alarm AZ Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board Warning Alarm description Example Alarm
189. evel then a message is generated and placed in the message queue and an SNMP trap will also be generated This trap is sent to the assigned trap IP address This command will set the RF dBm level that will generate this error message Note that the XRD and XRM inputs can be attenuated This warning level is compared directly at the system inputs before any attenuation is applied to the signal see XA command This command only works for system inputs Any attempt to attenuate an XRM input on a system with XRDs will fail This command will only accept values from 10 to 50 dBm and 99 To turn RF monitoring on set the level from0125 10 to 50 To turn monitoring off set the level to 99 dBm For the QRM this command will only accept values from 0 to 60 dBm and 99 To turn RF monitoring on set the level to any value from 0 to 60 dBm To turn monitoring off set the level to 99 dBm Command Format 02 XX XX 58 57 49 XX XX XX XX XX STX ADR ADR X W MSADR ADR ADR ADR TENS XX XX XX 03 XX ONES dBTENS dBONES ETX CHK MSDADR Most significant digit of the XRM address This determines what type of unit will respond in an XRM system MSADR 0 XRM unit MSADR 2 XRD unit ADR Address of individual unit in an XRM system Must be between 000 and 255 for an XRM Must be between 000 and 015 for an XRD unit TENS ONES The input or output number Must range from 1 to 32 for XR systems
190. ew password for a user Command structure ZP lt username UID gt lt password gt Username The username that will be assigned a new password UID User ID Alternatively the user ID can be specified Password Up to 14 alphanumeric characters Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 5A 50 3A 41 64 6d 69 6E 3A 32 41 STX ADR ADR Z P A d m i n 2 A Set the Admin password to 2Ab Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 5A 50 3A 31 3A 32 41 62 03 XX STX ADR ADR Z P 1 2 A b ETX CHK Set the Admin password to 2Ab Positive Response 06 XX XX A5 50 03 XX ACK ADR ADR Z P ETX CHK Page 152 of 157 62 03 XX b ETX CHK Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol ZU Set Username This command can only be executed by the Admin This command sets a new username for a user Command structure ZP lt username UID gt lt new username gt Username The username that will be assigned a new password UID User ID Alternatively the user ID can be specified New Username Up to 14 alphanumeric characters The username must start with a character not a number Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 5A 55 3A 41 64 6d 69 6E 3A 55 31 STX ADR ADR Z U A d m i n U Set the Admin username to U1 Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 5A 55 3A 31 3A 55 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR Z U 1 U 1 ETX CHK Set the Admin username to U1 Positive Response 06 XX XX A5 55 03 XX ACK ADR ADR Z U ETX CHK
191. f an individual cross point Rev K Page 137 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System System Access A Quintech matrix is controlled through a standard control module This is typically a separate 1U 1 75 high module but it may be built in to a matrix switch module as well The controller accepts control commands from external sources that tell it how to switch the matrix or configure various system options A standard controller has five control ports that will accept commands Local Front panel keypad and LCD Remote The Remote In connector This is typically where other controllers are connected when they are configured to operate as remote control panels If remotes are not going to be used in the system this port can typically be used as an auxiliary serial port It is configured as an RS 485 port and accepts 9600 baud 8N1 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit data Command data is sent as an STX ETX bounded packet with checksum as defined in the protocol document Control In The PC Control connector This is typically where a control computer or PC is connected The port can be configured as an RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 port and accepts 9600 baud 8N1 data Command data is sent as an STX ETX bounded packet with checksum as defined in the protocol document QEC Port Ethernet The exact Ethernet port is user defined with the default Ethernet port set at 9100 It accepts the same command packet that is used on the serial por
192. f the QE3 address This determines what type of unit will respond in an QE3 system MSADR 4 QE3 unit ADR Address of individual box in a QE3 system Must be between 000 and 255 Response Format 06 XX XX 58 50 49 XX XX 2D XX 41 6D 70 ACK ADR ADR X P I 10s 1s s tenths A m p 73 ETX CHK S 03 XX Example Command 02 XX XX 58 50 49 32 35 30 30 36 03 XX STX ADR ADR X P I 2 4 0 0 6 ETX CHK Check current of power supply 2 on QE3 unit at address 6 Example Response 06 XX XX 58 50 56 30 31 2D 33 41 6D 70 73 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X P I 0 1 5 3 A m p s ETX CHK Power supply reports current is 1 3 amps output Page 130 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XPS QE3 Check Status bits of a Power Supply This command will report the 5 status bits of a QE3 power supply in a QE3 system Command Format 02 XX XX 5850 53 XX XX XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X P S NUM MSADR ADR ADR ADR ETX CHK NUM Power supply number 1 or 2 MSADR Most significant digit of the QE3 address This determines what type of unit will respond in a QE3 system MSADR 4 QE3 unit ADR Address of individual box in a QE3 system Must be between 000 and 255 Response Format 06 XX XX 58 50 53 XX XX XX XXF XX ETX CHK ACK ADR ADR X P S NUM1 NUM2 NUM3 NUMA NUM5 03 XX NUM1 AC input 0 Good 1 Fault NUM2 DC output 0 Good 1 Fault NUM3 Temp
193. factory settings code number F1 3 Features 3 Priority Mode Priority Mode Off F1 Change F4 Exit Figure 98 Priority Mode Screen Priority Mode Description Priority mode is associated with the lock and unlock output functions When this mode is on the user that locks an output is recorded This information is referenced again when the output is commanded to unlock If the current user has equal or higher priority than the user that locked the output the user will be able to unlock the output It does not matter what port the user is logged into when the output is locked Only the priority information is saved not any port information Page 126 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Front Panel Priority Display If an output has been locked by a user while the priority mode is on the status of the output is indicated by the front panel If the current user has equal or higher priority the screen looks like an ordinary output that is locked Name name Out in F2 L U Locked F4 Exit Figure 99 Locked with Priority I f the user logged in has lower priority than the user that locked the output the word Priority will be displayed and the user will not be able to change or unlock the output Name name Out in Priority Locked F4 Exit Figure 100 Locked without Priority User s Priority There are 8 available users for the priority function Each user has a different priority These are set and
194. faster to start and complete Serial number Marked S N on rear panel Approximate date of purchase Company dealer or representative the system was purchased from or if was purchased factory direct Problems and Solutions This section has been written to help eliminate operator error It does not describe how to repair damaged equipment If there is more than one solution the most common solution is listed first and least common solution last If you have a problem that is not addressed in this troubleshooting guide or you need technical assistance please contact us Contact information is listed at the end of the troubleshooting guide Page 168 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System General Problems The signal is lost when the power is turned off Several options referred to in the manual are not coming up on the display The QE3 is an active switch which requires power to maintain the crosspoint connections If power is turned off the signal no longer passes through In order to see all the options you must be logged in as Admin and the access control for local has to be on also The LCD is blank except for a row of dim blocks The unit does not remember the previous switch settings switch size after power has been removed and restored 1 Firmware may have been corrupted Contact Quintech for new firmware and download instructions 2 LCD or cable has failed Contact Quintech for service Co
195. from any port including the front panel Page 118 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Restore Function Outputs that have been switched by the Q SENSE function are marked and saved These outputs can then be automatically restored to the original primary input This can be done from the Q SENSE restore command or the front panel restore screen This restore command is accepted regardless of the RF level at either Q SENSE input It is left to the user to correct the problem that caused the RF loss before the Q SENSE input is reastored Restore Function Limitations The restore function can only restore an output if the last action on the output was the Q SENSE function execution If the output status is changed then the Q SENSE information is deleted Any output that has it s status changed can no longer be automatically switched by the restore function Status change includes set protect unprotect lock and unlock Q SENSE Front Panel Operation Q SENSE functions can be set up from the front panel or protocol commands The Q SENSE functions are under the system information menu Q SENSE Setup Tt Change Options F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 86 Q SENSE Setup Screen Press F1 to enter the Q SENSE setup options Once in the Q SENSE menu you can scroll through the available Q SENSE setup options Rev K Page 119 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System On Off The Q SENSE function can be enabled or disabled per system input
196. ge 79 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Checking Control Mode If needed you can check the mode setting of a controller from the front panel To invoke the Display Control Mode screen from the main menu key sequence 2 3 1 2 System Options 3 Remote Control 1 Control Mode Mode Main F4 Exit Figure 53 Control Mode The Control Mode screen only displays the mode of the controller The mode can t be changed from this screen Setting the Control Mode The controllers that came with your system have already been properly configured as main and remote controllers and were marked as such in the packaging A controller s mode can be checked and even changed from the front panel Changing the mode should never be necessary except for a few rare cases such as system upgrades or firmware upgrades Changing the control mode is a critical setting and is therefore included under the Configuration Menu which is protected by the factory settings code number screen To change the control mode refer to Set Control Mode in the Factory Configuration Settings chapter Page 80 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System System Commands from the Main Controller From a user standpoint the main controller operates the same as remotes controlling the system and changing crosspoint connections The only diference between a remote and a main is that it is set as main controller and has a different serial address than all ot
197. ges command Messages are generated for all RF levels if threshold is set larger than 77dBm Fixes RS 485 on control in serial port No remote UCM support 7 02 2 15 07 Serial 1514 D or later Internal Release 7 03 1 9 06 2 15 07 Serial 1514 D or later Internal Release 7 04 1 26 06 2 15 07 Serial 1514 D orlater Uses CAN bus communication between Processor and PIC No remote UCM support 7 05 4 25 06 2 15 07 Serial 1514 D or later Firmware supports only 32x64 size with 2 XRM units with 1514s and 1 XRD unit Internal XRM reading of RF dBm values not supported No remote UCM support 7 06 5 15 06 2 15 07 Serial 1514 D or later Firmware supports only 32x32 size and a remote UCM 7 07 6 12 06 2 15 07 Serial 1550 D or later Firmware supports only 32x32 size remote UCM support System communications based on interrupts not polling as before No 7 10 10 2 06 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 7 08 6 12 06 2 15 07 Serial 1514 D or later Firmware supports only 32x32 size Increased timeout length between XRM and remote UCM 7 09 8 21 06 2 15 07 Serial 1550 D or later Supports hot swappable 1550 control remote UCM support 1550 D or later card No support for XRB or XRC commands Supports XRDs and XROs for systems up to 512x512 No Improved communications interface with memory enhanced 1530 on off card No remote UCM support 7 11 10 12 06 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later
198. h as attenuation and gain control are disabled 1 QEDs present No F1 Change F4 Exit Figure 70 QED Setup I O Names Option 4 of the System Setup screen allows the user to assign names to the inputs and outputs These names will then be displayed above the corresponding input and output in the Monitor and Control screen 1 Set Input Names 2 Set Output Names 3 Reset To Default F4 Exit Figure 71 Set I O Names Rev K Page 99 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Load Firmware Contact Quintech technical assistance for any firmware downloads Depending on the system and date of manufacturing the process may or may not require system offline time and resetting of system parameters QE3 systems manufactur ed after September 2006 have been manufactured with internal QE3 upgrade memory These QE3s can be upgraded without any interruption of crosspoint or changing of system parameters Option 2 in the Configuration Menu displays the Load Firmware screen The Load Firmware screen enables you to upgrade the internal firmware level of the controller To invoke the Load Firmware screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 2 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 2 Load Firmware Press F1 to set Control In as Firmware Download F4 Exit Figure 72 Load Firmware Pressing F1 will put the controller in a special firmware download mode Onl
199. h should be left in position 0 With the switch in this position the controller card will download all system parameters from the QE3 System operation will then resume without having to reboot or power cycle the QE3 system If the switch is in position 1 the controller board will boot from the memory on the control board This is not recommended because the system parameters on the controller board will not match the current settings of the QE3 system thus causing the system parameters to be reset to their factory default settings Page 16 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Controller Card Hot Swapping The controller board is hot swappable QE3 system parameters remain unchanged and RF paths are not interrupted when a new controller card is inserted to replace a malfunctioning controller card All system variables are backed up in the QE3 system If a new control board is inserted the system parameters are downloaded from the QE3 onto the control board The backed up parameters include Input attenuation values Gain control values RF cross point connections IP address Gateway address Subnet address TCP IP port number Ethernet lock password Model type Model number Number of inputs Number of outputs SNMP on off SNMP trap IP address DHCP on off UCM port termination on off Control in port termination on off Serial mode Serial address Load access control on off Remote port access control on off Contro
200. hased Any changes to the inter module connections should not be attempted without Quintech s assistance Page 22 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System RF Connectors 75 Ohm BNC type connectors are standard on most QE3 units However 75 and 50 Ohm F type connectors 50 Ohm SMA connectors and 75 and 50 Ohm N type connectors are also available Other connectors may be available by special request The RF connections only need to be finger tightened for proper termination If desired the connectors can be tightened slightly with a wrench to ensure complete contact NOTE Do not force a cable connector onto the rear panel RF connectors If the RF connectors are over tightened with a wrench the connector may break internally with no visible signs of breakage on the outside of the connector If a connector does not seem to mate properly recheck the type of cable and connector you are using If you are still having difficulties contact Quintech for assistance Replacement Cables All RF interconnection cables are supplied by Quintech The use of third party cables is not recommended for system inter connections All system cables have been tested and verified for mechanical and electrical integrity before being shipped with the systems We do not guarantee optimum performance of our equipment with non Quintech cables for inter module connections Contact Quintech for cable replacements or for additional RF cables Rev K Page
201. he top right with card number 1 Card number 2 is on the bottom rack on the right The top rack contains all odd numbered cards The bottom rack contains all even numbered cards Cards always numbered from right to left Complete trap Card XX YYYZZ offline Description structure Card XX gt Card number lt YYY gt Type of unit indicating the alarm ZZ Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board offline Alarm description Example Alarm Card 1 9 XROOO offline Card 1 top right upper card at XRO 00 has gone offline Page 20 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XRM Auto Reroute Fault Location This SNMP trap command indicates an auto route has occurred This trap sends out the address number and type of the card that is determined to have caused the re route Complete trap Auto Re route UUUVVI W BzX O Y CheckInputCardZ gt Auto Re route IZW B X O Y CheckBridgeCardZ gt Auto Re route IZW BzX O Y CheckOutputCardZ gt Description structure Auto Re route gt Alarm description lt I W gt Input card number W lt B X gt Bridge card number X lt O Y gt Output card number Y lt Check type Card gt Type of card indicating the alarm lt Z gt Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board lt offli
202. her remotes The only reason one controller must be main and all addresses must be different is so that Quintech s communications can operate correctly The main controller can accept a system reset command System Commands from the Remote Controller s Any switch changes that are made thru a remote controller will update all other controllers and make the system crosspoints change instantly This does not include factory configured settings like matrix and module sizes Set Address Each controller in the system must have a unique serial address assigned to it for proper operation If this is not done the main controller and remotes will not be able to communicate Initializing Remotes The Initializing Remotes function sends the switch settings of the main controller to all remote control panels The initialization sequence takes a few seconds and should be started from the main controller The main controller will display Initializing Remotes and will check for remotes at addresses between 00H and FEH This display will be shown on the main controller for a few seconds but will not be shown on the other units The Initializing Remotes function should be run after the system is first set up or if the information in any remote does not match the main controller for any reason If any factory specified parameters such as matrix size are changed each remote must have those parameters set from the front panel Initialization only recogn
203. hese names can be read back by the program and are also displayed on the front panel Monitor and Control screen When this option is unchecked the program will load up the last names used in the program Rev K Page 161 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Login Logout If access control is turned on for the port defined in the communications setup the output and input names will appear in red The user will have to log in with a username and password that will have permissions in order to change or lock an output Once logged in the outputs with permission will appear in black For detailed access control information refer to the Access Control section Matrix Customization Customizing Input and Output Names If desired you can specify your own matrix input and output names You can enter these names and write these names to the matrix or read the names from the QE3 These names are displayed in the Monitor and Control screen on the front panel as well as the program screen in the outputs and current inputs columns OK confirms new names and clear will clear any new names not yet written to the QE3 Click CANCEL to exit without assigning any pending new names Clicking OK will close the window only if there are no pending names to be written Write Names Enter new names and click write to download new names to the QE3 Read Names Click read to read previously assigned names from the QE3 Page 162 of 176 Rev K
204. hire doe Soe quud 63 4 TL AGC Delay TIME 5 cisco n Sep e iet OS ound Od diste EEEE 63 Rev K Page 37 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Communications Setup If the controller module is to be controlled by a port connection in addition to the keypad the communication parameters must be set up first Interface Options Menu Option 2 of the System Options Menu will load the Interface Options Menu To invoke the Interface Options Menu from the main menu key sequence 2 2 2 System Options 2 Interface Options 1 Configuration 2 Interface Options 3 Remote Control F4 Exit Figure 6 Interface Options Menu Press 2 to enter the Interface Options Menu From this menu you will be able to initiate the configuration of seven different communication parameters Use the up and down arrows to scroll thru the various communications parameters When the desired parameter is displayed in the upper left corner press F1 to select it Press F4 to back out to the System Options Menu Page 38 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Serial Mode The Serial Mode parameter enables you to specify whether an RS 232 RS 485 or RS 422 serial interface will be used to communicate with the Serial or Quintech UCM serial communications port Select the appropriate protocol using the up down arrows and back out by pressing F4 Serial Mode Tt Change Options F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 7 Serial Mode Serial Address The Serial Addr
205. i power trom uait Fe Vy OY 2y 4 250 Airport Road Indiana PA 15701 800 839 3658 724 349 1412 Fax 724 349 1421 hitp www quintechelectronics com info quintechelectronics com 2011Quintech Electronics and Communications Inc All rights reserved All product designs and specifications are subject to change without notice QE3250032X32CAFFF000 Rev G CO 15364 Page 2 of 2 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Quintech XRM QE3 SRM MRF MRM QRM LTE Series Protocol v2 15 Release 07 08 09 10 11 Rev CL 2 16 2011 This document specifies a common command protocol that can be used to control a Quintech matrix controller from a computer This protocol is for a full fan out matrix Protocol 2 15 release 07 2 15 07 is backward compatible with all previous 2 15 protocols Protocol 2 15 release 08 2 15 08 is not backward compatible with 2 15 protocol release 07 but is backward compatible with releases 06 and lower Release 07 is for XRM products only Release 08 is for SRM products SRM products do not have the same features as the XRM products therefore Release 8 is backwards compatible with 06 and lower releases Protocol 2 15 release 09 2 15 09 is for QE3 products only Protocol 2 15 release 10 2 15 10 is for QRM products only Protocol 2 15 release 11 2 15 11 is for LTE products only Rev CL Page 1 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Command Summary This list gives the
206. ic shades ease sede eset eee 132 2 1 1 3 T Set Input NAMES ueni itecto tires 133 2 1 1 52 Set Output Names 525 entro ener epa ode 134 2 1 2 Logd Firmware cose Ned rena un DRE RARE RAM ra ae e DR AR URN 100 24 3 TOU Ni 106 2 1 3 1 BEC omo MU oer dS Ro Pa EUR Na EUN ER RUE 107 21 3 2 Options Men s siseses resi ates Piecd tu en chu qud uu pda itagia 103 2 1 3 2 1 LNB Power not available 21 2 1 32 2 SNMP IMBDU oscinina ennienni pe c nde 111 2 1 3 2 2 1 SNMP On Off oai bu piis 112 2 1 3 2 2 2 Set SNMP Trap IP nn 112 2 1 3 2 3 XRO Attenuation ocio e oet rne ane opua Reno 104 21 3 2 A QE3 SEUD aai didi acies teo riot eo e beet Hic 112 2 1324 Can Bus BFEORS oe ER PEE 108 2 1 3 2 4 2 Card C aliBealloH usce E tes 108 213 242 QEO Attenuation Lorena 109 2 1 3 3 Set Priority MOUB e opel po balas d iiinis 111 The rest of the front panel hierarchy does not require the 732 factory settings code number to make changes to the system 2 2 Interface Options MOD eie pe proe tin a a E A a a 38 2 21 Set Address MT E E E 40 22 2 DEt Seal Mode ein a r E 39 2 23 Serial Terminal ON oan ving warsisisintiaswiiaiswtskisnsdcasauswsnwbdsdbeaeenlsdacnausacsaculsuacsngs 44 2 2 4 Static IP Config ration ua doeet daret nieto orc iei ienaa 43 22 3 DHCP P e MEE 42 2 950 QEG PODES 2uiesedidtadedis adieu eigen tiM ce ned paxil ve ydus cin xn s us missas ad 41 22
207. ies Status ssscscsssesuvssssvebiccesessvsasicovensversspeueddaveanbocevncd conssdavecovaacls 54 Internal oria iai gom T 55 Get Input RF Levels Menu cccssccssseccsseccsssscsccsscccsssesccssescessescesses S6 Get Input RE Eeyel arie ees tar eeees teneo pees eo di ria Sep Peas ev oret erm peeso ses S6 Display Input RE Level oreet etbas eccesso cbe rx Re Erbe Ya eats abend E eX Ee S shes sosse 57 RF Signal not detected e 57 RF Board not detected essessoesoesoesooesoesoesoossoesoeseoesossseseossoosseseossoossessossossse 58 Get Output RF Levels Menu ssesssesssesssocssoossosesssesssesesoossoossoossssesssocssossss 58 Report Output RF Levels Menu sseessoesssesssesssesssoossooesoossssesssesssoessoosso 59 RF Signal not detected yiicecsisccsussscsviccersotenccoechavcnicatenensncueacasceacassnuctecchccecenses 59 RF Board not detected sccccc cscssstecscssecsasteesbuceestsneusetvebcesievecsnstiessucscsbenscseasecns 60 QES System Test MCI sviss cscossvesaccsssnssevssvsuevsecs sosssvspbusuessvecssavensseutcssengasees 60 SV SECTORS e ceduesceadcneauatecsaneecasteesandsess 62 Ignore System Errors sesssecessscossosssoossoossosossscessoesssossosssocessoesssoesssosssossosess 62 xi QE3 Matrix Switching System Figure 42 Enter Gain Control 2 retire eot rtt enata obo sepas e poen enia e oo opu ee Dy Ease pcne ti 63 Figure 43 Manual Gain Control sic scccccssscsssiccssssecsosoaescesceosesecssedsdsdcsedeisescsveccectecec
208. ies for the input connected to the specified output Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 4F 30 30 31 03 Xx STX ADR ADR O 0 0 1 ETX CHK Query the status of output 1 Example Positive Response 06 XX XX 4F 30 30 32 03 XX ACK ADR ADR O 0 0 2 ETX CHK Output 1 is connected to input 2 Note This command will be accepted regardless of whether a user is logged in Rev CL Page 85 of 157 XRM QE3 ORM SRM MRF MRM LTE Series Protocol OS Query Output State This command queries for the input connected to the specified output along with the locked unlocked state and access control parameters The access control parameters are given by the last two characters in the response They give numbers that represent an access control bitmap table Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Group 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Hex Response character 1 Response character 2 If a particular bit is set then that group is allowed to change a particular output with the L S SP and U commands If the bit is clear then the corresponding group is not allowed access to that output Character Response 1 Groups allowed Response 2 Groups allowed access access 0 none none 1 5 1 2 6 2 3 5 6 1 2 4 7 3 5 5 7 1 3 6 6 7 2 3 7 5 6 7 1 2 3 8 8 4 9 5 8 1 4 A 6 8 2 4 B 5 6 8 1 2 4 C 7 8 3 4 D 5 7 8 1 3 4 E 6 7 8 2 3 4 F 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 Example Command Sent
209. in compatibility over all 2 15 releases this type of operation is no longer supported Note 2 Some commands such as M and N were available earlier in custom firmware versions Check the command format to determine compatibility between an earlier custom command and the standard command Note 3 Release 7 is currently only available on XRM products Note 4 Release 9 is currently only available on QE3 products Note 5 Release 10 is currently only available on QRM products Note 6 Release 11 is currently only available on LTE products Page 4 of 157 Rev CL Firmware Releases XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol The following tables indicate the firmware releases to date along with which protocol release is implemented Firmware Date Protocol Field Update Control Board Notes Capability SRM 2 56 4 11 03 2 15 02 Serial 1433 F or later Support for serial firmware upgrade 2 59 10 30 03 2 15 03 Serial Ethernet Upgrade to 2 6x recommended 2 60 12 02 03 li i 2 61 12 02 03 1 Ethernet 1433 E only 2 62 2 04 04 2 15 05 Serial Ethernet 1433 F or later 2 63 3 11 04 i i i 2 64 4 28 04 Support for LNB option 2 66 5 12 04 2 15 06 Support for access control Command ZG is not implemented 8 Users each user set to fixed GID 2 67 6 3 04 x g SNMP dynamic viewing and main remote moved under configuration program model type 2 68
210. input Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 5A 41 49 3A 32 3A 30 3A 30 30 35 03 XX STX ADR ADR Z A I 2 0 0 0 5 ETX CHK Deny group 2 access to input 5 Positive Response 06 XX XX A5 41 03 XX ACK ADR ADR Z A ETX CHK Rev CL Page 145 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol ZAO Set Group Access for Output This command can only be executed by the Admin This command sets the privilege for a group to change an output Command structure ZAO lt GID gt lt access gt lt output gt GID Group ID Can be 1 8 with 1 being Admin Access Access Control 1 Allow 0 Deny Output Matrix output number Can be 1 to the size of the matrix If access is allowed for that output then any user in that group can issue an L S or U command for that output Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 5A 41 4F 3A 32 3A 30 3A 30 30 35 03 XX STX ADR ADR Z A O 2 0 0 0 5 ETX CHK Deny group 2 access to output 5 Positive Response 06 XX XX A5 41 03 XX ACK ADR ADR Z A ETX CHK This is the same command as ZA It was added when input access control was added so both input and output commands had the same format ZA has been kept for backward compatibility Page 146 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol ZC Current User This returns the user ID group ID and username of the current logged in user Example Command Sent 02 XX XX SA 43 03 XX STX ADR ADR Z C ETX
211. ion factory settings code number F1 1 System Setup 3 Module Sizes 1 SRM Module Size Input SRM 16 Output SRM 16 F1 Enter F4 Exit Figure 63 SRM Module Size Page 94 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System SRO Module Size Option 2 in the Module Size Menu displays the SRO Module Size screen The number of input rows for each SRO output module is specified via this screen Enter the numbers 4 8 or 16 to specify 4 8 or 16 input rows respectively A matrix with 1 to 64 inputs requires an SRO with 4 input rows 65 128 inputs require 8 input rows and 129 256 inputs require 16 input rows Some customers prefer to purchase an SRO larger than required to allow for future expansion To navigate to the SRO Module Size screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 1 3 2 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 1 System Setup 3 Module Sizes 2 SRO Module sizes Input Rows Sro 4 F1 Enter F4 Exit Figure 64 SRO Module Size Rev K Page 95 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Combination QE3 XRM SRM Systems QE3 systems can be combined with either XRM or SRM systems for expansion purposes Option 3 in the Module Size Menu displays the QE3 XRM SRM Systems screen which will enable you to combine a QE3 system with an existing XRM or SRM system To navigate to the QE3 XRM SRM Systems screen from the main menu key sequenc
212. ion can be made This feature was added for additional protection against accidental cross point connection changes Turning off an Output To turn off an output simply connect the output to input 0 Connecting to input 0 effectively turns off the output Page 48 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System System Information Menu Additional information about the system is available from the System Information menu Pressing 4 in the main menu displays the System Information Menu Scrolling Get Firmware Version 7 Change Options F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 18 System Information Menu Pressing the up or down arrow keys scrolls through the available options in the menu Not all options are available to all system configurations Get Firmware Version Input Warning Level Fan Speed Power Supply Status Internal Temperature Get Input RF Level Get Output RF Level System Errors Output Attenuation AGC Mode Gain Control Simple AGC Setup Advanced AGC Setup QE3 System Test QSENSE setup Rev K Page 49 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Firmware Version Option one will flash the same screen that appears during power up The displayed information includes Model Type Model Number Configured system size Protocol Version To display the firmware version use the up and down scroll arrows to scroll through the various options Stop scrolling when Get Firmware Version is displayed To display specific firmware
213. ions parameters every time the user connects to a different switch Open the Create Configuration window by choosing New Configuration under the File menu Enter the name that will be used to describe your system and click the CREATE button The Create Configuration window will automatically close after your configuration has been created You can save your configuration at any time You can also load delete and copy your configuration using the other options in the File menu Rev K Page 157 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Controlling the QE3 After successful communications has been established you are ready to control the QE3 using the point and click interface Changing a Crosspoint To change a crosspoint click on the output name displayed in the main window The Change Crosspoint window will be displayed In this window all available inputs are displayed Choose an input by clicking on it The chosen input will be displayed in the Pending Input box Your pending change will be shown in the main window in the Pending Inputs and or Pending Status column You can set up multiple pending changes at the same time before committing the changes Click apply to change the impending inputs to make the crosspoint change s Cancel Crosspoint Changes At any time before the apply button is clicked the user can hit the CLEAR button to clear the impending inputs and start over Change Impending Inputs You can change an impe
214. is the N command which is identical to the NS command except that names are a fixed 4 characters long The response is also different with only the N returned Rev CL Page 83 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol NQ Name Change Queue This command reads the name queue which holds up to eight input or output numbers that have had their convenience names changed Issuing the NQ command clears the name queue the change count and the name bit in the C command change flag Command structure NQ Response structure NQ lt Status Flag gt lt Change Count gt lt I O number gt lt I O number Status Flag for name queue overflow Change Count Number of name changes in queue I O number An Lor O to indicate input or output plus the associated 3 digit number Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 4E 51 03 XX STX ADR ADR N Q ETX CHK Positive Response 06 XX XX 4E 51 30 31 63 76 72 32 03 XX ACK ADR ADR N Q 0 I 0 0 2 ETX CHK No overflow one change input 2 Positive Response 06 XX XX 4E 51 31 31 63 76 72 32 03 XX ACK ADR ADR N Q I 0 0 2 ETX CHK Name queue overflowed more than 8 names have been changed since last check input 2 is the last known name changed Note This command will be accepted regardless of whether a user is logged in Page 84 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol O Query Output Channel This command quer
215. ise figure are affected by gain changes so the user must be aware of the input level at the QE3 as well as the level setting to prevent signal distortion Automatic Gain Control Limitations The QE3 system has a limit to the amount of gain or attenuation it can apply to a signal to get the level to the user requested dBm level The QE3 can add 18dB of gain or 13 5 dB of attenuation to an input signal For example say the automatic gain control dBm level for input 1 is set at 40dBm The input signal could be up to 26 5dB and the signal would still be attenuated down to 40dBm If the input signal was set to 26dBm then the attenuation is past its limit and the signal will start tracking the input signal The input would then be 39 5 dBm Gain can also cause signal degradation if the signal is at maximum input strength and the input is set to manual gain Amplification of a strong signal will cause signal degrading and distortion Quintech recommends a signal strength plus gain value added do not exceed 10dBm Rev K Page 69 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Q SENSE The Q SENSE option sets up the QE3 Q sense feature For details on the Q SENSE feature refer to the Q SENSE section Q SENSE Setup Tt Change Options F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 48 Q SENSE Menu Page 70 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System RS 485 Why an RS 485 Section In the past there have been questions as to how to handle certain RS 485
216. isnscesgseudssaheessavencesssacwandecssusvesdeetocs 146 Figure 118 Select Name Password cereis eee eee teen seen etta setas tastes atta soto neo 147 Figure 119 Change User Name Password 4 eeeeeee eee e eee eene eene aetas tnnno 147 Figure 120 Select User oie enc oie epe cd etre tiet Pe epe EE ntes lie riosdets 148 Figure 121 Set Output ACCOSS 2 oiii tere einer bad tbuE E pesh ent kan o e ER Los R LE uS In onn a a ERR N Te R 149 Figure 122 Set Input ACCOSS oeii cried eese bier tri ago stab eive a E sone cR E obsad cease seis satu insu 150 Figure 123 Select USGE ian oder ie telas e i ep su tena test tics i ec ni bte Ciao 132 Figure 124 Select User casesbaco edo ROUES n enses i UL dy 132 Table 4 Access Control Defaults viicccssscccsscesssnceseoscecssvucsonsedastnesecheadisrecconsieesctnessestaesss 153 Figure 125 Communication Setting Window cssccssscsssssssscsssscsssssssssssesssees 156 Rev K xiii QE3 Matrix Switching System Quintech A Company Introduction Who we are Incorporated in Indiana Pennsylvania in 1989 Quintech Electronics and Communications Inc was based on a foundation of proprietary technology and over 120 years of combined technical expertise in terrestrial microwave CATV and satellite communications From its inception Quintech has emphasized the development of customer driven new product solutions in order to facilitate the convergence of the telephone broadcast
217. it is 000 to 015 Warning The temperature inside the unit has exceeded 50 degrees Celsius Immediate servicing is required Rev CL Page 77 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Type 4 Keypad LCD Message 06 XX XX ACK ADR ADR XX 597 XADD W XADR UTYPE Warning Page 78 of 157 3A 4B 50 2F 4C 43 44 40 58 52 XX XX K P L c D X R UTYPE XADD 61 72 6E 69 6E 67 3 XX a f n i n g EXT CHK Address of individual unit in an XRM system XRM is 000 to 255 An XRO and XRD unit is 000 to 015 M O or D to represent XRM unit XRO output module or XRD distribution module The keypad and LCD are not responding This typically indicates the cable that connects the front panel to the unit has been disconnected Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Type 5 RF Unbalanced Level Message 06 XX ACK ADR e EXT NUM UTYPE XADR Failure Rev CL XX ADR 3A 4F 75 74 XX XX XX 5246 4C O u t NUM NUM NUM R F L 58 52 XX XX XX 46 61 X R UTYPE XADR XADR F a XX CHK Output number M O or D to represent XRM unit or XRD distribution module Address of 000 to 255 The XRM moni each output at the outpul individual An XRO and XRI lt 7 the input tors all routed paths and the connected input 65 76 e v 69 6C 75 XRO output module unit in an XRM system X
218. iving the input Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 53 30 30 31 30 30 32 03 XxX STX ADR ADR S 0 0 1 0 0 2 ETX CHK Connect output 1 to input 2 Positive Response 06 XX XX 53 03 XX ACK ADR ADR S ETX CHK Rev CL Page 93 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol SC Set Check Protected Mode This command will check an output for the status of the protected mode The command returns the protected mode status and if the output is in protected mode it will also return the port that put it in protected mode The output has to be unprotected before it can be changed The output can only be unprotected from the same port and same address it was protected from The reply will return O for off If the output is protected the reply will return a 1 for on and the port number The serial address of the unit follow in the last two characters PORT Physical connection 0 Local Keypad LCD 1 Remote Port B 2 Control In Port C 3 Ethernet Port A 4 Ethernet Port B 5 Telnet 6 SNMP The response also returns the serial address of the unit the output was protected from Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 53 43 30 30 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR S C 0 0 1 ETX CHK Check output 1 Positive Response 06 XX XX 53 43 30 03 XxX ACK ADR ADR S C 0 ETX CHK Output protected mode is off Positive Response 06 XX XX 53 43 31 31 46 44 03 XX ACK ADR ADR S C 1 1 F D ETX CHK Output protected mo
219. izes other remotes establishes communications and sets up the cross point connections Rev K Page 81 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Remotes Initialization Procedure Option 2 in the Display Control Mode Init Remotes Menu initializes all remotes in the system This function should be executed after the system is initially configured or if the information in a remote doesn t match the main controller for any reason To back out of the screen to the System Options Menu press F4 To navigate to the Display Control Mode Init Remotes Menu from the main menu key sequence 2 3 2 System Options 3 Remote Control 1 Control Mode 2 Init Remotes F4 Exit Figure 54 Display Control Mode Init Remotes Menu If you are having difficulty getting remotes to communicate refer to the Adding Additional Remotes section Page 82 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Adding Additional Remotes After additional remotes are added to the system configuration the system must be reinitialized To add additional remotes perform the following sequence of steps NOTE Do not attempt to set any crosspoint connections until this procedure is complete 1 Power down all controllers in the system 2 Connect the main controller and all remote controllers together Refer to the Quintech UCM Termination illustration as a guide don t forget the Quintech crossover adapter between the main and first remote 3 Power up the main co
220. king together to enable you to control the switching of multiple broadband RF coaxial lines Switching A V or RF signals between multiple inputs and outputs can now be done easily and instantaneously at the switch using a keypad or remotely from a PC with the use of Quintech s supplied software or third party control software The Quintech System Advantage The QE3 matrix switch provides a complete 64x64 matrix including hot swappable component cards redundant power supplies and integrated redundant system controllers in a 6 RU chassis Multiple QE3 matrix system modules can be used to create configurations up to 1024x1024 or larger The unit provides easy access to cards for seamless upgrades and maintenance via the front panel without requiring cables to be disconnected or without disrupting the signal paths of other cards in the system System Features QE3 systems are equipped with many standard features that make the system highly configurable Each system also has many features which allow the QE3 to be monitored for numerous conditions including power supply condition fan condition internal air temperature routed RF path report RF dBm level reads at system inputs and outputs alarm messages input and output names input attenuation number of cards installed or removed and LCD keypad status Self Monitoring The QE3 continually monitors the temperature fans condition power supplies Icd keypad and input output path RF levels
221. l in port access control on off TCP IP port access control on off Telnet access control on off SRM input module size SRM SRO control port data SRM output module size SRM SRO control port data SRO input row size SRM SRO control port data Rev K Page 17 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Control mode main remote Input names Output names User names User passwords Output permissions for all users and all outputs Instant RF threshold warning levels for all inputs Output routed not routed data Output locked not locked data Power Supply Modules Power Supplies The two power supplies in the upper left are redundant and the QE3 module can run on one power supply if one should fail Either power supply can be hot swapped individually and replaced without affecting the QE3 s operation Page 18 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Input Distribution Module QED The QED is the first stage of signal processing for a multi module QE3 system Your RF signals enter the QE3 system through the QED s then distributes the RF signals out to the QE3 modules in your system QED Function and Appearance The QED takes your RF inputs and creates as many multiples as is required by your system s design The row of inputs on the top of the QED is where your RF inputs are attached QED Sizes The quantity of QEDs required depends on the size of the matrix system being implemented The main consideration is the number of times
222. later Unique build for 2x24 substitution switch 8 10 4 18 06 2 15 06 Serial Ethernet 1433 F or later Unique build for TXS RXS fiber optic redundancy switch Used for TXS215008FFC000 ASI and RXS215008FFC000 ASI 8 20 11 30 06 2 15 06 Serial Ethernet 1433 F orlater Unique build for TXS RXS fiber optic redundancy switch Used for TXS00700BFC000 and RXS007008BFCO000 8 30 5 30 07 2 15 08 Serial Ethernet 1433 F or later Unique build for a RSS 550 RX TX Router 8 40 07 0140 2 15 11 Ethernet 1660 LTE firmware initial release SRX 1 03 09 23 10 2 15 08 Serial Ethernet 1433 F or later Add second TCP IP support SNMP protocol buffer LC IS ZG commands Input access control naming inputs and outputs ALT L and U commands Rev CL Page 11 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol SNMP Traps This document assumes the reader has a general working knowledge of SNMP functionality and SNMP traps SNMP traps are currently supported by the SRM XRM QE3 and QRM products These Quintech products can generate and send SNMP traps for various conditions or events Generally they are created and sent to inform about error conditions Some traps however can be generated for normal events such as changing crosspoints or locking an output All SNMP traps can be captured by a monitoring system at the set SNMP trap IP address There are numerous programs that capture and can display save or even forw
223. le Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 54 41 38 40 32 6D 73 3 XX STX ADR ADR X G T A 8 2 m S ETX CHK Set auto gain control delay time on input 8 to 2 1000 of a second Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 54 41 38 40 32 73 3 XX STX ADR ADR X G T A 8 2 S ETX CHK Set auto gain control delay time on input 8 to 2 seconds Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 54 41 34 33 40 STX ADR ADR X G T A 4 3 3 6 35 304 30 6D 73 3 XX 6 5 0 0 m S ETX CHK Set auto gain control delay time on input 43 to 6500 milliseconds or the equivalent of 6 5 seconds Response Format 06 XX XX 58 46 54 41 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X G T A ETX CHK Note Some firmware versions do not implement this command Rev CL Page 121 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XGTD Set Gain Control Time Decay Time Number of seconds or milliseconds the system waits between 0 5 dB power decreases during the time that a high power signal is attenuated to get it back down to a user pre defined dB signal level Can be set from 0 to 60 seconds in 1 1000 intervals This is a QE3 automatic gain control command Decay time is when the input RF level has increased and the system is now decreasing the input signal strength to get the RF level back down to the user pre defined automatic gain control dB level The gain control feature can decrease this signal strength slowly or quickly based on this number If the value is set to a small
224. limited to one master and up to ten receivers on the bus Recommended maximum length is 4000 feet The Quintech RS 422 standard is limited to 10 receivers RS 485 The QE3 can be configured to communicate in RS 485 standard Page 26 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System XR Bus Ports The XR Bus ports on the rear of the modules enable the main controller to communicate with the QEDs QEOs and QE3s The QEOs and QE3s communicate with each other via the XR Bus In and XR Bus Out ports XR Bus connectors are not Ethernet TCP IP ports Daisy Chaining XR Bus Control ports are always daisy chained together Daisy chaining refers to the wiring scheme in which for example module A is wired to module B module B is wired to module C module C to module D etc The output port of the first module and the input port of the last module is terminated XR Bus Connections The XR Bus In port is where the QED QE3 and QEO modules look for instructions XR Bus In ports are always connected to the XR Bus Out port of another module It may be connected to a QED QE3 or QEO depending on your system configuration The control connections of each system is different Your specific port connections are outlined in Control Interconnection A typical control port system connection is shown in Figure 9 NOTE If the system is a stand alone 64x64 system the XR Bus starts and stops with the same QE3 Even with single module systems the XR Bus still
225. llers or you can use them as one additional RS 485 ports for controlling the system Regardless of how you intend to use them they can only be used for one purpose at a time The ports cannot support a remote controller and an RS 485 connection at the same time Daisy Chaining Quintech UCM ports are usually daisy chained together Daisy chaining refers to the wiring scheme in which for example module A is wired to module B module B is wired to module C module C to module D etc The last device is terminated or left open This is how multiple controller modules can be connected together in a system The main controller Quintech UCM connector is wired to the first remote Quintech UCM In connector with a supplied Quintech adapter in line The first remote controller Quintech UCM Out connector is wired to the second remote controller Quintech UCM In connector with a straight through cable The second remote controller Quintech UCM Out connector is wired to the third remote controller Quintech UCM In connector with a straight through cable The connections continue in this style until the last remaining remote controller is left with an unused Quintech UCM Out connector Rev K Page 29 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Quintech UCM Port Crossover Adapter NOTE A supplied cross over adapter or a crossover cable must be used between the main controller module and the first remote controller of the daisy chain A c
226. locked outputs and protected outputs The function will execute and change crosspoints regardless of the status of the input or outputs Q SENSE RF Threshold Level The RF failure threshold level is a user settable value If the RF level on the primary input drops below this set threshold the Q SENSE backup input is switched to all outputs currently connected to the primary input This RF level threshold point can be set individually for every system input This RF level only is applicable to a primary input for a Q SENSE input pair The backup input level threshold point can be set up but it will not be used If the backup input is later re configured as a primary input the set RF level will then apply Q SENSE Setup The Q SENSE function can be set up from the front panel or protocol commands Q SENSE inputs can use any system input numbers except input zero Additional Q SENSE input pairs can be continually added until there are no more inputs being used as a backup or primary already Since there is only two inputs per Q SENSE pair then the maximum number of Q SENSE pairs for a system is the number of system inputs divided by 2 For example A 64x64 QE3 can support up to 32 Q SENSE input pairs Rev K Page 117 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System A Q SENSE primary or backup input is handled no different than any other input in system functions during normal operations Regardless of the Q SENSE setup an input is handled the same as a
227. m Values 60 JACEOTISVIBS ct ee TE conus Lied 11 LC D E ag otolec bo Dag eo es 11 LNB irainen 11 ES E E 11 QEF SYStE M ai e as 11 QED eer REOR 11 OEC ti ctt teas oops suuin 11 RE P 11 DNE asocio aisi s 11 Adapters Quintech UCM Port Crossover AOApIeE a aceti tris Miseni 30 Adding Additional Remotes 83 Address Broadcast Address 33 Ethernet Address 43 Ethernet Address Screen 43 Setting the Serial Address 39 Valid Serial Addresses 40 Admin Account esee 155 Admin Default Login Password 155 INGEN Saas acess es apcsesateeteent uec E ere 33 Air Temperature Monitoring 4 5 Alarm Condition Notification 6 i 1 QE3 Matrix Switching System Alarm Message Queue 6 Alarms Alarm Condition Notification 6 Alarm Message Queue 6 Set dBm Warning Level 53 Set Input RF Warning Level 53 ADpeardneg oto utt pde ds 13 Architecture Input and Output Cards 15 Power Supplies iere 18 Assigning Names Using Protocol C mnmmandS iet iste 136 Auto Ranging eere 22 Balanced Line Interface 42 Balanced Signaling 71 Bidsing Resistors 74 Broadcast Address
228. m the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 1 4 1 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 1 System Setup 4 I O Names 1 Set Input Names Input 1 lin 1 F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 105 Select Input to Assign Name Scroll through the inputs and when the desired input to be named is on the screen press F1 to select it This brings up a screen to write a name and assign it to the selected input The cursor moves to the bottom left at the first character in the current input s name Input 1 SattV51 F1 Done F2 F3 F4 Exit Figure 106 Write Name for Selected Input Rev K Page 133 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Use the scroll keys to select a letter or number Scrolling will bring up lower case letters upper case letters the numbers 0 9 and the space character Use F2 and F3 to move the cursor The length is 7 characters and if less characters are desired fill in the unwanted characters with the space character When scrolling it appears between the 9 and capital A Press F1 to accept the new name or at any time press F4 to exit the screen No name is assigned until the F1 key is pressed Set Output Names Option 2 of the I O Names Menu displays the Set Output Names screen To navigate to the Select Output Names screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 1 4 1 2 System Options 1 Configu
229. mination parameter enables you to specify how the control port and the remote ports are terminated This setup is only necessary if you are using RS 485 communications on one or more of the ports If you are not using RS 485 communications these settings should be turned off There is an entire section of this manual that explains the details of RS 485 termination 1 Control In Off 2 Quintech UCM On Fl On F2 Off F4 Exit Figure 13 Serial Termination Page 44 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Crosspoint Connections The following information describes how to monitor and change all RF connections through the keypad interface Monitor a Connection Select option 1 Monitor and Control in the main menu The screen may have more options available if you are logged in with permissions or access control is disabled For more information on permissions refer to Access Control Out 1 In 1 Output 1 gt Input 1 No Output Access F4 Exit Status 1 Figure 14 Connection Status wo Permissions Current QE3 design supports input access control as well as output access control After the output is selected the user must have allow permission for the input as well If the user does not have access to ther current input the screen will appear with the no input access message Out 1 In 1 Output 1 gt Input 1 No Input Access F4 Exit Status 1 Figure 15 Connection Status wo Permissions Rev K Page 45 of 1
230. n 103 Why Is Downloading Failing 5 o ent oe eee es 103 Serial Port Download Method Solutions esses 103 Ethernet Download Method Solutions eese 104 L catures Mem castae wt yaa quias talus fu LM cuade aca epee eb one ot 106 Set Cotto Mode ecce as Oen elvQb e UE D TOP tO Sd pe ve ev etitasi qu etn 107 Set Protity MOGE ooi otis pivot Be uoo tr Pali fectu Ha ead Pep bv odes 108 Port Access Control Enable Disable eee eee entente 109 some MC P E E 110 SNMP MORWIEG ande cat Rene eee a ee Mareen aquu ed e Tub do E ener Te 111 0 261 7 114 vi Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Q SENSE Description 5 ieoento ceo ae ia atu reda tea epPe ra ae Spas be reae e eRan ie snae ea RYE ya eda 117 Q SENSE PHO c ee UE e aM dm uelaes ond im MM idu etie 117 Q SENSE RF Threshold Level a ene nnne 117 C SENSE Setup MC 117 Q SENSE OtOMTL ronronner a aaa iad odes huf aereo 118 Q SENSE CUO o ose ENG REUR at es e e NM t Ue EE 118 Marked Ot UG S eio to as citus a Mu Lpee dm MG cage ata DE uM pe p se M Ud 118 R store Hach On s oedesduisiqiceavi quse Deco A dCi vaio urbe A U Dad d poe duda dde ai 119 Restore Function Limitations eterni terae aerei itte eae t e Pe ho Depp dada reas e tete dada 119 Q SENSE Front Panel Operation eeeeeee eee eerte eene 119 Br D UOMINI oM DP HD EN MEE SEE 120 Q SENSE Inp t Pair
231. n of this manual Option 3 of the Features Menu displays the Access Control screen Through this screen you can designate whether the access control system is on or off i e in effect or disabled for various control ports Note The Access Control option only appears in the Features Menu when you are logged in as the administrator This is true regardless of whether access control has been enabled for local control Rev K Page 109 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Options Menu Option 2 in the Features Menu invokes the Options Menu screen From this menu you can select to enable disable the SNMP protocol To navigate to the Options Menu from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 3 4 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 3 Features 4 Options 1 SNMP 2 QE3 Setup F4 Exit Figure 77 Options Menu Page 110 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System SNMP Menu Option 2 in the Options Menu invokes the SNMP Menu From this menu you can enable disable the SNMP protocol and set the TRAP IP address For details on SNMP refer to SNMP To invoke the SNMP Menu from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 3 2 2 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 3 Features 4 Options 1 SNMP 1 On Off 2 Set Trap IP F4 Exit Figure 78 SNMP Menu Rev K Page 111 of 176 QE3 Matrix
232. nadanaetocnsatestoddaes 59 Accuracy of dBm Values seen ETRAS SE ORdS ERR E RNC S a Yo lastacees 60 QE3 System Test osustexio ubi ei dips sdioee ek ODuM eU siestas Nu ARMUT S 60 DYSICHE SIZE cd o ricotta nd enema Gu LL c Led 61 Error Reports seda otia ed A nci aha dide uta d ad 61 System EQLOES cednssasicosapeassdectassescseecpandescatoassscanassendasentcdetassencaeavacseassurenscs 62 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Gain Control rH EUN 63 Manual Gam COontrOLl4s ette RECO IRIS 63 Manual Gain Control Limitations ccccccccccecessessensecececececeesensaeceeeeeens 65 Automate Gaium Control iuit eite es NAERA 65 Sinple Mode seran nnna ts RO ea astute annu enn Sce oL Me 66 SIMPIEAGC SOIL asse vdicesali du e saannidsy UL c udo ET E 66 Advanced Mode isis RnB ENRIQUE 67 Auvanceu AGG Seflpiaasdescaidseneiekitvihe a A dope lale eu EA tUe aros Ue 68 Automatic Gain Control Limitations eese 69 NUN VE 70 Why an RS 485 Section Lei casse tease A pIe due P VES SEIsR Osa S iiXR Is eipis do Un ed 71 RS 485 BASICS NM tastets seso sesas sis 71 Balanced vs Unbalanced esses eene 71 Voltasges and S19nall p uie ete nest eiut tet techie ed leeds 12 Noise Immunity esee itre aai er EEEE N EEE EE R O E ART 12 Number Of DeVICes ie E esee diee e aa aaan eiae ERES ONA 73 Master Slayex x i ere bee E ee EO RENTEN DETUR TE ER a 73 Aa Ware and 2 WITS SysLellls 903i sieisen d NIE I N
233. nd Format 02 XX XX 45 47 XX XX XX 2E XX XX XX 2E STX ADR ADR E G nn nn nn nn nn nn XX XX XX 2E XX XX XX 03 XX nn nn nn nn nn nn ETX CHK Example Command 02 46 46 45 47 30 31 30 2E 30 30 30 2E STX F F E G 0 1 0 0 0 0 30 30 30 2E 30 30 31 03 2D 0 0 0 0 0 1 ETX CHK Set Gateway 10 0 0 001 Positive Response 06 46 46 45 47 03 07 ACK F F E G ETX CHK Note The change will take place in ten seconds If DHCP is enabled the static gateway value will not be used until DHCP is turned off and the unit has been reset Page 56 of 157 Rev CL EI Set Ethernet IPAddress This command sets the static Ethernet IP Address Command Format 02 XX XX 45 49 XX XX XX 2E XX STX ADR ADR E nn nn nn XX XX XX 2E XX XX XX 03 XX nn nn nn nn nn nn ETX CHK Example Command 02 46 46 45 49 30 31 30 STX F E E 0 0 30 30 30 2E 32 33 34 03 27 0 0 0 2 3 4 ETX CHK Set IP Address 10 0 0 234 Positive Response 06 46 46 45 49 03 09 ACK F FE E ETX CHK Note 2E 30 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XX XX 2E nn nn 30 30 2E 0 0 The change will take place in ten seconds If DHCP is enabled the static IP address will not be used until DHCP is turned off and the unit has been reset Rev CL Page 57 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol ELD Ethernet Lock Disable This command disables the Ethernet lock If the lock has been enabled using th
234. nd Passwords mr Ne MEO UM 147 Factory Defaults for Access Control M DE 154 Factory Settings Code Number 89 Group ID sas uec tts 151 How to Set Group Privileges 151 Keypad Access Control 141 Lock Keypad Screen 142 Locking and Unlocking Connections n 48 PASS WOF a ane nanna 138 Password Entry Screen 144 Port Access Control Enable Disable Sereen Ts eh A open tectis 140 Port Level Access Control 8 Privilege Groups 138 151 Resetting the QEC Port Access Password ortos 40 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Set Access Screen 149 150 153 Set OEC Port Screen assa 4 Setting User Access 150 System ACCESS ecc ete teen 139 Turning Off an Output 48 Unlock Keypad Code 143 Unlock Keypad Screen 143 User Accounts eeeee 138 146 User Permissions ssssss 7 NYS rT Saati sce este aes ud cni duco dis 138 Valid Passwords and Length 149 Access Control Defaults 154 Access Control Menu 141 Access Control Overview 138 Access Control Setup Menu 146 Accidental Crosspoint Changes 48 138 Accounts Admin Account eussss 155 User Accounts Lei tores 146 Valid Passwords and Length 149 Accuracy of dB
235. nd Sent 02 XX XX 4C 30 30 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR L 0 0 1 ETX CHK Lock output 1 to currently connected input Positive Response 06 XX XX 4C 03 XX ACK ADR ADR L ETX CHK Rev CL Page 71 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol LC Lock Crosspoint Check This command returns the port number that locked the output Returns NAK if output is unlocked Command Sent 02 XX XX 4C 46 30 30 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR L Q0 0 1 ETX CHK Check output 1 Positive Response 06 XX XX 4C 46 30 35 03 XX ACK ADR ADR L C 0 5 ETX CHK PORT Physical connection 0 Local Keypad LCD 1 Remote Port B 2 Control In Port C 8 Ethernet Port A 4 Ethernet Port B 5 Telnet 6 SNMP Page 72 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol M Messages This command will return the contents of the message queue The message queue contains up to four alarm or information messages concerning the health of the system System monitoring is only implemented on the XRM and QE3 The following events will cause a message to be put in the message queue 1 Power supply error 2 Cooling fan error 3 Fault detected in RF signal path 4 RF input level out of set bounds 5 LCD not responding 6 Requested re route 7 Cards offline 8 Output Input RF level balance alarm For the QRM the following events will cause a message to be put ifcn the message queue 1 Power supply failure
236. nding input by clicking the output and selecting a different input You can cancel one output s pending input without changing or canceling any other pending inputs Select the output and then select the input that it is currently connected to it This will erase the pending input Page 158 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Locking Cross points If necessary an output can be locked Locked outputs cannot be changed until they are unlocked To lock an output click on the output to open the Change Crosspoint window Click on the unchanged button and it will switch to locked pending status Click on the OK button to accept the change The pending lock column will show lock You can still cancel the action by clicking the CANCEL button To lock the output click the APPLY button The small square icon next to the output will show a small padlock to indicate the locked status Unlocking Cross points A locked cross point cannot be changed until it has been unlocked Click on the locked output to display the Change Crosspoint window and make the desired change Click the enter button to execute the Unlock command and unlock the crosspoints Locking and Unlocking the Keypad On the main window is a screen for locking and unlocking the QE3 front panel keypad The primary purpose of this lock is to prevent unintentional changes If desired you can override the keypad lock from the matrix keypad by entering the 3 digit code 857 If
237. ne gt Alarm description Example Alarm Card 1 XROOO offline Card 1 top right upper card at XRO 00 has gone offline Rev CL Page 21 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XRM Input Output RF level balance Alarm This SNMP trap is only active when auto routing is disabled The command indicates that the RF level difference between the output and connected input on an RF path has a difference greater than the customer set difference This condition will send 2 traps One indicates the output and the second if successful will report back the card where the failure is detected Complete trap1 Path Fault 9 WWWXXOutputY Y Complete trap2 Output card Z of 8 gt Input card Z of 8 gt Bridge card Z of 4 gt Description structure Path Fault 80 Alarm description WWW Type of unit indicating the alarm XX Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board lt OutputYY gt Unit output number 1 32 lt Z gt Bridge Output Input card number Example Alarm lt Path Fault XRMO0Output5 gt lt Output card 2 of 8 gt Output 5 at XRM 00 has RF balance fault Output card 2 is determines to be the cause of the fault Page 22 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol QE3 RF Card Offline This SNMP trap command indicates an RF card that was operating has stopped responding Indicates a fail
238. ned during the design of your system They remain the same unless you are changing your matrix requirements and upgrade the system The connections have been set up specifically for your system design You can always change the connections going into and out of the matrix system but the connections between the system modules are set for your specific configuration and must remain constant Rev K Page 9 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Types of Modules A QE3 matrix switching system may use four types of modules Your system may or may not contain each type of module The type and number of modules used to build your system and how they are connected together depends on your particular configuration The module types and their general functions are listed in the following table Controller Module UCM Receives user commands and controls other modules Input Distribution Module QED Accepts RF signal system inputs and outputs them to Matrix Switching Modules Matrix Switch Module QE3 Output Switch Module QEO Accepts RF signals from the Input Distribution Modules and sends them to an Output Switch Module Accepts RF signals from the Matrix Switch Modules and routes them to the appropriate system output s Table 1 QE3 Switching System Module Page 10 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Acronyms Quintech uses several acronyms in this manual to refer to the QE3 system compo
239. needs terminated thus both XR Bus terminators need to both be installed The system will not route or operate correctly without the terminators installed XR Bus Terminators There are two XR Bus terminators shipped with every system These terminators are placed at the ends of the daisy chain For a multiple unit system the terminator would go on the first QE3 XR Bus in port and the last unit in the chain on the unused XR Bus out port The terminators are labeled XRBUS terminator These terminators are not interchangeable with other non Quintech Ethernet type terminators Rev K Page 27 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System XR Bus Terminators for 64x64 System The XR Bus terminators need to be installed on the XR bus ports on a 64x64 6RU system The system will not route or operate correctly without the terminators installed The terminators are required on a 64x64 system because the XR Bus begins and ends at the QE3 XR BUS XRM w INTEGRATED CONTROLLER TERMINATOR Ooo Page 28 of 176 XR BUS OUT XR BUS OUT XR BUS TERMINATOR XR BUS XR BUS IN OUT HE Figure 3 XR Bus Connections Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Quintech UCM Ports An integrated controller has one Quintech UCM port A IRU stand alone controller will have two Quintech UCM ports labeled Quintech UCM In and Quintech UCM Out These ports have two separate functions They can be used for communications with remote contro
240. nents To avoid confusion the acronyms and their definitions are listed below QE3 SYSTEM Also referred to as the matrix system or switching system This references the entire system as a whole QE3 Referred to as the matrix switch module This module accepts RF signals from the input distribution module QED and sends them to an output switch module QEO This is the main switching module of the system UCM Universal Controller Module Also referred to as a remote unit This IRU module is a system add on for QE3 systems This module will receive commands and send them to the main QE3 controller QED Referred to as the input distribution module This module accepts RF signal system inputs and outputs them to matrix switching modules QE3 QEO Also referred to as the output switch module This module accepts signals from the matrix switch module QE3 and routes them to the appropriate system output LCD Liquid Crystal Display Refers to the front panel display of the main controller module UCM RF Radio Frequency General term for the range of frequencies switched in our systems LNB Low Noise Block Refers to the amplifier located at the focal point of a satellite dish antenna It amplifies the very weak received satellite signal then converts the received signal to a lower frequency Rev K Page 11 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System System Modules Description Controller Module Each matrix system is s
241. nexpected response from the XRM system If the XRM system receives a correctly formatted valid command but was unable to execute the command you will receive this message Negative response sent 15 XX XX 66 03 XX NAK ADR ADR f ETX CHK Page 156 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Serial Interface A new command can be sent to the matrix as soon as a response to the previous command is received If a break in communication occurs while a message is being transmitted the input buffer will automatically clear and no error response will be given Serial Parameters Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Protocol STX ETX Flow Control None The program sending commands must wait until a response is received from the matrix controller before sending another command SRM Control In Serial Pinouts RS 232 RS 422 485 1 GND 1 GND 2 TXD 2 Not Used 3 RXD 3 Non Inverting Transmit 4 DTR 4 Non Inverting Receive 5 GND 5 GND 6 DSR 6 Inverting Transmit 7 RTS 7 Not Used 8 CTS 8 Not Used 9 Not Used 9 Inverting Receive Note on the RS 232 port No null modem or crossover cable is needed on the serial port Note on RS 485 mode RS 485 is compatible with RS 422 RS 485 allows multiple devices on a single shared serial bus The matrix unit uses a 4 wire RS 485 inte
242. nication links in a system QE3 System Test Tt Change Options F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 40 QE3 System Test Menu Page 60 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System System Size The System Size test is based on the number of system inputs and outputs in a standard QE3 configuration If the system is a GRU 64x64 or smaller only that unit s boards will be tested If the system is a standard configuration 128x128 the system test is performed upon 4 input and output modules each and 4 QE3 switching modules Every board in all 12 of the modules will be tested Error Reporting If the test finds a non responsive board it pauses and displays the error on the front panel The error lists the module label followed by the card s type followed by the card s location Error found at input module QI1 1 Input card 1 never responded to poll Error found at output module QO2 2 Output card 5 never responded to poll System error found at module QA2 Input card 5 offline Pressing the F4 key exits the test without continuing Pressing any other key continues the test Rev K Page 61 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System System Errors The System Error option assists with the integration of non Quintech hardware into a Quintech system When set to YES any command failures will be ignored Quintech recommends leaving this parameter set to NO so all errors will be reported System Errors On Off Tt Change Options
243. nt panel Same applies to the other 1RU ports as well Front Panel Protected Output Display An output if protected will display protected on the front panel Out 1 In 1 Output1 Input 1 Protected Status 1 F4 Exit Figure 102 Front Panel Protected Output Display Page 130 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Unprotect Output An output can also be un protected from the front panel In this instance the F3 Un P option will be available on the Monitor and Control screen as shown below If the F3 option is not present then the output was protected from some other port or unit address Out 1 1 Output 1 gt Input 1 F3 Un P Protected Status 1 F4 Exit Figure 103 Protected Rev K Page 131 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Naming Inputs and Outputs I O Names Options Menu The I O Names option is found under the configuration setup Option 4 of the System Setup Menu displays the I O Names Menu screen To navigate to the I O Names Menu screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 1 4 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 1 System Setup 4 O Names 1 Set Input Names 2 Set Output Names 3 Reset to Default F4 Exit Figure 104 I O Names Menu Page 132 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Set Input Names Option 1 of the I O Names Menu displays the Set Input Names screen To invoke the Select Input Names screen fro
244. ntact Quintech for service Front Panel displays download firmware and it won t do anything You are in firmware download mode The only solution is to download firmware or cycle power 1 Cycling power will not corrupt or change any settings 2 Downloading firmware may overwrite the entire system and set all values back to Quintech defaults Refer to the Load Firmware section There is a lot of crosstalk between the signals It may be necessary to balance your signal levels Leveling the signals attenuating stronger signals amplifying weaker signals ensures that all signals will be passing at approximately the same level and will help to minimize any crosstalk The keypad is locked Press 857 I am a qualified technician and would like to try to fix a problem myself A warranty covers all units Quintech or a representative of Quintech should make any repairs Removing any part of the chassis will void the warranty Additionally attempting to repair a unit could be dangerous Rev K Page 169 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Front Panel LEDs The front panel LED is not This indicates the unit is not receiving power lit 1 Check to see if the power switch is in ON 2 Make sure that the AC cables are properly connected 3 Check the fuse located just above the power cord if equipped 4 Verify with a volt meter that the AC source is available If the problem
245. nternal adjusting The manual dB value is what is applied to the output regardless of signal strength This command has 2 formats Both commands turn on the manual gain control for the output One sets the output to the previous manual dB value The other sets the value to the dB value given in the command QRM An output can be set to automatic or manual gain control not both at the same time Valid values for QRM manual gain control are between 30 dBm and 16 dB For the QRM the tenths value must be either O or 5 LTE An output can only be set to manual gain control because the LTE does not support AGC automatic gain control Valid values for LTE attenuation are between 0 00 dB and 31 75 dB Because the LTE accepts attenuation values in 0 25 dB increments the tenths value must be either 0 2 5 or 7 and it is interpreted as follows 0 00 2 25 5 50 and 7 75 For example if the value 13 7 is sent the LTE will set attenuation for the specified output at 13 75 dB Command Format 1 02 XX XX 58 47 4D 4F XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X G M O OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 ETX CHK Command Format 2 02 XX XX 58 47 4D 4F XX XX XX 40 2B 2D XX XX STX ADR ADR X G M O OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 a oe 10s is 2E XX 03 XX tenths ETX CHK OUT Output Must be between 001 and the number of system outputs Always 3 characters Tenths must be either 0 or 5 values valid in 5 increments Example Command Sent
246. nto the dialog box then click OK In the resulting command line window type ipconfig all The IP address Subnet mask and default gateway will be listed 6 Copy the unzipped upgrade kit to your root C or D drive A directory path with more than 104 characters causes problems with some PC operating systems Rev K Page 105 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Features Menu Option 3 in the Configuration Menu displays the Features Menu The Features Menu enables you to configure optional mode of operation for a controller module These options include the Controller Mode LNB Power if equipped SNMP Protocol enabled and whether access control is in effect or disabled for various control ports To navigate to the Features Menu screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 3 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 3 Features 1 Control Mode 2 Priority Mode 3 Access Control 4 Options F4 Exit Figure 74 Features Menu Note The Access Control option only appears in the Features Menu when you are logged into the controller as Admin and access control for local is enabled For a description of Access Control see the Access Control section Page 106 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Set Control Mode Option 1 of the Features Menu displays the Set Control Mode screen This setting need may only need to be changed if you upgrade to more th
247. ntroller Record the Protocol version and Firmware version that appears on LCD during bootup or press 1 System Options followed by 1 Firmware version and this information will display for 5 seconds Protocol version Firmware version 4 Record the serial address of the main controller under the Interface Options menu Serial address If this address is changed at any time you must re initialize the system from main controller Rev K Page 83 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System 5 Record the matrix sizes under the configuration menu Matrix size inputs Matrix size outputs 6 Record the QE3 module sizes under the configuration menu QE3 Module size inputs QE3 Module size outputs 7 Record the QEO module size under the configuration menu QEO size input rows 8 Set main as the control mode 9 Set the remote port termination to ON 10 Power down the main controller 11 Power up the first remote Make sure the Protocol and Firmware versions match the numbers recorded in step 3 If the numbers don t match contact Quintech to determine whether the different versions are compatible 12 Set the serial address to an address between 00H FEH The chosen address must be different from main address step 4 and any other remote address 13 Set remote as the control mode 14 Set remote port termination corectly 15 Make sure the size settings on remote match the numbe
248. ny other system input It can be connected to any valid output if other QE3 features allow the connection Q SENSE On Off The Q SENSE feature can also be enabled or disabled individually per input This on off setting like the set threshold point only applies to the primary input The on off setting for the backup input is not examined before a Q SENSE action is taken The action will only be executed if the primary input Q SENSE switch is on Q SENSE Action The only action taken by the Q SENSE feature is in the event that the primary input RF level drops below the user defined threshold level If the primary input is Q SENSE enabled and the RF threshold properly set then the Q SENSE function is executed by the system for that Q SENSE input pair At that time all outputs that are currently connected to the primary input are switched automatically to the backup input This action only applies to that particular Q SENSE configured input pair No Q SENSE pair will be acted upon unless it s primary input had a failure Marked Outputs Any output that has been switched to a backup input by the Q SENSE feature is internally saved to memory This information will remain until the user restores the primary input by a restore command from the front panel or protocol command or the user changes the status of the output This saved Q SENSE information is deleted if the output status is changed This includes protect unprotect lock unlock and set
249. o decimal format to use this command correctly This field is ignored for QRM EXAMPLE Dials read left to right or for QE3 from top to bottom 032 F You are only concerned with the 2F on the right 2F Hex converts to 47 decimal So you would use 047 in the ADR field to write to that unit Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 46 31 30 30 34 37 03 XX STX ADR ADR X F 1 0 0 4 7 ETX CHK Report Fan 1 condition on XRM unit at address 47D or 2FH Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 46 33 35 30 32 34 03 XxX STX ADR ADR X F 3 9 0 2 4 ETX CHK Report Fan 3 condition on QEO unit at address 024D or 18H Page 108 of 157 Rev CL Response Format 06 XX XX 58 46 20 46 ACK ADR ADR X F Space F 52 50 4D XX XX XX XX 61 R P M condition a Condition Good or Slow Example Response 06 XX XX 58 46 20 ACK ADR ADR X F Y 4D 20 47 6F 6F 64 20 M S G O O a YT XF Fan 2 RPM Good at 2475 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol 61 6E 20 FanNumber 20 a n Space X Space 74 20 RPM RPM RPM RPM t Space X X X X or Fail 46 61 6E 20 32 20 52 50 F a n NS 2 ES R P 61 74 20 32 34 37 35 03 XX a d ORENSE 4 7 5 ETX CHX Page 109 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XGA Set Gain Control to Automatic Mode This is a QE3 command not an XRM command Gain control can be set to manual or automatic This command turns on automatic gain control for the specifie
250. o the unit not the static IP configuration The controller keeps Turn off DHCP The DHCP is assigning an address to the booting up to an IP address unit To use the static IP configuration turn off DHCP that is not the same as the one I had entered in the IP configuration The controller will not 1 Make sure that the serial address in the commands being respond to protocol sent is either set as FF or matches the serial address set commands on the Ethernet for the controller Port 2 Make sure that the controller IP address matches the target address used by the control computer 3 Make sure that the mask and or gateway are correctly set for your network 4 If the controller is connected directly to the network port of another computer make sure that a crossover cable is being used 5 If the controller is connected to a router or switch make sure that a standard cable is being used that the router detects the connection to the controller and that the router is connected to the same network as the control computer 6 Make sure the Ethernet lock has not been enabled using the ELE command 7 Make sure that the control computer is sending the commands to port 9100 8 Check with the administrator that no other program is using port 9100 for Ethernet communications Rev K Page 173 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Remote Not Working Remote Controller is not working correctly or at
251. om a protocol command or from the front panel An unprotected output is just like all other regular outputs Protection feature is port specific An output can only be un protected from the same port it was protected from Protected vs Locked A protected output cannot be locked A locked output cannot be protected An output cannot be locked and protected at the same time A locked output cannot be changed until it is unlocked A protected output cannot be changed until it is un protected Commands An output can only be protected or unprotected from a protocol command or from the front panel Refer to the SP SU and SC commands in the protocol document An output can also be protected from the input select screen as shown below Out 1 In 1 Output1 Input 1 Fl1 Enter F2 Protect Change f F4 Exit Figure 101 M amp C Rev K Page 129 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Ports Specific The protected mode is port specific A command to protect an output must be cleared by un protecting it from the same port 0 Local keypad LCD 3 Ethernet Port A 5 Telnet Remote Port B 4 Ethernet Port B 6 SNMP 2 Control In Port C Address Specific The protected mode is also serial address specific This normally only applies to users that are using additional IRU remote controllers in their system If a user protects an output from a remote I RU controller front panel that output can only be unprotected from that same I RU controller fro
252. ommand 2 15 00 2 15 01 2 15 02 2 15 03 2 15 04 2 15 05 2 15 06 2 15 07 2 15 08 2 15 09 2 15 10 2 15 11 BB X X BBC X BBR X BE BER BO BOR BR PK lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt BRO BT BTR x lt lt X lt gt lt lt X gt X lt gt lt gt lt X X x X X lt gt lt X lt X lt gt X lt gt X gt X lt DK X lt gt X lt X lt X lt X X lt gt X lt gt X lt X X x x lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt DK OK X OX DK X lt OX X lt OX X lt gt lt OS OS gt lt x lt x lt gt x lt DK X lt X lt lt X lt X X X DK X DK DK X X lt Z X OK DK DK DK X lt OK X lt OX X lt X lt X lt gt X lt X X lt gt lt DK X lt X lt X lt O lt gt lt X gt lt Xx gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt X gt lt X gt lt X lt X X XX X X X X X lt lt gt X lt OX gt lt gt X lt lt lt gt lt gt lt x lt gt lt gt lt gt lt XXX lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt X XXX X gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt X lt X X X X X
253. ort Access Control Enable Disable DSCIGOIE s ec SEES 140 Reset Password Screen 40 RS 485 Termination Screen 75 Serial Address sssss 39 Serial Mode sees 39 Serial Mode Screen 39 Serial Termination Screen 44 Set Control Mode Screen 107 i 11 QE3 Matrix Switching System Set Input Names Screen 134 Set Output Names Screen 135 Set OEC Port 1 es 41 Set QEC Port Screen 41 SNMP Menut 3 erre aedes 111 SRM Module Size Screen 94 SRO Module Size Screen 95 96 System Options Menu 87 System Options Menu 87 System Overview Differences Between Main and RGA Ue cen ERI SM 79 Feats P EET 3 Modules isse mee Tete esa toad 9 Types of Modules 10 System Setup VO Names Menu 120 127 133 Load Firmware Screen 100 Model Number Type Screen 92 Module Sizes Menu 93 Set Input Names Screen 134 Set Output Names Screen 135 SRM Module Size Screen 94 System Setup Menu 90 SYSTEM SIZES i asse e bor e erede Ege 9 System Upgrades oes etse 9 TC PAD oo ene tatur dus 32 Broadcast Address 33 Command Packet
254. ory settings code number F1 1 System Setup 2 Model ModelType QE3 Model Num 2500 F1 Type F2 Model F4 Exit Figure 61 Model Number Type Page 92 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Module Sizes These settings are to support the connection of Quintech legacy equipment to the SRM SRO Control port and for custom QE3 system setup Option 3 in the System Setup menu displays the Module Sizes Menu This menu allows you to select option 1 SRM Size or option 2 SRO size From this menu press 1 to specify the number of inputs and outputs per SRM switching module Press 2 to specify the number of input rows per SRO Note that option 4 only appears for systems that have more than 64 inputs To navigate to the Module Sizes Menu from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 1 3 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 1 System Setup 2 Module Sizes 1 SRM Module Size 2 SRO Module Size 3 QE3 XRM SRM 4 QED Setup F4 Exit Figure 62 Module Sizes Rev K Page 93 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System SRM Module Size Option 1 of the Module Size Menu will load the SRM Module Size Screen This setting should never be changed unless the internal hardware of the SRM module has been changed To navigate to the SRM Module Size screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 1 3 1 2 System Options 1 Configurat
255. osseess 64 Figure 44 Set Up Manual Gain Control eee eee eee esset entente tne tn ann 64 Figure 45 AGC Mod rr 65 Figure 46 AGC Mode Select tdt pretiu to Coo E sasdesoniiauel stiveciscussceaveyneeasen 67 Ign 47 Q SENSE Mem P 70 Figure 48 Balanced Line Interface cicseccsnscesesecesceceaseecncsocseesssesntesedencaveceosecs 72 Figure 49 Serial Termination sessoessosseesoesoossoesoesooesoesoesooesoesoeseoesosssessoossessossoossessose 75 Figure 50 Quintech UCM Termination esssessoesoeseesooesoesoeseoesoesoeseoesossoeseossossoeesossosssose 77 Figure 51 Serial Control In RS485 Connection Termination Examples 78 Figure 52 Control Mode oie iiie tera ica deepi base a dpborDa scs ips ea serR DAS eL Rid Ree R eU 80 Figure 53 Display Control Mode Init Remotes Menu eeeeeeeeee eerte eene 82 Figure 54 Remote Initialization eee eee e eee eee eene eene tnnt en natns etn setas season 85 Figure 55 System Options Menu eese eee e cette ee eese en seen sesta asse easet es se tss se eno 87 Figure 56 Configuration Menu Pass code eee eee eee eee entes enses etna anu 88 Figure 57 Configuration Menu eirisre itai reae peto tao epus n eroe T es bi Ure ep rea Dux eS ro an eun 89 Figure 58 System SetiD Lucensis etc ce LE queer tpa t ibne c PPS KIC S HAB MEE epu TEMPE SUC USC S EEERNE SUN RE
256. output number Response Format 06 XX XX 58 52 42 XX XX XX 2E XX 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X R B TENS ONES s 1 10 ETX CHK Example Command 02 XX XX 58 52 42 31 32 33 35 42 30 32 49 34 03 XX STX ADR ADR X R B 0 2 3 5 I 0 2 I 4 ETX CHK Check RF level on XRM unit at address 235 input card 2 Input 4 Example Response 06 XX XX 58 52 42 2D 31 32 2E 36 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X R B 1 2 6 ETX CHK RF level read 12 6 dBm NOTE Some firmware releases do not support this command Refer to the firmware release notes at the beginning of this document for details Rev CL Page 135 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XRC RF Crosspoint Signal Level Check This command will report the RF level in dBm along an entire path through a XRM matrix system The XRD and XRO fields will report no signal for matrices consisting of a single XRM Command format XRC lt output nnn Response structure XRC XRD input nn n gt lt XRM input nn n gt lt XRM output nn n XRO output nn n gt Example Command 02 XX XX 58 52 43 30 30 35 03 XX STX ADR ADR X R C 0 0 9 ETX CHK Check RF level on matrix output 5 Example Response 06 XX XX 58 52 43 3A 3A 2D 31 32 2E 36 3A ACK ADR ADR X R C 1 2 S 6 2D 31 31 2E 30 3A 3A 03 XX 1 1 2 0 ETX CHK No XRD XRM input RF level read 12 6 dBm XRM output RF level read 11 0 dBm No XRO
257. p can bus error reporting The can bus is the main link between all the hardware and the main controller If the hardware experiences a problem it will be reported across the can bus These are the errors that are always placed in the message queue Now you have the option of displaying these errors on the front panel as well All can bus errors are placed into the message queue and also sent out in SNMP traps Refer to the protocol document 1 XR Bus Errors 2 Card Calibration 3 QEO Attenuation F4 Exit Figure 82 QE3 Setup Error currently reported to the front panel are card offline power supply offline temperature warning fan failed and output input dB difference The panel will display which type of box had the failure What the address of the failure is what type of card failed and what card number failed Do you want XR bus errors displayed on this LCD panel Yes Fl Change F4 Exit Figure 83 Enable Errors Page 114 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Select yes and the can bus alarms will be displayed on the front panel The error message will remain displayed until a user presses any key on the keyboard Card calibration is for setting up initial hardware at Quintech Users are advised not to enter this menu QEO Input Attenuation QEO s currently support input attenuation QEO Input attenuation is a set value of attenuation that is to be applied to the current QEO input QEO inputs are attenua
258. parate communication busses and must be terminated as such summary So now we understand from the previous sections that Quintech RS 485 communications only needs to terminate the ends of the cables and we only need to terminate the receivers Internally the controller adds a termination resistor and two bias resistors when termination is turned on Front Panel RS 485 Termination To invoke the RS 485 Termination screen from the main menu key sequence 2 2 2 System Options 2 Interface Options Scroll to Serial Termination and press F1 to select Control In Off Remote Ports On F1 On F2 Off F4 Exit Figure 50 Serial Termination Rev K Page 75 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Which Controllers in My System Should be RS 485 Terminated RS 485 Port Termination From our discussion you should now know that only the first and last controllers in the daisy chain should have remote termination turned on If there is only one controller and there is no RS 485 bus leave remote termination off If there are only two controllers both should be set with remote termination on If there are any more than two controllers only the first and last controllers in the remote daisy chain will be RS 485 remote terminated RS 485 Serial Control In Port Termination The Serial Control In port can be configured for RS 485 communications If the port is configured for RS 232 or RS 422 communications termination should be off
259. peration is based on the implementation of user accounts and privilege groups A user must login with a valid username and password in order to gain access to the matrix system In addition each user account is assigned to a privilege group The ability of a group to change an input output connection is set for each individual output These features implement access control on both the control port and at the level of an individual cross point Access Control Overview Access control was created for customers who had problems with unauthorized changes being made to their switch settings If this is not a problem you can disable access control in any combination on all five ports If access control is disabled on a communications port anyone using that port has the ability to change any setting or cross point connection on the QE3 system If access control is enabled on a port a user must login with an assigned name and assigned password They will then be pre assigned permissions The user logs into an account that the Admin has previously set up This account in turn assigns output permissions to the user Thus if access control is enabled for a port a user can only change an output if they have permission from the Admin to change that specified output The ability of a user to change an input output connection cross point is set for each individual output These features implement access control on both the control port and at the level o
260. perature 55 Rey K QE3 Matrix Switching System IP Configuration with DHCP Off 43 IP Configuration with DHCP On 43 Isolating AC Noise 21 Keypad Keypad Access Control 141 Lock Keypad Screen 142 Unlock Keypad Code 143 Unlock Keypad Screen 143 Keypad Access Control 141 CD mc dete uo R A 11 LCD Status Monitoring 5 LCD Status Monitoring 5 LEDs Power LEDS nitet 22 TNT eevee das decree past ee oenaeracinesuaees 11 LNB Power Supplies 21 LNB Poet sists ces dedos idee tas 171 LNB Power Supplies 21 Load Firmware 100 Load Firmware Screen 100 Local c 139 Lock Keypad Screen 142 Locking and Unlocking Connections 48 Locking and Unlocking the Keypad 160 Login Admin Default Login Password 155 Main Menu eee 34 Main vs Remote Mode 79 Main Remote Control Mode essssss 719 Differences Between Main and Remote evt vies 79 Initializing Remotes 81 Main vs Remote Mode 719 Set Control Mode Screen 107 System Commands from the Main Controller eeeeeeese 81 System Commands from the Remo
261. pre decay number is indicated by the s or ms characters The user must specify a number for both the input and pre decay time If the user wants to set this value to zero then the user must specify 0 character in the pre decay time Command Format 1 02 XX XX 58 47 54 50 44 XX a yi 40 STX ADR ADR X G T P D IN XX Se ENS 73 XX03 XX PDT S wo S ETX CHK Command Format 2 02 XX XX 58 47 54 50 44 XX Sow ds 40 STX ADR ADR X G T P D IN EDS XX EE 6D 73 03 XX PDT 5 tg us m S ETX CHK IN Input port Must be between 1 and the number of system inputs PDT Pre decay time Value in seconds or 1 1000 seconds wait period If the user specifies ms then valid values range from 0 to 60 000 If the user specifies s then valid values range from 0 to 60 Can vary from 1 to 5 characters Numbers only no characters Page 126 of 157 Rev CL Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 54 STX ADR ADR X G T Set auto gain control Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 54 STX ADR ADR X G T Set auto gain control Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 58 47 54 STX ADR ADR X G T S6 395 304 30 6D 6 5 0 0 m XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol 50 44 38 40 32 6D 73 3 XX P D 8 2 m S ETX CHK pre decay time on input 8 to 2 1000 of a second 50 44 38 40 32 73 3 XX P D 8 2 S ETX CHK pre decay time on input 8 to 2 seconds 50 44 3
262. put RF Levels Menu Page 58 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Read Output RF dBm Signal Level Out 1 Output 1 35dBm Scroll 1 or Enter F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 37 Report Output RF Levels Menu Scroll through the outputs to get the desired number You can also explicitly enter the number on the keypad Press F1 to make the QE3 sample the output and retrieve a dBm value The value is displayed on the screen This feature is included to assist in determining where a system fault is located If the command fails to read a valid value a message screen will be displayed It there is no RF signal on that input the following screen will be displayed It will also detect and report if that particular input or XRD card is offline Out 1 No signal Output 1 detected Scroll 1 or Enter F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 38 RF Signal not detected Rev K Page 59 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System RF Board Offline Figure 39 RF Board not detected Accuracy of dBm Values The dBm values returned from a read is only accurate from 10dBm down to 50dBm This feature has been included to assist in determining where a system fault is located It is not intended to replace a spectrum analysis of the RF signal QE3 System Test QE3 system test is a diagnostic test used to find communications errors in the system and identify non responsive boards The test is based on the system setup and tests all boards and commu
263. ration factory settings code number F1 1 System Setup 4 I O Names 2 Set Output Names Output 1 l out 1 F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 107 Select Output to Assign Name Scroll through the outputs and when the desired output to be named is on the screen press F1 to select it This brings up a screen to write a name and assign it to the selected output The cursor moves to the bottom left at the first character in the current output s name Page 134 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Output 1 SattV51 F1 Done F2 F3 F4 Exit Figure 108 Write Name for Selected Output Use the scroll keys to select a letter or number Scrolling will bring up lower case letters upper case letters the numbers 0 9 and the space character Use F2 and F3 to move the cursor The length is 7 characters and if fewer characters are desired fill in the unwanted characters with the space character When scrolling it appears between the 9 and capital A Press F1 to accept the new name or at any time press F4 to exit the screen No name is assigned until the F1 key is pressed Assigning Names Using Protocol Commands Names can be assigned from the front panel Names can also be assigned using naming read and write commands included in the protocol Refer to the attached protocol document for further details Command Advantage Assigning a name from the keypad is limited to the alphabet and numbers 0 9 Using the proto
264. re Download Preparation 101 Firmware Upgrade Kit 101 Firmware Version eeeseem 49 Firmware Version Screen 50 Four Types of Modules 10 Front Panel Factory Settings Code Number 89 Front Panel Basics 34 Front Panel Hierarchy 35 Front Panel Interface 34 Screen Refresh ssssssss 34 Front Panel Basics 34 Front Panel Hierarchy 35 Front Panel Interface 34 Front Panel LEDs eee 171 Front Panel RS 485 Termination 75 Gain Flatness eese 8 General Parameters 158 General Problems 170 Get Fan Speed see 54 Get Input RF Level 56 Get Internal Temperature 55 Get Output RF Level 58 63 Get Output RF Levels Menu 58 59 63 Get Power Supply Status 54 Rev K Get Temperature Screen 55 Grounding o sc5 coc aesncee oet rn ihe oigo aoo eR 21 Group ACCESS uei eterni 152 Group ID esae ui o che ret 151 Group Output Permissions 149 152 Hexadecimal Address 39 Hierarchy Front Panel Hierarchy 35 How to Set Group Privileges
265. reen 94 SRO Module Size Screen 95 96 Unlock Keypad Screen 143 Select Input to Set Threshold Menu 53 Self Monitoring eere 3 Serial Quintech UCM Pin Definition 24 Serial Address sseees 32 39 Setting the Serial Address 39 TCP IP Serial Address 32 Valid Serial Addresses 40 Serial Control Adding Additional Remotes 83 Quintech UCM Port 20 Quintech UCM Port Crossover JAddpler eee enter s 30 I552 32 ren a u a as 25 RS 232 Advantages Disadvantages 26 R54 22 kot E E eae aasatens 26 RS 422 Advantages Disadvantages 26 RS AS 5 cp teste uo peius 26 Serial Address suusss 39 Serial Mode diode etra bae 39 Setting the Serial Address 39 Valid Serial Addresses 40 Serial Interface 1 10 Quintech UCM Port 20 E9233 esto RU OU RET 25 RS 232 Advantages Disadvantages 26 RSA ee boi blu ea 26 RS 422 Advantages Disadvantages 26 RS 485 uan ede eis 26 Serial Address soo ies 39 Seral Mode onreine anas 39 Serial Mode reste tiins 39 Serial Mode Screen 39 Serial Port Download Method 103 Serial Port Problems 173 Serial Termination ssse 44 Serial Termination Screen 44 Set Access Screen
266. rface Rev CL Page 157 of 157 QE3 Matrix Switching System QE3 Introduction The Quintech QE3 RF matrix switch is the most advanced matrix switch available from Quintech Electronics and Communications Inc It features a compact highly scalable design that covers the L Band 950 2150MHz operating frequency ranges Hot swappable component cards enable fast and easy replacement less than 30 seconds without requiring special tools or re cabling There are two control cards for operational control redundancy Included with the QE3 is an impressive array of control and monitoring options which provides redundant power and cooling ease of maintenance and enables you to quickly upgrade the system or add features in the field to maximize your investment Some of the features included in the QE3 Matrix Switch are e Hot swappable component cards with integrated RF monitoring and auto resetting current protection All hot swappable component cards can be replaced without disconnecting any cables e Dual hot swappable control modules e Programmable AGC Automatic Gain Control and attenuation on all inputs for signal strength balancing and optimum performance e Redundant auto ranging hot swappable power supplies with over temperature over voltage and output short protection e Long life cooling fans e Monitoring of RF levels power supply condition fan condition internal temperature and various other system parameters e Easy
267. ring The internal temperature of each QE3 module is continually monitored If the internal temperature rises above 50 degrees Celsius an error message is generated The message will indicate which unit in the system is running hot Page 4 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Power Supply Temperature Monitoring The internal temperature of each QE3 power supply is continually monitored If the internal temperature rises above 75 degrees Celsius an error message is generated The message will indicate which power supply and the specific unit address in the system is running hot Input RF Warning Level Threshold Monitoring This feature can be turned on or off An RF dBm monitoring level can be individually set for every input in a system If this feature is enabled for an input the RF level of each input is continually monitored If the input level drops below the specified threshold a warning message will be generated LCD Status Monitoring If the LCD keypad is unplugged an LCD keypad error message is generated Error Reporting When the QE3 system detects an error a detailed error message is generated This message contains specific information about the type of error where the error occurred and additional information such as input number output number card type card number unit label or address or power supply number This message by default will be placed in the message queue and be sent out in an SNMP trap The m
268. ring script execution For example the following script connects outputs 1 2 and 32 to inputs 4 5 and 6 respectively S001004 S002005 S032006 Copy these script commands into windows notepad Delete the last line feed character by placing the cursor after the 6 and press the DELETE key Extra characters even spaces and line feeds will cause the command to fail Save the file as QE3 1 scr Make sure to change the Save As type to All Files then type in the name and extension and click the SAVE button Open the program and connect to the QE3 From the tool menu open Run script Setup the execution parameters Use the no delay between commands and run only once defaults Click SET FILE and navigate to where the QE3 1 scr was saved Once open the three commands will be in the open window with empty boxes The script is ready to run Click the START button The three boxes should have a green check mark indicating success for all three commands A failed command will show a red X Failed Commands Since the script s only feedback is a pass or fail a failure may require additional investigation Check that the inputs and outputs are valid You can t set output 32 if the system only has 16 outputs Check if the output is locked Make sure the data used in the command is valid Check for correct command structure Rev K Page 165 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Event Log The Matrix Control Program contains a comm
269. rossover Adapter esie iste verona tke 30 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Crosspoint Connections 45 Crosspoint Control Access 151 Crosspoints Changing Connections 46 Crosspoint Connections 45 Crosspoint Control Access 151 Locking and Unlocking Connections dub uni ce tua eoi gas papse a opi ue 48 Monitoring Connections 46 Protection Against Accidental Crosspoint Connection Changes 48 Customizing Input and Output Names T a 163 Daisy Chaining 25 29 Data Encoding Scheme 72 DB 9 Quintech UCM Port 20 Default Names esce tec torie ets 137 Defining Group Output Permissions 149 152 Defining the Matrix Model 90 Defining the Number of Matrix Inputs and OUIpUts coros ee sn 90 Defining the Number of Module Inputs O tp ts 2 2 2 2 ti 90 Defining User Names and Passwords 147 Determining Group Access 152 DHCP DHCP ORBE siccis hetes secta ness eset 42 DHCP On Off Screen 42 Disabling DHCP 42 Enabling DHCGP 5 reete 42 IP Configuration with DHCP Off 43 IP Configuration with DHCP On 43 DHCP On Off onenean mitsana 42 DHCP On Off Screen 42 DHCP On Off Screen 42 DHCP Setv
270. rs or Groups 138 PASSWOLG ien inna 138 Password Entry Screen 144 Password Structure 145 Passwords Admin Default Login Password 155 Change Password Screen 148 Configuration Menu Pass Code CLEC E rende ieatlied 88 Defining User Names and Passwords E icut ptam p Su aeris 147 Factory Settings Code Number 89 Password Entry Screen 144 Password Structure 145 Reset Password Screen 40 Resetting the QEC Port Access Password 2e ue cete de dec tudin 40 Valid Passwords and Length 149 Passwords and Permissions 176 PC Control Ethernet Command Protocol 32 Ethernet Connections 32 Ethernet Portus ite 32 Quintech UCM Port 20 Serial Addres53 2 3 eed dci detes 39 Serial Mode utrius 39 JT eltiGt icu delice steed aats 33 XR Bus Connections 27 XR Bus POS caeci ee eide jaecaces 27 jpiproet Tm 33 Permissions Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Defining Group Output Permissions To m cavedeetiaaauey 149 152 User Permissions cccesecseceeeeeees 7 Pinouts Control Ports eese 24 Ethernet Cable Pinout 32 Serial Quintech UCM Pin Definition cC 24 Port Access Control Enable Disable SCTECN dele eset ie ttes ietaisiis 140 Port Descriptions eee 21
271. rs recorded in steps 5 6 and 7 16 Power down the remote 17 Repeat steps 11 through 16 for each additional remote in the system Page 84 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Power should now be off for all controllers 18 Power up the first remote Wait until it boots up and main screen appears 20 Power up second remote Wait until it boots up and main screen appears 2 Continue the power up procedure in this manner until all remotes are powered up and display the main menu 22 Power up the main controller last Watch the main controller screen carfully during boot up If setup was performed correctly the main controller will display a screen similar to this Initializing 0x04 Data 128 100 Figure 55 Remote Initialization The data number will cycle from 0 to 128 and the percent will go from 0 to 100 The main controller will also show an addition screen like this for every remote connected to it If you have a remote that the main controller did not cycle through you have a cable or set up problem Consult the troubleshooting guide then contact Quintech for technical support The main controller automatically searches for remotes every time it is turned on It detects all remotes that have been properly connected and configured including the newly added ones It will also download the crosspoint settings to all the remotes What Mode Should This Controller Be In First rule of thumb to remember There is al
272. s The first is to login as Admin on the keypad and view the current setting in the Set Access screen The second is to use the OS or IS command on one the control ports The OS or IS command will show whether or not the cross point is locked and the current group access settings for that port See the protocol document for more information Defining User Groups Each user can be assigned to 1 of 8 groups These groups are set with input and output permissions through the Set Access menu option Rev K Page 151 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Set Access The Set Groups menu option in the setup directory is where Admin sets permissions for the groups To navigate to the Set Groups screen from the main menu key sequence 3 3 3 3 Access Control 3 Setup 2 Set Groups User 1 2 user2 F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 124 Select User First select the user User Admin 1 New group ID 2 Fl Enter 1 Scroll F4 Exit Figure 125 Select User Once the user is selected you can scroll through the group IDs and press F1 to re assign the user to a new Group ID Page 152 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Firmware Specifics Command ZG is implemented on firmware versions 9 12 and higher The number of users is currently limited to 8 with user Group IDs from 1 to 8 A user s Group ID can be changed using the ZG command or the front panel Refer to the protocol document for more information In the Set Acc
273. s The message queue is then cleared and the new message entered to the queue The M command provides a log of messages and clears the queue and the alarm flag Messages not read via the M command or SNMP are lost when the queue overflows If the alarm condition is still present after the M command clears the queue it will be re entered to the queue The name flag indicates that an input or output name has been set or changed The affected input or output is put in the name queue The NQ command will read the queue and clear the name flag The NQ response contains an overflow flag If the name queue has overflowed then all input and output names should be checked Rev CL Page 53 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Command Format 02 XX XX 43 023 XX STX ADR ADR C ETX CHK Positive Responses 06 XX XX 43 80 03 XX ACK ADR ADR C 80 ETX CHK 06 XX XX 43 81 03 XX ACK ADR ADR C 81 ETX CHK 06 XX XX 43 82 03 XX ACK ADR ADR C 82 ETX CHK 06 XX XX 43 84 03 XX ACK ADR ADR C 84 ETX CHK 06 XX XX 43 89 03 XX ACK ADR ADR C 89 ETX CHK 06 XX XX 43 90 03 XX ACK ADR ADR C 90 ETX CHK 06 XX XX 43 83 03 XX ACK ADR ADR C 83 ETX CHK 06 XX XX 43 85 03 XX ACK ADR ADR C 85 ETX CHK 06 XX XX 43 91 03 XX ACK ADR ADR C 91 ETX CHK 06 XX XX 43 8B 03 XX ACK ADR ADR C 8B ETX CHK 06 XX XX 43 9F 03 XX ACK ADR ADR C 9F ETX CHK No changes have occurred Crosspoint changes h
274. s F4 to return to the group selection screen whereby you can choose another group for whom you want to set access From the Group Selection Screen press F4 to return to the Setup Menu Rev K Page 149 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Crosspoint Control Access The ability to change an individual cross point is controlled by the settings for a particular group There are 8 privilege groups with an associated group ID GID from 1 to 8 Each valid user is assigned to a specific privilege group By appropriately setting the control rights for the groups a matrix can be partitioned into several sub matrices with separate or overlapping domains The control privilege for a group is set one of two ways The ZA command can be used by the Admin UID 1 to allow or deny control of an output to a group See the protocol document for more information Output control can also be set from the keypad In the Set Access screen the group ID GID is shown and the scroll keys are used to scroll through the available groups Once F1 is used to select the desired group the screen switches to show an output along with the current access control setting Allow or Deny The current setting can be toggled by pushing F1 Output Access Control All QE3 firmware has output access control which can allow or deny a user access to any output Input Access Control QE3 firmware has output and input access control An F2 option will be at the top right of the s
275. s an output to input path in an XRM unit has been automatically re routed to another path by the XRM unit Complete trap Output XX YYYZZ Rerouted gt Description structure Output XX gt XX indicates the specific output of the unit that re routed Valid numbers are 1 32 This is not a system output but specific to the unit indicating the alarm lt YYY gt Type of unit indicating the alarm Typically XRM AZ Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board lt Rerouted gt Alarm description Example Alarm Output 23 XRMOO0 Rerouted gt XRM at address 00 re routed output 23 Output 4 XRM12 Rerouted gt XRM at address 12 re routed output 4 Rev CL Page 13 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol QE3 XRM Input RF Level Alarm This SNMP trap command indicates the RF level on an input has dropped below the customer set threshold Complete trap In XX RFLevel Q Y Y YZZ Failure Description structure In XX RFLevel XX indicates the specific input of the unit that dropped below the threshold lt YYY gt Type of unit indicating the alarm AA gt Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board lt Failure gt Alarm description Example Alarm In 12 RFLevel XRDO1 Failure Input 12 XRD at address 01 RF level dropped In 31 RFL
276. s and also accepts lower case letters This command sets a new name for an input or output This name is displayed on the front panel LCD of the matrix UCM for convenience when operating the unit manually Each name is limited to only 4 characters The only acceptable entries are ASCII SPACE 20h 0 9 30 39h and A Z 41 5A Command structure N I O nnn xxxx IO I for input and O for output nnn Inputor output number xxx 4 ASCII characters Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 4E 4F 30 30 31 03 XX STX ADR ADR N O 0 0 1 R C V 2 ETX CHK Assign output 1 the name RCV2 Positive Response 06 XX XX 4E 4F 30 30 31 03 XX ACK ADR ADR N O 0 0 1 ETX CHK Output 1 is named RCV2 Note This command will be accepted regardless of whether a user is logged in Rev CL Page 81 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol NR Name Read This command reads the convenience name for an input or output This name is displayed on the front panel LCD of the matrix UCM for convenience when operating the unit manually Each name can be up to seven characters long and can consist of any standard keyboard character If the name is less than seven characters the response is not padded Command structure NR I O nnn IO I for input and O for output nnn Input or output number Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 4E 52 4F 30 31 36 03 XX STX ADR ADR N R O 0 1 6 ETX CHK Read the name of output 16
277. s command will report the warning threshold set level of a given input This command works on XRM QE3 and QRM systems This command will report the set RF threshold warning level in dBm at a particular XRM QE3 or QRM matrix system input Return of 99 0 means monitoring is turned off for that particular system input Command Format 02 XX XX 58 52 57 XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X R W NUM NUM NUM ETX CHK NUM Valid input numbers from 001 to 999 Response Format 06 XX XX 58 52 57 2B 2D XX XX 2E XX 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X R W TENS ONES s 1 10 ETX CHK Example Command 02 XX XX 58 52 57 30 31 32 03 XX STX ADR ADR X R W 0 1 2 ETX CHK Check RF warning level on matrix input 12 Example Response 06 XX XX 58 52 57 2D 31 32 2E 36 03 XX T ACK ADR ADR X R W 2 s 0 ETX CHK Warning level set at input 12 0 dBm Example Response 06 XX XX 58 52 57 2D 31 32 2E 36 03 XX ACK ADR ADR X R W 9 9 0 ETX CHK Monitoring is turned off for that input NOTE Some firmware releases do not support this command Refer to the firmware release notes at the beginning of this document for details Rev CL Page 139 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol XWI Set RF Input Signal Warning Level RF signal monitoring is done on the XRM system inputs This level can be set differently for every input The signal is compared to this level and if the signal level is below this threshold l
278. s control for the port you are using requires Admin login My password to unlock the Ethernet port using the ELD command is not working Rev K Reset the password to Quintech from the front panel Page 175 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System For additional information or technical support please contact Quintech Toll Free 800 839 3658 Fax 724 349 1412 Email info quintechelectronics com Website http www quintechelectronics com Page 176 of 176 Rev K IGUBaSelL 32 renane nna 32 LOB ase Dosis nenatis 32 2 Byte Hexadecimal Address 39 4 Wire and 2 Wire Systems 73 AC Connections esee 21 AC IBIS sitio ot Soest teen us 21 PC PO WEE he contigs a RUE 21 AC Connections esee 21 Power LEDs editione 22 Redundanty ite itte 21 Voltages nn ei ea 22 AC Power Cords uio ratios 21 AC Redundancy sss 21 Access Control 106 138 Access Control Defaults 154 Access Control Menu 141 Access Control Overview 138 Access Control Setup Menu 146 Admin Account eese 155 Change Password Screen 148 Change User Name Screen 148 Configuration Menu Pass Code MIS MANT NOME PEE 88 Crosspoint Control Access 151 Defining Group Output Permissions Do rM ms 149 152 Defining User Names a
279. s this menu In order to define a user s name password or permissions you need to access the Setup screen From this screen you can select to modify user names and passwords or set output permissions To navigate to the Setup screen from the main menu key sequence 3 2 3 Access Control 3 Setup 1 Set Users 2 Set Access 3 Set Groups F4 Exit Figure 117 Access Control From this screen you can select to modify user names and passwords or set output permissions Rev K Page 145 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Defining User Names and Passwords Usernames and passwords are defined using the Set User screen Set User To define or modify a user name or their password choose Set Users in the Setup Menu The User Selection screen will be displayed To navigate to the User Selection screen from the main menu key sequence 3 3 1 3 Access Control 3 Setup 1 Set Users User fl 2 user2 F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 118 Select User In the User Selection screen the user s Group ID is shown followed by current username You can use the scroll keys to scroll through the available users Use the up and down arrow keys to select the user whose name or password you wish to modify As a default the user names Admin and user2 through user8 have already been defined when using the access control feature for the first time Depending on the firmware release the group for a particular
280. s through the QE3 system Alarm Condition Notification If an error condition occurs in the QE3 the QE3 generates an error message The message indicates where the error occurred and any other specific information about the alarm The alarm will be sent out in an SNMP trap The alarm is also placed in the message queue Refer to the protocol document for details The alarm message can also be routed to the front panel if that feature is so enabled Alarm Message Queue The alarm queue contains up to 4 current error messages that have not been read out of the queue The messages are unique for every possible error condition For example if Input 17 on QED unit 2 drops below the set threshold that specific information will be included in the message When the message is read out of the queue the queue is emptied Page 6 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System SNMP Traps If an error condition exists an SNMP trap is generated If more than 4 error conditions exist the entire message queue is loaded into the trap and sent to a user defined SNMP IP address The trap queue is then emptied and the next error message is placed in the message queue Input and Output RF Level Read The input and output RF level can be read at any time either from the front panel or by issuing a protocol command User Permissions Every QE3 matrix switching system provides the ability to administer user access control by allowing an administrator to
281. satellite and cable hfc industries Our Mission Quintech Electronics and Communications Inc produce reliable state of the art RF and microwave electronic systems We strive to exceed the expectations of our worldwide customers as they are the sole driver for our corporate existence Quality objectives are achieved through employee expertise attention to detail and an on going commitment to continual improvement Our Products Quintech RF matrix switch products automate RF signal routing Large numbers of signals from radar or satellite antennas communications systems cable networks etc can be instantly switched between various receiving or transmitting systems to meet changing demands A Quintech based signal distribution and management system provides increased reliability redundancy automation and agile reconfiguration capabilities along with space weight and cost savings through the efficient sharing of resources Our products reduce system malfunction due to equipment failure human error or lack of automation Rev K Page 1 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Just Some of our Customers Our customers include AT amp T Raytheon NBC CNN CCTV PCCW Lucent Boeing British Telecom ESPN Time Warner United States Department of Defense Lockheed Martin Harris Corp and you Page 2 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System System Overview The QE3 matrix switch is a collection of one or more electronic modules wor
282. set up user accounts with names passwords and permissions These accounts limit the system settings and cross points that individual users can change After an account is configured the user logs into the system the settings in their account determine what they can and cannot do The primary benefit of the access control feature is the protection that clients are afforded from unintentional or accidental RF connection changes Rev K Page 7 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Access Control The QE3 matrix system features port level access control Each control module in our system has one or more access ports that are available for user interface They include a front panel keypad Ethernet port Telnet port Control In port and Remote port Users can control the system from any one of these access ports If access control is enabled for a port a user must first login with a user name and password before any system changes can be made For example with different access control settings a user could change the system settings from a serial port but be required to login with permissions from the keypad or Ethernet port This feature enables or disables the login and permissions requirements before a user can make changes to the system Circuit Elements of a QE3 Module The circuit elements for selectively connecting the inputs to any one of the outputs incorporates a switching module This module is comprised of input cards output car
283. stablished to from that card On an input card it indicates that at least 1 output card is currently connected to that input card Input and Output Card Hot Swapping Both input and output cards are hot swappable When an input card is removed all of the output cards connected to that input card are temporarily disabled When a new input card is inserted the routes between the cards are re established When an output card is removed only the output ports contained on that particular card are temporarily disabled All other output ports associated with the same input card remain active Controller Cards The controller cards are installed at the far left of the QE3 module behind the panel on which the Quintech logo appears Controller Cards Address On the front panel of the controller card are four rotary switches The rotary switch on the top regulates how the control board boots up The three rotary switches below that are used to specify the QE3 module s address Each QE3 module has a unique 3 digit address This address must match the switch settings on the three rotary switches at the bottom of the controller card When replacing the controller card check the controller card that is being removed and set the new controller card to the same switch settings as the one that is being replaced Rev K Page 15 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Active and Standby Controller The control card on the left is by default the active opera
284. stem inputs Always 3 characters Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 42 42 43 30 31 36 03 XX STX ADR ADR B B 0 1 6 ETX CHK Clear Q Sense backup input for system input 16 Response Format 06 XX XX 42 42 43 03 XX ACK ADR ADR B B C ETX CHK Page 42 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol BBR Read Q Sense Backup Input This command will return the Q Sense backup input which is configured for the specified primary input Command Format 02 XX XX 42 42 52 XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR B B R N3 N2 IN ETX CHK IN Primary Input to read status Must be between 001 and the number of system outputs Always 3 characters Example Command Sent 02 XX XX 42 42 52 30 31 36 03 XX STX ADR ADR B B R 0 1 6 ETX CHK Get Q Sense backup input for system primary input 16 Response Format 06 XX XX 42 42 52 XX XX XX XX XX XX 03 XX ACK ADR ADR B B R N3 N2 N1 BUI3 BUI2 BUII ETX CHK Example Response Sent 06 XX XX 42 42 52 30 31 36 30 30 34 3 XX ACK ADR ADR B B R 0 1 6 0 0 7 ETX CHK The Q Sense backup input for primary input 16 is input 7 Rev CL Page 43 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol BE Set Q Sense On Off Reset Ability of Input This command will set the Q Sense on off reset ability for the specified input Command Format 02 XX XX 42 45 XX XX XX XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR B E N3 I
285. t This makes it easy for a single driver to be used for both serial and Ethernet connections Telnet Telnet console window This provides an ASCII interface with a cursor for keyboard entry of commands The system is highly flexible and the access control feature can be configured to be on or off for each of the 5 possible control ports on an individual controller This also holds true for a system with a main controller and multiple remote controllers The control port access control must be set separately for the main unit and each of the remotes Page 138 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Port Access Control Enable Disable Option 3 in the Features Menu displays the Port Access Control Enable Disable screen Through this screen you can designate whether the access control system is on or off i e in effect or disabled for various control ports Note The Access Control option only appears in the Features Menu when you are logged in as the administrator and access control is on for the local keypad LCD port To navigate to the Port Access control Enable Disable screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 3 3 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 3 Features 2 Access Control Local On F1 On Off Change1 F4 Exit Figure 109 Port Access Control Enable Disable The ports for which access control can be enabled or disabled are as follows
286. t 4 2 etos teet 111 SRM Module Size Screen 94 SRO Module Size Screen 95 96 System Options Menu 87 System Setup Menu 90 Configuration Menu 88 89 Configuration Menu Pass Code Screen piace teeth E E kc ttu a 88 Configuration Settings Factory Configuration Settings 86 Connection Status Screen 45 COMME CLIONS sisi encdudisan ade pieta 21 AC Connections eese 21 Adding Additional Remotes 83 Change Connection Screen 47 Changing Connections 46 Connection Status Screen 45 Crosspoint Connections 45 Ethernet Connections 32 Inter Module Connections 22 Locking and Unlocking Connections 48 Module Interconnections 9 Monitoring Connections 46 Quintech UCM Port Crossover Adapteri eere uoi a ean 30 Remote Initialization Screen 85 Serial Quintech UCM Pin Definition To em ME 24 Turning Off an Output 48 XR Bus Connections 27 Connectors Quintech UCM Port 20 RF Connectors oett testet eae 23 Turning Off an Output 48 Rev K Console Telnet Console otia 33 Control In ir a 139 RS 485 Serial Control In Port Termination
287. t PP XRM 7 35 08 26 09 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Improved front panel interface Remote UCM support fixed 7 36 09 21 09 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Fix to SRM XRM systems Alarm report improvements 7 37 10 05 09 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Fix to S XAS XA commands 7 38 10 07 09 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Fixes Ethernet download 7 39 10 07 09 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Fixes Bridge card test mode Will not boot after download 7 40 10 07 09 2 15 07 Serial only 1550 D or later Fixes boot up problem Ethernet upgrade not functional 7 41 10 14 09 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Fixes boot up problem Ethernet upgrade functional 1550 D or later Fixes boot up problem Ethernet upgrade functional 7 43 9 14 10 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later QSENSE Priority lock and protection mode B command set Event SNMP traps ZG command 7 44 10 21 10 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later Corrective action for LC command and access control operation Correct ZI and ZL commands Add ZG keypad Screen 7 45 Page 8 of 157 02 15 11 2 15 07 Serial Ethernet 1550 D or later more user friendly Corrective action for fan read and GID default values XRI O commands made Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol Firmware Date Proto
288. t WWW in XXX from BRO command Description structure BR BRO out WWW gt in XXX Page 32 of 157 Even Even Outp Input description description ut number number OSENSE resi tore input command QSENSE rest tore output command Rev CL L Command Event XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol This event trap is generated on SRM QE3 XRM and SRM products This SNMP trap indicates that the L command has been successfully issued Complete trap lt L out WWW in XXX from userY portZ address AA gt Description structure lt L gt lt out WWW gt in XXX from userY portZ address AA Rev CL Event description Set Lock output command Output number Input number more event description User that issued the command Userl is the Admin up to user8 User 9 is no user logged in Port of access Local keypad 0 Remote port 1 Control in port 2 Ethernet A 3 Ethernet B 4 Telnet 5 SNMP 6 Serial address of 1RU remote or main controller nit the command originated from Page 33 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol S Command Event This event trap is generated on SRM QE3 XRM and SRM products This SNMP trap indicates that the S command has been successfully issued Complete trap lt S out WWW in XXX from userY portZ address AA gt QSENSE trap lt
289. t to use Simple or Advanced mode at the AGC Mode screen which is in the System Information Menu AGC mode Tt Change Options F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 46 AGC Mode Select F1 to enter the AGC mode screen where you can choose between Simple and Advanced modes Rev K Page 65 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Simple Mode Simple mode uses a simple timer that adjusts the input level at regular intervals The adjustment is made every time the simple AGC timer expires and is made in a single instance regardless of how large or small the change is The timer is then reset and the process is repeated Simple AGC Setup Simple AGC has three parameters per input that can be setup Delay Hysteresis and Zero Input dB Level Simple AGC Delay Simple AGC Delay is a timer 0 255s that determines the amount of time the system waits between input RF sampling and adjustment Once the RF is adjusted the timer is reset and the process repeats Simple AGC Hysteresis Hysteresis is the maximum level change in dB that the input level is allowed to vary before the delay timer can be triggered Simple AGC Zero Input dB Level The Zero Input dB Level is sthe default level setting applied if the input signal drops below 60 dBm with automatic gain control enabled This can prevent a large undershoot or overshoot of the signal when the RF has been removed and then quickly returns Page 66 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Ad
290. te Controllet s uc ios ooi ett edenda sedet 81 Master Slave eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee 73 Matrix Control Control Mode ssssss 719 Differences Between Main and Remote tis 719 Initializing Remotes 81 Load Firmware Screen 100 1 5 QE3 Matrix Switching System Setting the Control Mode 80 Matrix Control Software 156 Changing a Crosspoint 159 Controlling Monitoring 160 Controlling the Matrix 159 Creating and Managing Configurations ss 158 Customizing Input and Output Names nisse E Le con te 163 Ethernet vs Serial Communications 156 Event LOS ace cem h ia 167 General Parameters 158 Locking and Unlocking the Keypad onto e tdi E R uds 160 Matrix Customization 163 Monitoring eeeeeeeereene 156 Online Offline 161 PROMS oe doo SEMI 161 Setting Up the Communication Parameters editt perita 156 Testing the Communications 158 Unlocking Crosspoints 160 Matrix Customization 163 Matrix Inputs Outputs 90 Matrix Model Letti iis 90 Mattik SIZE snae ee 91 99 Maximum Cable Lengths 73 Maximum Number of Devices 73 Menus Access Control Menu
291. ted Reload Alarm This SNMP trap command indicates that a unit in the QE3 system has requested a reload of system parameters from the system controller This typically occurs during system start up and is usually not a reason for concern If the request occurs repeatedly then the error requires examination Complete trap Reload Alarm YYYZZ Description structure Reload Alarm gt Alarm description YYY Type of unit indicating the alarm ZZ Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board Page 30 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol QE3 Input Output RF Level Balance Alarm This SNMP trap indicates that the RF level difference between the output and connected input on an RF path has a difference greater than the customer set difference Complete trap Path Fault WWWxXXOutputY Y gt Description structure lt Path Fault gt WWW XX OutputYY Rev CL Alarm desc Type of un Address of the two righ ription it indicating the alarm the unit This number is the same as t rotary dials on the control board Unit outpu t number 1 64 Page 31 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol BR Command Event This SNMP trap indicates that the BR or BRO command has been successfully issued Complete trap S out WWW in XXX from BR command S ou
292. ted per box i e all inputs in that QEO receive the same attenuation value and can be attenuated from 0 0 dB to 15 5 dB It does not change regardless of the input signal strength Option 3 in the QEC Setup menu invokes the QEO Attenuation screen To invoke the QEO Attenuation screen from the main menu key sequence 2 1 factory settings code number F1 3 4 4 3 2 System Options 1 Configuration factory settings code number F1 3 Features 4 Options 4 QE3 Setup 3 QEO Attenuation QEO attenuation set at 0 0dB Fl Change F4 Exit Figure 84 QEO Attenuation Rev K Page 115 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System By default the QEO Attenuation screen displays the current QEO attenuation setting To change the current attenuation setting press F1 Arrow up or down to select the new value of input attenuation Nothing is set until you press F1 Current Value 0 0 New Value 0 0 Tt Scroll or Enter Fl Enter F4 Exit Figure 85 Set QEO Input Attenuation Page 116 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Q SENSE Q SENSE Description QE3 Q SENSE is a redundant input feature Q SENSE can be set up so that in the event of a RF level failure on a primary input the system will automatically switch to the backup input Q SENSE Priority The Q SENSE function has priority over all other access control and system settings This includes input access control output access control locked output priority
293. tion 76 Rev K Remotes Remotes Initialization Procedure 82 When to Execute iet 8l Remotes Initialization Adding Additional Remotes 83 Display Control Mode Init Remotes Men usc aided pec be cM at 82 Initializing Remotes 8l Remote Initialization Screen 85 Remotes Initialization Procedure 82 Replacement Cables 23 Report Power Supplies Status Screen 54 Report Power Supply Status 54 Reset Password Screen 40 Resetting the QEC Port Access P SS WOO iode deeds 40 Resistors Biasing Resistors 74 BEC E EE A bad eii s t UR 11 Input and Output RF Level Read 7 RF dBm Deyelss denoted ote 5 6 RF Level Monitoring 5 6 RF COBIDeCLOES iac Ii osito edet eet 23 REdBM Level deseos a NER 5 6 RF Level Read nene 7 RF Signals Accuracy of dBm Values 60 Changing Connections 46 Get Input RF Level 56 Get Output RF Level 58 63 Inter Module Connections 22 Locking and Unlocking Connections 48 Monitoring Connections 46 Read Input RF dBm Signal Level 56 Read Output RF dBm Signal Level59 63 Set Input RF Warning Level 53 Turning Off an Output 48 159 232 codi uto pet
294. tion Unlock output command Output number Input number more event description User that issued the command Userl is the Admin up to user8 User 9 is no user logged in Port of access Local keypad 0 Remote port 1 Control in port 2 Ethernet A 3 Ethernet B 4 Telnet 5 SNMP 6 Serial address of 1RU remote or main controller unit the command originated from Page 37 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Using QEC Commands This document provides a list of commands which can be used to control a Quintech matrix No hardware flow control is supported After a controlling program issues a command it must wait until it receives a response before issuing the next command QEC Telnet Console Command Structure There are three interfaces to send commands to the matrix controller a Telnet console a QEC Ethernet port and a serial port When sending commands over the serial or Ethernet ports a STX ETX bounded command packet is used This is described in the next section The packet structure is not used with the Telnet console interface The same commands are used but no address checksum or ETX STX packet boundaries are required For example to issue the Firmware Version command F you simply enter command mode on the console type F and hit the Enter key Page 38 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol QEC Protocol Message Structure Commands packets can be sent
295. tional controller It is labeled Control A on the front panel On the front panel the green LED represents the active controller while the orange LED represents the standby controller Either controller can be the active controller depending on which controller boots up first By default if both are operational at start up this will be control A If the QE3 is powered up with the left control A board removed the control B board will boot up as the active controller If control A is inserted after control B 1s booted control A will remain the standby controller Controller A is connected to the rear panel ports labeled NET1 and Serial 1 Controller B is connected to the rear panel ports labeled NET2 and Serial 2 These ports do not operate simultaneously Only one control board is functioning at a time The standby controller takes over in the event of an active controller failure If the front panel LED for a control card is off it indicates that no control card is installed or that the card has failed If a control card has failed the LED on the front of the control card will turn red Watchdog Timer The standby controller constantly polls the active controller hardware If the control card processor stops working the standby takes over control of the system No changes occur during this transition Controller Card Switch Setting The top rotary switch on the controller card controls the boot up method In most instances the switc
296. tl oen I t f babies aut Poets uta ef dd 10 Controller Module UCM sce testet titt tete rea e eid e pe ann 10 Input Distribution Module QED seen 10 Matrix Switch Module QE92 aa di teakiie coat o FaesDebue tei cosstepe da oder Faceus 10 Output Switch Module QEO iios restreint aee rae eeu S ES MXN Ee Ege ea ara arua 10 PEL OMY MS rS 11 System Modules Description 12 Controller Module ic eoi cotes phe einer ae eL oen reor sa vosu esise sossen 12 Redundant Control ArGhite etre scu idt m ote cu od este 12 Oonieliz duci 12 Controller Appearance s d uq ieu d eate dit des 13 Basic QE3 ATChICGCUIEO ciues opio ae ne et ave eR EE aep rko e Ue ouE avena pa ua EE NEN TAE FEROREE 14 Input and Output Cards 502s need quet tatit pes tocado peque ha Aig 15 Input and Output Card LEDS irte d aee e tette diate 15 Input and Output Card Hot Swapping eene 15 Controller Cards ao in oe EE E EE E EA Qe eee EEE 15 Controller Cards AOUreSSs ieri oL etie ett anna haaa i ae Eis 15 Active and Standby Controller este pee rtt tonat dte ar he Tho de 16 Watchdog TIMET c M 16 Controller Card Switch Settings oso irae oca siae ive a tian ec ide dieca tanec 16 Controller Card Hot SWwapplhg o qae de eo eed ees 17 Power Supplies aie ee prie ON EIE ES RUIT AR CHR UE RR ELE TERREA ARE Educa 18 Input Distribution Module QED
297. trix Switching System In 6 Backup none New backup Input 14 Fl Enter F4 Exit i Scroll or Enter Figure 91 Select Backup Input Now scroll or enter the input you want to select as backup F1 will select the input as backup This screen still displays that input 6 has not been assigned a backup input yet Input 6 Primary Input 14 Backup F1 Off F4 Exit tT Scroll or Enter Figure 92 Q SENSE Pair Displayed The new screen displays the new primary and backup pair At this screen F1 will now clear the status of both the primary and backup input and return the inputs to unused by Q SENSE status Page 122 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Q SENSE Threshold Set Q SENSE RF Level Threshold Tt Change options Fl Select F4 Exit Figure 93 Threshold Select F1 will enter the threshold setup function If an input RF level is not already set the input will display off Input 5 Off tT Scroll or Enter Fl Select F4 Exit Figure 94 Threshold Display Off Rev K Page 123 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Otherwise the current Threshold is displayed Input 4 12dBm i Scroll or Enter Fl Select F4 Exit Figure 95 Threshold Display On F1 selects the input then scroll up or down or enter the desired RF level No value is entered until the F1 key is pressed F4 exits the screen with no changes made Valid numbers are between 10 and 50 Q SENSE Manual Restore If an
298. tructure lt PSX gt Power supply number 1 on left 2 on right Temp Warning gt Alarm description lt YYY gt Type of unit indicating the alarm lt ZZ gt Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board Rev CL Page 27 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol QE3 Unit Temperature Alarm This SNMP trap command indicates the ambient temperature detected on the control board is exceeding normal operating limits Complete trap CPU temperature YYYZZ Description structure CPU temperature gt Alarm description YYY Type of unit indicating the alarm ZZ Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board Page 28 of 157 Rev CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol QE3 Fan RPM Low Alarm This SNMP trap command indicates the cooling fan on the rear panel is running slower than normal Complete trap Fan X low rpm YYYZZ gt Description structure lt Fan X gt Fan number indicating a fault Fans are numbered from left to right when viewing the rear panel lt low rpm gt Alarm description lt YYY gt Type of unit indicating the alarm lt ZZ gt Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board Rev CL Page 29 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol QE3 Unit Reques
299. tua pido vois conis 25 RS 232 Advantages Disadvantages 26 Serial Quintech UCM Pin Definition To 24 RS 232 Advantages Disadvantages 26 Ra p a dts 26 RS 422 Advantages Disadvantages 26 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Serial Quintech UCM Pin Definition Staten e e ves ee Ee Wess A 24 RS 422 Advantages Disadvantages 26 RSS sec eut ae 26 71 4 Wire and 2 Wire Systems 73 Balanced Line Interface 72 Balanced Signaling 71 Cable Lengths uds oed 73 Data Encoding Scheme 12 Front Panel RS 485 Termination 75 Master Slave cseeeeee 73 Maximum Cable Lengths 73 Maximum Number of Devices 73 Noise Immunity sss 72 Receiver Transmitter Termination 74 RS 485 Basics 71 RS 485 Pinout eesss 73 RS 485 Port Termination 76 RS 485 Serial Control In Port Termination eese 76 RS 485 Termination Screen 75 Serial Quintech UCM Pin Definition Menem soccer setae ae 24 Serial Termination 44 Signal Reflection 74 Unbalanced Signal 71 Unbalanced Signaling 71 Which Ports Are RS 485 75 RS 485 Basics eese 71 RS 485 Pinout eese 73 RS 485 Port Termination
300. upplied with at least one controller module The controller module is typically integrated into one of the QE3 switching modules and interfaces with the entire switching system The controller allows you to setup and use the system to fit your particular requirements maintain user accounts for a multiple user environment and monitor and modify the RF connections This can all be done from the controller s front panel keypad interface or computer connection In addition the controller has several ports on the rear panel to facilitate control from a PC and communication with other system modules Redundant Control Architecture The QE3 contains redundant control cards There is an active control card and a standby control card Only one controller is operational at a time By default if both controllers are operational controller A is the main controller and controller B is in backup If the active controller fails or is physically removed the standby controller boots up and takes control of the QE3 system Each control card has its own Ethernet and serial port Both control cards share the single front panel LCD and keypad Controller Ports The serial ports are labeled Serial 1 and Serial 2 These ports are used for computer control They are typically connected directly to a PC if the system is being controlled remotely with a serial connection There are two XR Bus ports One is labeled XR Bus In and the other is labeled XR Bus Out
301. ure or the card has been removed from the chassis The QE3 has 2 types of cards Input and output cards There are 8 input cards each supporting 8 inputs for possible total of 8 inptu cards numbered freom right to left There are 8 output cards but each output cards supports 16 outputs There are 2 banks of output cards each bank supports the upper or lower 32 inputs Four lower bank cards support outputs 1 64 but only inputs 1 32 Four upper bank output cards support 64 outputs but only 33 64 inputs This trap indicates the type and location and output bank of the failure The QE3 also has a backup control card If the control card goes offline it will send a trap also Complete trap Out card WW XX YY YZZ Lower Bank Offline Out card WW XX YY YZZ Upper Bank Offline In card WW XX 0 YYYZZ Offline Control card XXXYY offline error Rev CL Page 23 of 157 XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRE MRMILTE Series Protocol Description structure Control card Output card Input card gt Cards type description lt WW XX gt Inputs or output range supported by indicated card lt YV YS Type of unit indicating the alarm lt ZZ gt Address of the unit This number is the same as the two right rotary dials on the control board lt Upper bank gt 4 Output cards on right of unit ll Ds Lower bank Output cards on left of unit offline Alarm description Example Alarm
302. v CL XRM QE3 QRM SRM MRF MRMILTE Series Protocol XGM Set Gain Control to Manual Mode This is a QE3 command not an XRM command Gain control can be set to manual or automatic This command turns on manual gain control for the specified input By default when an input is set to manual mode the auto gain control settings are turned off An input can be set to automatic or manual gain control not both at the same time This command has 2 formats Both commands turn on the manual gain control for the input One sets the input to the previous manual dB value The other sets the value to the dB value given in the command Valid values for manual gain control are between 18dBm and 13 5dBm Tenths values if entered incorrectly will be set to 0 or 5 depending on the input value Input 5 or higher set to 5 4 or lower will be set to 0 All 3 values are variable in length Leading zeros are not necessary The values must be separated by the or symbols and the tenth value must be separated by the period symbol Values outside the range of 18 to 13 5 will be rejected EXAMPLE 13 6 and 18 1 are invalid values Manual gain control can be set to amplify or attenuate an input Manual gain control has no feedback or internal adjusting The manual dB value is what is applied to the input regardless of signal strength Command Format 1 02 XX XX 58 47 41 4D XX 03 XX STX ADR ADR X G M DIN om wo ETX CHK Command Format 2
303. vanced Mode Advanced AGC mode utilizes multiple timers that determine how the system will react to user RF level changes at the input s Different timers can set the input reaction times and how fast or slow the RF level will be adjusted to match the set input Current AGC mode 1 M1 is Advanced AGC M2 is Simple AGC Fl Change F4 Exit Figure 47 AGC Mode Select The current system setting is at the top of the screen Pressing Fl will reconfigure all system inputs to the other mode Changing a system requires configuring all inputs This process may take a few seconds A message will temporarily be displayed while the system is busy Reconfiguring system Please wait Rev K Page 67 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Advanced AGC Setup Advanced AGC utilizes multiple timers and has six parameters per input that can be configured Hysteresis Zero Input dB Level PreAttack Delay Time PreDecay Delay Time Attack Delay Time Decay Delay Time Advanced AGC Hysteresis Hysteresis is the maximum level change in dB that the Input Level is allowed to vary before either the PreAttack or PreDecay timer can be triggered Advanced AGC Zero Input dB Level Zero Input dB Level is the defaultlevel setting applied if the input signal drops below 60 dBm with automatic gain control on This can prevent a large undershoot or overshoot of the signal when the RF has been removed and then quickly returns The Zero Input dB Level remains
304. version information press F1 The Firmware Version screen will be displayed This screen is displayed for 5 seconds before automatically reverting back to the System Information Menu QE3 2500 64x64 Protocol Ver 2 15 Firmware Ver 9 XX Figure 19 Firmware Version QE3 System Labels If the system has more than 64 inputs or 64 outputs certain menus may prompt you for a label This label is stamped on the rear panel at the factory and represents the placement of the module in the system If your system is only a single 64x64 module the label is QAI If the system has multiple modules refer to the rear panel for the correct label Switch modules are label QA1 QA2 QB1 QB2 etc Input modules are labeled QI1 1 QI2 1 etc Output modules are labeled QO1 1 QO2 1 etc The screens will prompt you for a label Page 50 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Each unit in a system has a unique character label F1 continue Figure 20 Label Prompt 1 Label starts with Q then a letter then a number Fl continue Figure 21 Label Prompt 2 Input and Output modules have an additional character F1 continue Figure 22 Label Prompt 3 Rev K Page 51 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System This character is a 1 or 2 F1 continue Figure 23 Label Prompt 4 Enter the label of the QED QE3 QEO unit you want to poll F1 continue Figure 24 Label Prompt 5 F1 done F2 gt F3 F4 Exit L
305. ways only one main controller If your system contains more than one controller and you configure more than one of those controllers as a main controller your system will not work properly To check the controller s mode refer to Checking Control Mode If you need to change the mode of the controller refer to Set Control Mode Rev K Page 85 of 176 QE3 Matrix Switching System Factory Configuration Settings System Options Menu The System Options Menu is a critical part of the system hierarchy From this menu you can select options to make your system function differently or not function at all Here is a list of functions available in the System Options Menu Change the number of inputs Change the number of outputs Change the Model number Setup SRM XRM QE3 systems Assign alpha numeric names to inputs Assign alpha numeric names to outputs Load new firmware Set the control mode Initialize remote controllers Set up SNMP protocol Set up can bus error reporting Enable disable access control for 5 ports Set up Ethernet communication Set up serial port communications The serial and Ethernet software settings are non critical to system functionality These settings are determined by how you are communicating with the controller Refer to Communications Setup Page 86 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Option 2 of the Main Menu displays the System Options Menu 2 System Options 1 Configuration 2
306. wer Supply Fan Condition Monitoring eee 4 Internal Air Temperature Monitoring eene 4 Power Supply Temperature Monitoring eene 5 Input RF Warning Level Threshold Monitoring eese 5 LCD Status NIOIDDID last eee eevee tia oie n eaa d ee ae 5 Error Re porn MH 5 Gan Controler ire ae tpa on LOS E DR av x D i Roh Fosb dip EURO E 5 Automatic Gar Control iso eec Hd onte a das ae esdide eee 6 Manual Cram COhtrol 5 oes e eee dee a besito dite cete sies 6 Alarm Condition Notification es sortie itat ers Posee coto duh estela eade tuis bien 6 Alarm Message QUEUS rennin nnii qu RN ES IR EY Re a EN SNNT ULP EUCSAR EVO Rode EP epe Ra eue 6 SNMP Traps uen mc red oC anode dd cato He ro E La e aD M 7 Input and Output RF Level Read iac dee quoe eene aan 7 User Permissions x eee eb eaten edd Rete tesi te usta dete ES Gees 7 ACCESS CONT Olore aer ae a t ota ie lef ar onh 8 Circuit Elements of a QE3 Module ceti rideau lee eoo dece ta dre coe Si Re ders 8 Bay aeri PEUT 8 System Upgrades cocci uet Puit e a A E Led imt uade fotub etant tas 9 SYSTEM SIZ6S 2 eret run ene aeo CEPR OE RS PER EA E e NHAa E SUR TOR Ee d eR 0 9 Rev K 1 QE3 Matrix Switching System iln me sis soss 9 Module Inter Connections oos di ater pe ege itio ee iles quee aede er edere ies dtes seed tuer 9 Types Ol Modules 5 eoo vette tat u
307. where you can choose another user whose name or password you want to change From the User Selection Screen press F4 to return to the Setup Menu Defining Group Permissions Permission for each output or input for each group is assigned through the Set Access menu option Set Access The Set Access menu option in the setup directory is where Admin sets permissions for the groups To navigate to the Set Access screen from the main menu key sequence 3 3 2 3 Access Control 3 Setup 2 Set Access User fl 2 user2 F1 Select F4 Exit Figure 121 Select User Page 148 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Setting User Access If users have a fixed assignment to a group the associated user name will also be displayed after the group number Use the up and down arrow keys to display the group whose access capabilities you wish to modify then press F1 to select that group The Set Access Screen will be displayed Admin Output 1 Allow F1 Change F2 Out In Figure 122 Set Output Access The Set Access Screen allows you to grant or deny a particular group access to each of the output ports Use the up and down scroll arrows to display a particular output port or control port then press the F1 key to display Allow or Deny for that output Repeat the process as often as necessary until the proper access has been set up for each group for each output After the proper access has configured pres
308. y press F1 if you have the firmware ready for download Download firmware then power cycle to exit upgrade mode Figure 73 Download Firmware Page 100 of 176 Rev K QE3 Matrix Switching System Exiting Download Mode If you accidentally put the QE3 in download mode you can power cycle the unit or pull out and reinsert the control board Removing the control board will not interrupt the crosspoints The control board will reboot without interrupting any crosspoints or changing any system parameters Firmware Upgrade Kit A firmware upgrade kit only comes from Quintech service personnel A firmware upgrade kit will come as a zipped set of files that will contain all the files needed to download new firmware to your QE3 Instructions on how to do this procedure will be included in the zip file Upgrade kits include files to download from the Ethernet port or the serial port Firmware Download Instructions The instructions to download firmware are included in an upgrade kit There are instructions for an Ethernet download and separate instructions for a serial port download Firmware Download Preparation QE3 systems manufactured after September 2006 have internal QE3 memory that allows firmware upgrades without system parameter modification Previous QE3 models will change system parameters back to factory default after a firmware upgrade QE3 Internal Memory QE3s manufactured after September 2006 are manufactured with

QE3 Manual rev K PDF - SX

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents